Communication device

ABSTRACT

A communication device, which can simplify various setting processes, transmits, to a server via a network, external device information received from an external device by using proximity wireless communication. The communication device includes: an antenna for the proximity wireless communication with the external device; a proximity wireless communication unit communicating with the external device via the antenna to receive the external device information from the external device; an external device storage unit storing the external device information received by the proximity wireless communication unit; a registration information generation unit generating registration information to be registered in a database in the server based on (a) the external device information stored in the external device storage unit and (b) communication device information including communication device identification information for identifying the communication device; and a server communication unit transmitting registration information to the server via the network.

TECHNICAL FIELD

The present invention relates to communication devices, and moreparticularly to a communication device that reads external deviceinformation from an external device using proximity wirelesscommunication and transmits the external device information to a serverconnected via a general-purpose network.

BACKGROUND ART

In recent years, services provided via the Internet have beenincreasingly prevalent. As servers manage text information, images,videos, and the like created by users as well as news, weather forecast,movie information, and other contents created by companies, services forsupplying these contents any time via the Internet have also beenrapidly increased.

One of the services is photograph sharing service. A user can uploadphotographs taken by the user himself/herself to a server, and laterview the photographed images any time by accessing the server from apersonal computer or the like via the Internet.

In order to upload photographed images to a server, products haverecently been developed to facilitate the uploading procedure. Digitalcameras, memory cards, and the like have wireless LAN function toautomatically upload photographed images directly to a server by simpleprocedures.

On the other hand, in order to download and display images uploaded to aserver, the following television sets (hereinafter, TVs) are currentlyon the market. The TVs are connectable to the Internet. A user uses sucha TV to access a server and logins with, for example, a user ID and apassword, thereby obtaining images from the server.

However, the downloading procedures still use conventional interfacetechniques of personal computers. Therefore, the operability is notimproved. The TVs with Internet function, which are recently on themarket, require pressing buttons of a remote controller some dozenstimes to download data such as photographs. A user needs to read amanual to follow the complicated procedures. This would not be a highobstacle for young generations and those having high computer skills.However, such procedures requiring relatively high skills arecomplicated and bothersome for middle-aged and elderly people andgeneral women. Users not familiar with computer operations finddifficult to enjoy the services. The problem in operability has beenexamined to be improved, but the improved techniques are not differentfrom the conventional computer operation methods. The operability is notsignificantly improved.

Patent Reference 1 discloses the following technique. A display deviceconnected to a server has a Radio Frequency IDentification (RF-ID)reader. An object (commodity, merchandise, or the like) is provided witha RF-ID tag including a non-rewritable memory in which object UniqueIDentification (UID) is stored. A server has a database in which theobject ID (UID) is associated with an image such as a user's facephotograph. When the object is brought to proximity of the RF-ID reader,the RF-ID reader reads the UID from the tag, and the image, such as auser's face photograph, associated with the UID is retrieved from thedatabase to be displayed on the display device. Thereby, the owner ofthe object is determined.

PRIOR ART Patent Reference

Patent Reference 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application PublicationNo. 2005-63427

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Problems that Invention is to Solve

As described earlier, the system for providing the photograph sharingservice by using a TV has a problem. Since a TV is generally operated bya remote controller, it is quite bothersome to access a server and toenter a user ID and a password.

Patent Reference 1 discloses that the display device having a RF-IDreader and an object provided with a RF-ID tag make it possible toeasily display image data, such as a face photograph of an owner of theobject. However, the RF-ID tag merely holding UID does not exchangeinformation to facilitate access between the TV terminal and the server.The RF-ID tag fails to facilitate the operation procedures. Since aRF-ID tag provided to an object holds only UID, it is not possible toobtain image information associated with UID when each object isconnected to a different server.

In addition, the above-described Patent Reference 1 has another problem.The TV terminal needs to hold various different application programs(programs for downloading images, for example) compliant to variousitems, item kinds, or application systems of the objects provided withRF-ID. Therefore, the TV terminal needs a storage device to store thesevarious application programs. Moreover, it is burdensome to followversion-up of the programs.

The present invention addresses the above-described problems. It is anobject of the present invention to provide a communication devicecapable of simplifying various settings of an object (external device).

Means to Solve the Problems

In accordance with an aspect of the present invention for achieving theobject, there is provided a communication device that transmits externaldevice information to a server via a network, the external deviceinformation being received from an external device by using proximitywireless communication.

The communication device includes: an antenna unit for the proximitywireless communication with the external device; a proximity wirelesscommunication unit configured to communicate with the external devicevia said antenna unit to receive the external device information fromthe external device; an external device storage unit configured to storethe external device information received by said proximity wirelesscommunication unit; a registration information generation unitconfigured to generate registration information based on (a) theexternal device information stored in said external device storage unitand (b) communication device information including communication deviceidentification information for identifying said communication device,the registration information being information to be registered in adatabase in the server; and a server communication unit configured totransmit the registration information to the server via the network.

Thereby, it is possible to implement a communication device capable ofsimplifying various settings of an object (external device). Forexample, the above structure is useful when a user of the externaldevice intends to register information of the external device to aserver or the like (hereinafter, the registration is also referred toalso as “user registration” or “product registration”), by a singleoperation using the communication device such as a mobile device.

It should be noted that the present invention can be implemented notonly as the device, but also as an integrated circuit including theunits in the device, a method including steps performed by the units inthe device, a program causing a computer to execute the steps, andinformation, data, or signals indicating the program. The program,information, data, and signals can be distributed by a recording mediumsuch as a Compact Disc-Read Only Memory (CD-ROM) or a communicationmedium such as the Internet.

Effects of the Invention

The present invention can implement a communication device capable ofsimplifying various settings of an object (external device).

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 illustrates an entire system of an image capturing deviceaccording to a first embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 2A is an external view of the image capturing device according tothe first embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 2B is an external view of the image capturing device according tothe first embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 2C is an external view of the image capturing device according tothe first embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the image capturing device according to thefirst embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a second memory in the image capturingdevice according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the second memory in the image capturingdevice according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram of image display method instructioninformation of the image capturing device according to the firstembodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart of processing performed by the image capturingdevice and a TV, according to the first embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the processing performed by the image capturingdevice and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the processing performed by the image capturingdevice and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the processing performed by the imagecapturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the processing performed by the imagecapturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the processing performed by the imagecapturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the processing performed by the imagecapturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the processing performed by the imagecapturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the processing performed by the imagecapturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the processing performed by the imagecapturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the processing performed by the imagecapturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the processing performed by the imagecapturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the processing performed by the imagecapturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 20A is a flowchart of the processing performed by the imagecapturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 20B is a flowchart of the processing performed by the imagecapturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 21A is a flowchart of the processing performed by the imagecapturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 21B is a flowchart of the processing performed by the imagecapturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 22A is a diagram presenting a display method of the image capturingdevice and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIG. 22B is a diagram presenting a display method of the image capturingdevice and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram of a RF-ID unit in the image capturing devicefor storing an operation program, a remote controller of the TV, and theTV.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart of processing for transferring and executing theoperation program stored in the RF-ID unit.

FIG. 25 presents an example of description of the operation program fordownloading image and executing slide show.

FIG. 26 is a block diagram of (a) the TV changing processing of theoperation program according to a language code, and (b) a server storingthe program.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart of processing for changing processing of theoperation program according to a language code.

FIG. 28 is a block diagram of a home network 6500 connecting the imagecapturing device 1 to the TV 45 by a wireless LAN.

FIG. 29 presents an example of an authentication method without usingRF-ID unit.

FIG. 30 presents an example of an authentication method using RF-IDunit.

FIG. 31 presents an example of an authentication method used when it isdifficult to move a terminal into proximity of another terminal.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart of an example of processing performed by acamera.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart of an example of processing performed by the TV.

FIG. 34 is a block diagram of (a) a first processing unit generating theoperation program in the image capturing device 1 to be executed by theTV, and (b) a second memory unit.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart of processing performed by a program generationunit 7005 in the first processing unit.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart of an example of a program generated by theprogram generation unit 7005.

FIG. 37 is a block diagram of (a) the first processing unit generatingthe operation program in the image capturing device 1 to display a usestatus of the image capturing device 1, and (b) the second memory unit.

FIG. 38 illustrates a use example where the program generated by theimage capturing device 1 is executed by an external device (apparatus).

FIG. 39 is a sequence where the program generated by the image capturingdevice 1 is executed by a remote controller with display function.

FIG. 40A is a flowchart of uploading steps in a camera according to asecond embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 40B is a flowchart of uploading steps in the camera according tothe second embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 40C is a flowchart of uploading steps in the camera according tothe second embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 40D is a flowchart of uploading steps in the camera according tothe second embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 40E is a flowchart of uploading steps in the camera according tothe second embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart of uploading steps in the camera according to thesecond embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 42A is a flowchart of uploading steps in the camera according tothe first embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 42B is a flowchart of uploading steps in the camera according tothe first embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 42C is a flowchart of uploading steps in the camera according tothe first embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 42D is a flowchart of uploading steps in the camera according tothe first embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart of operation steps of a RF-ID unit in the cameraaccording to the second embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 44 is a block diagram of a TV according to the second embodiment ofthe present invention.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart of RF-ID communication between the camera and theTV, according to the second embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 46A is a flowchart presenting details of FIG. 45.

FIG. 46B is a flowchart presenting details of FIG. 45.

FIG. 46C is a flowchart presenting details of FIG. 45.

FIG. 46D is a flowchart presenting details of FIG. 45.

FIG. 47A presents a data format of the RF-ID communication between thecamera and the TV.

FIG. 47B presents a data format of the RF-ID communication between thecamera and the TV.

FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram of an electronic catalog display system.

FIG. 49 is a block diagram of an electronic catalog server informationinput device.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart of steps of processing performed by theelectronic catalog server information input device.

FIG. 51 is a block diagram of a RF-ID unit of an electronic catalognotification card.

FIG. 52 is a block diagram of a TV displaying an electronic catalog.

FIG. 53 is a block diagram of an electronic catalog server.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart of steps of processing performed by theelectronic catalog server.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart of steps of processing performed by a TVdisplaying the electronic catalog.

FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating screen display of the electroniccatalog.

FIG. 57 is a table of a data structure of a customer attribute database.

FIG. 58 is a table of a data structure of an electronic catalogdatabase.

FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram of a RF-ID-attached post card mailingsystem.

FIG. 60 is a block diagram of a TV in the RF-ID-attached post cardmailing system.

FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating screen display in image selectionoperation by the RF-ID-attached post card mailing system.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart of steps of processing performed by an imageserver in the RF-ID-attached post card mailing system.

FIG. 63 is a block diagram of a system according to a fifth embodimentof the present invention.

FIG. 64A is a diagram illustrating an example of fixed information of amailing object according to the fifth embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIG. 64B is a diagram illustrating an example of fixed information ofthe mailing object according to the fifth embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIG. 64C is a diagram illustrating an example of fixed information ofthe mailing object according to the fifth embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart of processing for associating an image capturingdevice with an image server, according to the fifth embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart of processing for registering the image capturingdevice with a relay server, according to the fifth embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating an example of a mailing objectattached with a 2-dimensional code.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart of processing using a 2-dimensional bar-code ofthe image capturing device according to the fifth embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart of processing performed by a TV according to thefifth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart of processing performed by the relay serveraccording to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 71 is a schematic diagram of an image transmitting side accordingto a sixth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of an image receiving side according tothe sixth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart of processing performed by a TV transmittingimage according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart of processing performed by a TV receiving imageaccording to the sixth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 75A is a flowchart of another example of processing performed bythe TV transmitting image according to the sixth embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 75B is a flowchart of another example of processing performed bythe TV transmitting image according to the sixth embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 76 is a table of an example of information recorded in a mailingobject memory unit according to the sixth embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIG. 77 is a block diagram of a recorder according to an embodiment ofthe present invention.

FIG. 78 is a block diagram of a RF-ID card according to an embodiment ofthe present invention.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart of steps of registering setting information to aserver.

FIG. 80 is a table of pieces of setting information registered in theserver.

FIG. 81 is a table of pieces of apparatus operation informationregistered in the RF-ID card.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart of steps of updating setting information of arecorder by the RF-ID card.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart of steps of obtaining the setting informationfrom the server.

FIG. 84 is a table of apparatus operation information registered in theRF-ID card used in the recorder.

FIG. 85 is a table of apparatus operation information registered in theRF-ID card used in a vehicle navigation device.

FIG. 86 is a block diagram of a configuration where a remote controllerof a TV or the like has a RF-ID reader, according to an embodiment ofthe present invention.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart of processing performed by the aboveconfiguration according to the above embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIG. 88 is a block diagram of a system according to an eighth embodimentof the present invention.

FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram illustrating a method of managing, in adatabase of a server, communication device information and externaldevice information transmitted from a communication device, according tothe eighth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 90 is a schematic diagram of an example of a URI that is accesscontrol information generated by an access control informationgeneration unit of the communication device to control access to aserver 8003, according to the eighth embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIG. 91 is a diagram of a network environment in home ID registration.

FIG. 92 is a hardware diagram of the communication device in the home IDregistration.

FIG. 93 is a functional block diagram of the communication device in thehome ID registration.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the home ID registration.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart of home ID obtainment.

FIG. 96 is a sequence diagram of the home ID registration.

FIG. 97 is a functional block diagram of communication devices in homeID sharing.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart of processing performed by a receivingcommunication device in the home ID sharing (using proximity wirelesscommunication).

FIG. 99 is a flowchart of processing performed by a transmittingcommunication device in the home ID sharing (using proximity wirelesscommunication).

FIG. 100 is a sequence diagram of the home ID sharing (using proximitywireless communication).

FIG. 101 is a flowchart of processing performed by the receivingcommunication device in the home ID sharing (using a home networkdevice).

FIG. 102 is a flowchart of processing performed by the transmittingcommunication device in the home ID sharing (using the home networkdevice).

FIG. 103 is a sequence diagram of the home ID sharing (using the homenetwork device).

FIG. 104 is a block diagram of a device management system according toan eleventh embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 105 is a sequence diagram of the device management system accordingto the eleventh embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 106 is a schematic diagram of a structure of a device managementdatabase according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 107 is a schematic diagram of display of the device managementsystem according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 108 is a functional block diagram of a RF-ID unit N10 according toa twelfth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 109 is a functional block diagram of a mobile device N20 accordingto the twelfth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 110 is a functional block diagram of a registration server N40according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating an example of an arrangement ofnetworked products according to the twelfth embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating an example of a system according tothe twelfth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 113 is a sequence diagram for registering information of a TV N10Ainto a registration server N40, according to the twelfth embodiment ofthe present invention.

FIG. 114A is a table illustrating an example of a structure of productinformation according to the twelfth embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIG. 114B is a table illustrating an example of a structure of serverregistration information according to the twelfth embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 115A is a table illustrating an example of a structure of productinformation stored in a product information management unit N45according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 115B is a table illustrating an example of product informationmanaged in the product information management unit N45 according to thetwelfth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing performedby a RF-ID unit N10 to perform product registration according to thetwelfth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing performedby a mobile device N20 to perform product registration according to thetwelfth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 118 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing performedby a registration server N40 to perform product registration accordingto the twelfth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 119 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of controllingpower for an air conditioner N10J and a TV N10A according to the twelfthembodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 120A is a table illustrating an example of a structure ofpositional information according to the twelfth embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 120B is a table illustrating an example of a structure of firstproduct control information according to the twelfth embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 120C is a table illustrating an example of a structure of secondproduct control information according to the twelfth embodiment of thepresent invention.

FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating a product map generated by a positioninformation generation unit N48 according to the twelfth embodiment ofthe present invention.

FIG. 122 is a table illustrating an example of a structure of productinformation stored in the product information management unit N45according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 123 is a diagram illustrating a product map generated by theposition information generation unit N48 according to the twelfthembodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 124 is a table illustrating examples of an accuracy identifieraccording to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating an example of a system according tothe twelfth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 126 is a diagram illustrating an example of an entire systemaccording to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating an example of an arrangement ofproducts embedded with RF-ID units O50 according to the thirteenthembodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating an example of a three-dimensional(3D) map of a building, which is building coordinate informationextracted from a building coordinate database O104 according to thethirteenth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating an example of image data of a 3D mapof products which is generated by a program execution unit O65 accordingto the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating an example of a 3D product map inwhich image data of FIG. 128 is combined with the already-displayedimage data of FIG. 129 by a display unit O68 d according to thethirteenth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 131 is a table illustrating examples of an accuracy identifieraccording to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 132 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing for the 3Dmap according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing for the 3Dmap according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific small powerwireless communication system using the 3D map according to thethirteenth embodiment of the present invention.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The following describes communication devices according to embodimentsof the present invention in detail with reference to the drawings. Inthe following first to thirteenth embodiments, various aspects of thecommunication device according to the present invention are described.Among them, the eighth embodiment is the most preferred embodimentdirectly related to the primary aspect of the present invention.

First Embodiment

The first embodiment according to the present invention is describedbelow. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the first embodiment of thepresent invention. Here, a communication system including an imagecapturing device (camera) 1, a TV 45, and a server 42 is illustrated. InFIG. 1, the image capturing device 1 capturing images is illustrated ona left-hand side, while the image capturing device 1 reproducing thecaptured images is illustrated on a right-hand side.

The image capturing device 1 is an example of the communication deviceaccording to the aspect of the present invention. Here, the imagecapturing device 1 is implemented as a digital camera. For units used incapturing images, the image capturing device 1 includes a first powersupply unit 101, a video processing unit 31, a first antenna 20, a firstprocessing unit 35, a second memory 52, and a RF-ID antenna (secondantenna) 21. The second memory 52 holds medium identificationinformation 111, captured image state information 60, and serverspecific information 48. The RF-ID antenna 21 is used for a RF-ID unit.For units used in reproducing images, the image capturing device 1includes the first power supply unit 101, a first memory 174, a powerdetection unit 172, an activation unit 170, the second memory 52, asecond processing unit 95, a modulation switch unit 179, a communicationunit 171, a second power supply unit 91, and the RF-ID antenna 21. Thesecond memory 52 holds medium identification information 111, capturedimage state information 60, and the server specific information 48.

The TV 45 is an example of an apparatus (device) connected to a readervia a communication path. In more detail, the TV 45 is a televisionreceiving apparatus used to display image data captured by the imagecapturing device 1. The TV 45 includes a display unit 110 and a RF-IDreader/writer 46.

The server 42 is a computer that holds image data uploaded from theimage capturing device 1 and that downloads the image data to the TV 45.The server 42 has a storage device in which data 50 is stored.

When images of objects such as scenery are captured, the images areconverted to captured data (image data) by the video processing unit 31data. Then, in communicable conditions, the image data is transmitted toan access point using the first antenna 20 for a wireless Local AreaNetwork (LAN) or Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access(WiMAX), and eventually recorded as the data 50 via the Internet to thepredetermined server 42.

Here, the first processing unit 35 records the captured image stateinformation 60 regarding the captured image data onto the second memory52 in a RF-ID unit 47. The captured image state information 60 indicatesat least one of (a) date of time of capturing each of the images, (b)the number of the captured images, (c) date and time of finallytransmitting (uploading) an image, (d) the number of transmitted(uploaded) images, and (e) date and time of finally capturing an image.In addition, the captured image state information 60 includes (f) serialnumbers of images that have already been uploaded or images that havenot yet been uploaded; (g) a serial number of a finally captured image;and the like.

In addition, the first processing unit 35 generates a Uniform ResourceLocator (URL) of the data 50 that is uploaded to the server 42. Thefirst processing unit 35 records the server specific information 48 ontothe second memory 52. The server specific information 48 is used toaccess the image data. The medium identification information 111 is alsorecorded on the second memory 52. The medium identification information111 is used to determine whether the device embedded with the RF-ID(RF-ID unit) is a camera, a card, or a post card.

When a main power of the camera (the first power supply unit 101 such asa battery) is ON, the second memory 52 receives power from the mainpower. Even if the main power of the camera is OFF, the external RF-IDreader/writer is located outside supplies power to the RF-ID antenna 21.This enables the passive second power supply unit 91 without any powerlike a battery to adjust a voltage to provide power to respective unitsin a RF-ID circuit unit including the second memory. Thereby, it ispossible to supply power to the second memory 52 so that the data isexchanged between the second memory 52 and the external device to berecorded and reproduced. Here, the second power supply unit 91 is acircuit generating power from radio waves received by the second antenna(RF-ID antenna) 21. The second power supply unit 91 includes a rectifiercircuit and the like. Whenever the main power is ON or OFF, the data inthe second memory 52 is read and written by the second processing unit95. When the main power is ON, the data in the second memory 52 can beread and written also by the first processing unit 35. In other words,the second memory 52 is implemented as a nonvolatile memory, and boththe first processing unit 35 and the second processing unit 95 can readand write data from and to the second memory 52.

When the image capturing device 1 completes capturing images of a tripor the like and then the captured images are to be reproduced, the imagecapturing device 1 is moved into proximity of the RF-ID reader/writer 46of the TV 45, as illustrated on the right side of FIG. 1 as being thesituation of reproducing images. Then, the RF-ID reader/writer 46supplies power to the RF-ID unit 47 via the second antenna 21, andthereby the second power supply unit 91 provides power to the units inthe RF-ID unit 47, even if the main power (the first power supply unit101) of the image capturing device 1 is OFF. The captured image stateinformation 60 and the server specific information 48 are read by thesecond processing unit 95 from the second memory 52, and transmitted tothe TV 45 via the second antenna 21. The TV 45 generates a URL based onthe server specific information 48, then downloads the image data of thedata 50 from the server 42, and eventually displays, on the display unit110, thumbnails or the like of images in the image data. If it isdetermined based on the captured image state information 60 that thereis any captured image not yet been uploaded to the server 42, thedetermination result is displayed on the display unit 110. If necessary,the image capturing device 1 is activated to upload, to the server 42,image data of the captured image not yet been uploaded.

FIGS. 2A, 2B, and 2C are an external front view, an external back view,and an external right side view, respectively, of the image capturingdevice 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

As illustrated in FIG. 2C, the first antenna 20 used for a wireless LANand the second antenna 21 used for the RF-ID unit are embedded in aright side of the image capturing device 1. The antennas are coveredwith an antenna cover 22 made of a material not shielding radio waves.The RF-ID unit operates at a frequency of 13.5 MHz, while the wirelessLAN operates at a frequency of 2.5 GHz. The significant difference infrequency prevents interference between them. Therefore, the twoantennas 20 and 21 are seen overlapping with each other from theoutside, as illustrated in FIG. 2C. The structure decreases aninstallation area of the antennas, eventually reducing a size of theimage capturing device 1. The structure also enables the single antennacover 22 to cover both of the two antennas as illustrated in FIG. 2C, sothat the part made of the material not shielding radio waves isminimized. The material not shielding radio waves, such as plastic, hasa strength lower than that of a metal. Therefore, the minimization ofthe material can reduce a decrease in a strength of a body of the imagecapturing device 1. The image capturing device 1 further includes a lens6 and a power switch 3. The units assigned with numeral references 2 to16 will be described later.

FIG. 3 is a detailed block diagram of the image capturing device 1.

Image data captured by an image capturing unit 30 is provided to arecording/reproducing unit 32 via the video processing unit 31 and thenrecorded onto a third memory 33. The image data is eventually recordedonto an Integrated Circuit (IC) card 34 that is removable from the imagecapturing device 1.

The above processing is instructed by the first processing unit 35 thatis, for example, a Central Processing Unit (CPU). The image data, suchas captured photographs or video, is provided to an encryption unit 36,a transmission unit 38 in a communication unit 37, and then the firstantenna 20, in order to be transmitted to an access point or the like byradio via a wireless LAN, WiMAX, or the like. From the access point orthe like, the image data is transmitted to the server 42 via theInternet 40. In the above manner, the image data such as photographs isuploaded.

There is a situation where a part of the image data fails to be uploadedbecause, for example, the communication state is not good or there is nonearby access point or base station. In the situation, some images havealready been uploaded to the server 42, and the other images have notyet been uploaded. Therefore, the image data in the server 42 isdifferent from the image data captured by the image capturing device 1.In the first embodiment of the present invention, the RF-IDreader/writer 46 of the TV 45 or the like reads the server specificinformation 48 and the like from the second memory 52 in the RF-ID unit47 of the image capturing device 1. Then, based on the readoutinformation, a URL or the like of the server 42 is generated. Accordingto the URL, the TV 45 accesses the server 42 to access the data 50 suchas a file, folder, or the like uploaded by the image capturing device 1.Then, the TV 45 downloads the uploaded images from among the imagescaptured by the image capturing device 1, and displays the downloadedimages. The above method will be described in more detail later.

If a part or all of the captured images is not uploaded as image data ofthe data 50 in the server 42, a problem would occur that a userdownloading the images to the TV 45 cannot watch a part of the images onthe TV 45.

In order to solve the problem, in the first embodiment of the presentinvention, the first processing unit 35 causes a recording/reproducingunit 32 to indicate information regarding a state of captured images,such as information of uploading state, to the captured image stateinformation 55 in the second memory 52.

The above is described in more detail with reference to FIG. 4. In thesecond memory 52, synchronization information 56 is recorded. Thesynchronization information 56 indicates whether or not image data inthe server 42 matches image data captured by the camera, in other words,whether or not the image data in the server 42 is in synchronizationwith the image data captured by the camera. In the first embodiment ofthe present invention, the TV 45 reads the captured image stateinformation 55 from the second memory 52 via the second antenna 21. Thecaptured image state information 55 makes it possible to instantlydetermine whether or not the data 50 in the server lacks any image. Ifthe determination is made that there is any image that has not yet beenuploaded, then the determination result is displayed on the display unitof the TV 45. Here, the TV 45 also displays a message of “Please uploadimages” to a viewer. Or, the TV 45 issues an instruction to the cameravia the RF-ID antenna 21 to transmit an activation signal to theactivation unit 170, thereby supplying power to the first power supplyunit 101 of the image capturing device 1. Thereby, the TV 45 causes theimage capturing device 1 to upload, to the server 42, the images in thefirst memory 174 or the like of the image capturing device 1, which havenot yet been uploaded, via a wireless LAN, a wired LAN, the secondantenna (RF-ID antenna) 21, or the like.

Since transmission via the RF-ID antenna 21 has a small transfer amount,transmission of the image data as originally captured takes aconsiderable time to upload and display the image data. This causes auser to feel unpleasant. In order to avoid this, according to the firstembodiment of the present invention, when the image data is transmittedvia the RF-ID antenna 21, thumbnails of the images not yet been uploadedare transmitted instead. The thumbnails can shorten apparent upload timeand display time, suppressing unpleasant feeling of the user. Most ofcurrent RF-ID having a high communication ability has a transfer amountof several hundreds kbps. However, development of RF-ID having aquad-speed has been examined. The quad-speed RF-ID has a possibility ofachieving a transfer amount of several Mbps. If thumbnails of images notyet been uploaded are transmitted, it is possible to transmit severaldozens of thumbnails in one second. If thumbnails are displayed in alist, thumbnails of all images including images not yet been uploadedcan be displayed on the TV within a time period a general user cantolerate. The above is one of practical solutions.

If the image capturing device is forced to be activated to upload imagesnot yet been uploaded as described above, the most speedy and stablepath is selected from a wireless LAN, the RF-ID antenna 21, and a wiredLAN, to be used for uploading and displaying on the TV. In the situationwhere the image capturing device 1 receives power from the outside viathe second antenna 21, the communication unit 171 transmitting signalsto the second antenna 21 performs communication with the outside by alow-speed modulation method. On the other hand, in the situation wherethe image capturing device 1 can receive power from the first powersupply unit 101 or the like, the communication unit 171 switches themodulation method to a modulation method having a large signal point,such as Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK), 16-Quadrature AmplitudeModulation (QAM), or 64-QAM, as needed, in order to achieve high-speedtransfer to upload the image data not yet been uploaded in a short time.Furthermore, when the power detection unit 172 detects, for example,that the first power supply unit 101 or the like does not have enoughpower or that the image capturing device 1 is not connected to anexternal power, the first power supply unit 101 stops supplying powerand a modulation switch unit 175 switches the modulation method employedby the communication unit 171 to a modulation method having a smallersignal point or less transfer rate. As a result, it is possible toprevent that the capacity of the first power supply unit 101 is reducedto be equal to or less than a set value.

There is another solution for power. When power is not enough, thesecond processing unit 95, the communication unit 171, or the like sendsa power increase request signal to the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV45 via the second antenna 21, to request for power support. In responseto the request, the RF-ID reader/writer 46 increases providing power tohave a value greater than the set value for the power used in readingdata from the RF-ID unit. Since the RF-ID unit receives more power viathe second antenna 21, the RF-ID unit can provide power to thecommunication unit 171 or the first processing unit 35. Thereby, a poweramount of a battery 100 for the first power supply unit 101 is notreduced. Or, without the battery 100, the image capturing device 1 canpractically and unlimitedly continue transmission.

As still another method, uploaded-image-data information 60 in FIG. 4can be used. In uploaded-image-data information 60, uploaded-imageinformation 61 such as serial numbers of photographs, is recorded. It isalso possible to use hashed information 62 generated by hashing theinformation 61. As a result, a data amount is reduced.

The TV 45 can read the above information to be compared to informationof images captured by the camera, thereby obtaining information ofimages not yet been uploaded.

As still another method, not-yet-uploaded image data existenceidentification information 63 can be used. The not-yet-uploaded imagedata existence identification information 63 includes an existenceidentifier 64 indicating whether or not there is any image not yet beenuploaded. Since existence of images not yet been uploaded is notified,data in the second memory 52 can be significantly reduced.

It is also possible to use not-yet-uploaded-image number 65 indicatingthe number of images not yet been uploaded. Since the image capturingdevice 1 allows the TV 45 to read the information, a viewer can beinformed of the number of images to be uploaded. In this case, a datacapacity in addition to the number is recorded as the captured imagestate information 55. Thereby, the image capturing device 1 enables theTV 45 to display a more exact prediction time required to upload imagesnot yet been uploaded.

It is also possible to use not-yet-uploaded image information hashedinformation 67 that is generated by hashing information regarding imagesnot yet been uploaded.

In addition, it is also possible to record a final capturing time (finalcapturing date/time) 68 in the second memory 52. Later, the TV 45 readsthe final capturing time 68. The TV 45 is connected to the server 42 tocompare the final capturing time 68 to a capturing date of an image thathas been finally uploaded to the server 42. Thereby, it is possible toeasily determine whether or not there is any image not yet beenuploaded. If images are captured and assigned with serial numberssequentially from an older image, it is possible to record only a finalimage serial number 69. The final image serial number 69 is compared toa serial number of an image that has been finally uploaded to the server42. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not there is anyimage not yet been uploaded. It is also possible to record, onto thesecond memory 52, captured image information 70 that is, for example,serial numbers of all captured images. Thereby, the TV 45 later accessesthe server 42 to match the serial numbers to images uploaded to theserver 42. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not thereis any image not yet uploaded. When the captured image information 70 isused, use of hashed information 71 generated by hashing the capturedimage information 70 can compress the captured image information 70.

The second memory 52 further stores Unique IDentification (UID) 75 ofthe RF-ID unit, camera ID 76, and the medium identification information111. Even if the main power of the camera (except a sub-power for backupetc. of a clock) is OFF, these pieces of information can be read by theTV 45 via the second antenna 21 to be used for identifying the camera orthe user or authenticating a device (apparatus). When the user comesback from an overseas trip or the like, the camera is likely to have asmall charge amount of the battery. However, according to the firstembodiment of the present invention, the camera can be operated totransmit information without battery, which is highly convenient for theuser. The medium identification information 111 includes an identifieror the like indicating whether the medium or device embedded with theRF-ID unit is a camera, a camcorder, a post card, a card, or a mobilephone. The identifier enables the TV 45 to identify the medium ordevice. Thereby, the TV 45 can display a mark or icon of the camera orpostcard on a screen as illustrated in FIG. 22, as will be described.The TV 45 can also change processing depending on the identifier.

The second memory 52 also stores image display method instructioninformation 77. For example, in the situation where a list display 78 inFIG. 5 is selected, when the second antenna 21 is moved into proximityof the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV 45, the image capturing device 1(camera) causes the TV 45 to display a list of thumbnails of images,such as photographs.

In the situation where slide show 79 is selected, the image capturingdevice 1 causes the TV 45 to sequentially display images from a newerone or an older one.

In a lower part of the second memory 52 in FIG. 4, there is a region forrecording the server specific information 48.

The server specific information 48 allows a camera operator to displayimages on the TV screen by a preferred method.

The server specific information 48 includes server URL generationinformation 80 that is source information from which a server URL isgenerated. An example of the server URL generation information 80 islogin ID 83. The server specific information 48 has a region in whichserver address information 81 and user identification information 82 arerecorded. In practical, login ID 83 and the like are recorded. Inaddition, there is a region for storing a password 84. An encryptedpassword 85 may be stored in the region. The above pieces of informationare used to generate an URL by a URL generation unit 90 that is providedin the image capturing device 1, the RF-ID unit 47, the camera functionused for capturing images in the image capturing device 1, or the TV 45.The URL is used for accessing a group of images corresponding to theimage capturing device 1 or the user in the server 42. If the URLgeneration unit 90 is provided in the RF-ID unit 47, the URL generationunit 90 receives power from the second power supply unit 91

It is also possible to generate URL 92 without using the above pieces ofinformation and store the generated URL 92 directly to the second memory52.

It is characterized in that the above-described pieces of informationstored in the second memory 52 can be read by both the second processingunit 95 in the RF-ID unit and the first processing unit 35 in the camerafunction.

The above structure allows the TV 45 reading the RF-ID unit 47 in thecamera to instantly obtain the pieces of information regarding uploadingstate, the sever address information, the login ID, the password, andthe like. Thereby, the TV 45 can download image data corresponding tothe camera from the server 42, and display the image data at a highspeed.

In the above situation, even if the main power of the image capturingdevice 1 is OFF, the RF-ID reader/writer supplies power to the secondpower supply unit 91 to activate (operate) the image capturing device 1.Therefore, power of the battery 100 in the image capturing device 1 isnot reduced.

Referring back to FIG. 3, the first power supply unit 101 receives powerfrom the battery 100 to provide power to the units in the camera. In aquiescent state, however, a third power supply unit 102 provides weakpower to the clock 103 and the like. In some cases, the third powersupply unit 102 supplies backup power to a part of the second memory 52.

The RF-ID unit 47 receives power from the second antenna to providepower to the second power supply unit 91, thereby operating the secondprocessing unit 95, or operating a data receiving unit 105, a recordingunit 106, a reproducing unit 107, a data transfer unit 108 (thecommunication unit 171), and the second memory 52.

Therefore, in a quiescent state of the camera, no power is consumed. Asa result, it is possible to keep the battery 100 of the camera longer.

The processing performed by the image capturing device 1 (referred toalso as a “medium” such as a camera or card) and the processingperformed by the TV and the RF-ID reader/writer are explained withreference to a flowchart of FIG. 7.

If the main power is OFF at Step 150 a in FIG. 7, it is determined atStep 150 b whether or not activation setting of the RF-ID reader/writerfor the main power OFF is made. If the activation setting is made, thenthe RF-ID reader/writer 46 is turned ON at Step 150 c and changed to bein a power saving mode at Step 150 e.

At Step 150 f, impedance or the like of an antenna unit is measured, ora nearby sensor is measured. When the RF-ID unit is moved into proximityof an antenna of the RF-ID reader/writer 46 at Step 150 j, it isdetected at Step 150 g whether or not the RF-ID unit is in proximity ofor contacts the antenna. If it is detected that the RF-ID unit is inproximity of or contacts the antenna, then the RF-ID reader/writer 46starts supplying power to the antenna of the medium at Step 150 h. AtStep 150 k, in the medium, the second power supply unit is turned ON andthereby the second processing unit starts operating. As Step 150 m,communication between the medium (camera or card) and the RF-IDreader/writer 46 starts.

When at Step 150 i, the TV determines whether or not the RF-IDreader/writer 46 receives communication from the medium. If the RF-IDreader/writer 46 receives communication, then mutual authenticationstarts at Steps 151 a and 151 f in FIG. 8. If it is determined at Steps151 b and 151 g that the mutual authentication is successful,information is read out from the second memory at Step 151 d. At Step151 e, the readout information is transmitted to the RF-ID reader/writer46. At Step 151 i, the RF-ID reader/writer 46 receives the information.At Step 151 j, the TV 45 side makes a determination as to whether or notthe identification information or the like of the second memory iscorrect. If the identification information or the like is correct, thenit is determined at Step 151 p whether or not the TV 45 hasidentification information indicating automatic power ON. If the TV 45has identification information, then it is determined at Step 151 rwhether or not a main power of the TV is OFF. If the main power of theTV is OFF, the main power of the TV is turned ON at Step 152 a of FIG.9. At Step 152 b, the TV 45 side makes a determination as to whether ornot the second memory 52 has forced display instruction. If the secondmemory 52 has the forced display instruction, then the TV 45 sidechanges an input signal of the TV to a screen display signal fordisplaying the RF-ID at Step 152 d. At Step 152 e, the RF-IDreader/writer 46 reads format identification information. At Step 152 f,the RF-ID reader/writer 46 reads information from the second memory bychanging a format of the information to a format according to the formatidentification information. At Step 152 g, the TV 45 side makes adetermination as to whether or not the second memory has a “passwordrequest flag”. If the second memory has the “password request flag”,then the RF-ID reader/writer 46 reads an “ID of TV not requestingpassword entry” from the second memory at Step 152 h. At Step 152 i, theTV 45 side makes a determination as to whether or not ID of the TV 45matches the “ID of TV not requesting password entry”. If the ID of theTV 45 does not match the “ID of TV not requesting password entry”, thenthe medium reads out a password from the second memory at Step 152 q. AtStep 152 v, the medium decrypts the password that has been encrypted. AtStep 152 s, the medium transmits the decrypted password to the TV 45side. Here, at Steps 152 q, 152 r, and 152 s, it is also possible tostore the password in a storage device in the server 42 as the data 50in the server 42.

At Step 152 j, the RF-ID reader/writer 46 receives the password. At Step152 k, the TV 45 displays a password entry screen. At Step 152 m, the TV45 determines whether or not the input password is correct. Thedetermination may be made by the server 42. If the determination is madethat the input password is correct, then the TV 45 performs displaybased on the information and program read from the second memory in theRF-ID unit at Step 152 p.

At Step 153 a of FIG. 10, the TV 45 side determines whether or not themedium identification information 111 in the RF-ID unit in the secondmemory indicates that the medium is a camera. If the mediumidentification information 111 indicates a camera, then the TV 45displays an icon (characters) of a camera (camera icon) on the displayunit at Step 153 b. On the other hand, if the medium identificationinformation 111 does not indicate a camera, then it is determined atStep 153 c whether or not the medium identification information 111indicates a post card. If the medium identification information 111indicates a post card, then the TV 45 displays an icon of a post card(post-card icon) at Step 153 d. On the other hand, if the mediumidentification information 111 does not indicate a post card, the TV 45further determines at Step 153 e whether or not the mediumidentification information 111 indicates an IC card. If the mediumidentification information 111 indicates an IC card, then the TV 45displays an icon of an IC card at Step 153 f. On the other hand, if themedium identification information 111 does not indicate an IC card, theTV 45 still further determines at Step 153 g whether or not the mediumidentification information 111 indicates a mobile phone. If the mediumidentification information 111 indicates a mobile phone, then the TV 45displays an icon of a mobile phone on a corner of the TV screen at Step153 h.

At Steps 154 a and 154 i of FIG. 11, the RF-ID reader/writer 46 readsservice detail identification information from the server or the secondmemory. At Step 154 c, the TV 45 side determines whether or not theservice detail identification information indicates image displayservice. At Step 154 b, the TV 45 side determines whether or not theservice detail identification information indicates a post card servicesuch as direct mail. At Step 154 d, the TV 45 side determines whether ornot the service detail identification information indicates advertisingservice. At Steps 154 f and 154 j, the RF-ID reader/writer 46 obtainsthe server specific information 48 from the second memory of the medium.At Step 154 g, the TV 45 side determines whether or not the secondmemory stores the URL 92. If the second memory does not store the URL92, then the processing proceeds to Steps 154 h and 154 k at which theTV 45 obtains the server address information 81 and the useridentification information 82 from the second memory. At Steps 155 a and155 p, the TV obtains an encrypted password from the second memory. AtSteps 155 b, the TV decrypts the encrypted password. At Step 155 c, theTV generates URL from the above pieces of information. At Step 155 d,even if the second memory stores the URL 92, the TV accesses the serverhaving the URL via the communication unit and the Internet. At Step 155k, the TV starts being connected to the server 42. At Step 155 q, themedium reads out operation program existence identifier 119 from thesecond memory. At Step 155 e, the TV determines whether or not the TVhas any operation program existence identifier. If the TV has anyoperation program existence identifier, it is further determined at Step155 f whether or not there are plurality of operation programs. If thereare a plurality of operation programs, then the TV reads operationprogram selection information 118 from the second memory at Step 155 r.At Step 155 g, the TV determines whether or not the operation programselection information 118 is set. If the operation program selectioninformation 118 is set, the TV selects directory information of aspecific operation program at Step 155 h. At Step 155 s, the mediumreads out directory information 117 of the specific operation programfrom the server and provides the directory information 117 to the TV. AtStep 155 i, the TV accesses the specific operation program in thedirectory on the server. At Step 155 m, the server provides the specificoperation program to the TV or executes the specific operation programon the server at Step 155 n. At Step 155 j, the TV (or the server)starts execution of the specific operation program. At Step 156 a ofFIG. 13, the TV determines whether or not the specific operation programis service using images. If the specific operation program is serviceusing images, then the TV starts checking images not yet been uploadedat Step 156 b.

At Step 156 i, the TV reads the not-yet-uploaded image data existenceidentification information 64 from the medium. At Step 156 c, the TVdetermines whether or not the not-yet-uploaded image data existenceidentification information 64 indicates that there is any image not yetbeen uploaded. If there is any image not yet been uploaded, the TV readsthe not-yet-uploaded-image number 66 and the data capacity 65 from themedium at Step 156 d. At Step 156 e, the TV displays (a) thenot-yet-uploaded-image number 66 and (b) a prediction time required toupload images which is calculated from the data capacity 65 regardingimage not yet been uploaded. At Step 156 f, the TV determines whether ornot the medium (camera) is in a state where the medium can automaticallyupload images. If the medium can automatically upload images, then atStep 156 g, the TV activates the medium (camera) to upload images notyet been uploaded to the server via the first antenna 20 or the secondantenna 21 by wireless communication or wired communication havingcontacts. When Step 156 g is completed, the processing proceeds to Step157 a of FIG. 14. At Step 157 a, the TV determines whether or not thereis a billing program. If there is no billing program, then at Step 157n, the TV reads identifier 121 regarding the image display methodinstruction information which is shown in FIG. 6. At Step 157 b, the TVdetermines whether or not the server has the image display methodinstruction information. If the server has image display methodinstruction information, then at Step 157 p, the TV reads, from themedium, directory information 120 regarding a directory in which imagedisplay method instruction information is stored on the server. At Step157 c, the TV reads, from the medium, the directory information 120 inwhich the image display method instruction information corresponding toUID or the like is stored. At step 157 d, the TV obtains the imagedisplay method instruction information from the server. Then, theprocessing proceeds to Step 157 f.

On the other hand, if the determination is made at Step 157 b that theserver does not have the image display method instruction information,then the processing proceeds to Step 157 e. At Step 157 e, the TVobtains the image display method instruction information from the medium(such as a camera). Then, the processing proceeds to Step 157 f.

At Step 157 f, the TV starts display of images based on the imagedisplay method instruction information. At Step 157 g, the TV reads anall-image display identifier 123 from the medium. At Step 157 g, the TVdetermines whether or not the all-image display identifier 123 indicatesthat all images are to be displayed. If all images are to be displayed,the TV displays all images at Step 157 r. On the other hand, if allimages are not to be displayed, then at Step 157 h, the TV displays apart of images in a specific directory identified by the directoryinformation 124 that is read at Step 157 s from the medium. At Step 157i, the TV determines whether or not a list display identifier 125indicates that images to be displayed in a list. If the images are to bedisplayed in a list, then the TV reads a display order identifier 122 atStep 157 t. At Step 157 j, the TV displays the images in a list in adate order or an upload order based on the display order identifier. AtStep 157 v, the TV reads a slide show identifier 126 from the medium. AtStep 157 k, the TV determines whether or not the slide show identifier126 indicates that images are to be displayed as slide show. If theimages are to be displayed as a slide show, then at Step 157 m, the TVdisplays the images as slide show based on the display order identifier122. Then, the TV reads image quality prioritization 127 from the secondmemory of the medium. At Step 158 a of FIG. 15, the TV determineswhether or not the image quality prioritization 127 indicates that theimages are to be displayed by prioritizing image quality. If the imagesare not to be displayed by prioritizing image quality, the TV readsspeed prioritization 128 from the medium at Step 158 q and furtherdetermines at Step 158 b whether or not the speed prioritization 128indicates that the images are to be displayed by prioritizing a speed.If a speed is to be prioritized, then the TV determines at Step 158 cwhether or not the server stores display audio. At Step 158 s, the TVreads and checks display audio server directory 130 from the medium. AtStep 158 d, the TV accesses the directory in the server to obtain thedisplay audio and outputs the audio.

At Step 158 e, the TV determines whether or not all images are to bedisplayed as priorities. If all images are not to be displayed aspriorities, then at Step 158 f, the TV selects a part of the images. AtSteps 158 g, the TV reads specific directory information 124 from themedium at Step 158 v, and receives images in the specific directory fromthe server at Step 158 w. At Step 158 h, the TV displays the images inthe specific directory. On the other hand, if it is determined at Step158 e that all images are to be displayed as priorities, then the TV maydisplay all images at Step 158 i. At Step 158 j, the TV determineswhether or not the image display is completed. If the image display iscompleted, then the TV displays a message “view other image(s)?” at Step158 k. If the user agrees, then the TV displays a menu of images indifferent directories at Step 158 m.

At Step 159 a of FIG. 16, the TV determines whether or not imagescaptured by a specific user are requested. If images captured by aspecific user are requested, then at Step 159 b, the TV requests themedium to provide (a) specific user all image information 132 at Step159 m and (b) a specific user password 133 that is a password of thespecific user. At Step 159 c, the TV determines whether or not thepassword is correct. If the password is correct, then at Step 159 p, theTV reads directory information 134 of a directory of a file storing animage list from the medium. At Step 159 d, the TV accesses the server toaccess a directory having an image list of the specific user. At Step159 r, the TV downloads image data in the directory from the server. AtStep 159 e, the TV displays the images captured by the specific user.

At Step 159 f, the TV starts color correction routine. At Step 159 g,the TV reads camera model information from the camera ID 76. At Steps159 h and 159 t, the TV downloads characteristic information of thecamera model from the server. Then, at Steps 159 i and 159 u, the TVdownloads characteristic information of the TV from the server. At Step159 w, the server calculates the characteristic information to generatemodified information. At Step 159 j, the TV modifies color andbrightness of the display unit based on the pieces of characteristicinformation of the medium (camera) and the TV. At Step 159 k, the TVdisplays the images with the modified color and brightness.

At Step 160 a of FIG. 17, the TV determines whether or not forced printinstruction is selected. Here, if forced print instruction is selected,it is determined at Step 160 b whether or not the terminal (the TV inthe above example) to which the medium (camera) is moved closer is aprinter or a terminal connected to the printer. If the terminal is aprinter or a terminal connected to the printer, then the terminalobtains, at Step 160 c, camera model information of the medium (camera)and a model name of the printer for each image data. At Step 160 d, theterminal modifies each piece of information of the server to generatemodified information. At Step 160 p, the terminal receives directoryinformation 137 of a directory in which the image data to be printed isstored. At 160 e, the terminal accesses the server by using an addressof the directory having the image data to be printed (or file name). AtStep 160 m, the server sends the image data stored in the directory tothe terminal. At Step 160 f, the TV receives the image data to beprinted. At Step 160 g, the terminal prints the image data. At Step 160h, the printing is completed. At Step 160 i, for each image data, theterminal records, onto the server, an identifier indicating that oneprinting process is completed. At Step 160 n, the server assigns a printcompletion identifier to the image data that is stored in the server andhas been printed.

Next, the following describes the situation where the medium such as acamera or a post card does not have a memory for storing data.

Steps of FIG. 18 follow the numbers 3, 4, and 5 in circles in FIG. 8. AtStep 161 a of FIG. 18, a main power of the TV is turned ON. At Step 161k, the TV reads UID of the RF-ID unit from the second memory. At Step161 b, the TV obtains the UID. At Step 161 m, the TV reads the serverspecific information 48 from the second memory. At Step 161 c, the TVaccesses a server directory. At Step 161 d, the TV searches the serverdirectories for a final server providing service corresponding to theUID. At Step 161 e, the TV determines whether or not such a final serverexists. If there is such a final server, then at Step 161 g, the TVaccesses the final server and reads a user ID, a password, and a servicename from a UID list at Step 161 g. At Step 161 h, the TV determineswhether or not a password is requested. If the password is requested,then the TV determines at Step 161 i whether or not the readout passwordis correct. At Step 162 a of FIG. 19, the TV determines whether or notthe service is regarding photographs or video. If the service isregarding photographs or video, then at Step 162 b, the TV reads (i)reads, from a specific directory in the server associated with the UID,(a) a corresponding program such as a billing program, (b) a listincluding an address or a file name of image data to be displayed, (c)image display instruction information, (d) forced display instruction,(e) forced print instruction, and (f) camera ID, and (ii) automaticallydisplays the image data or causes the image data to be printed, based onthe above pieces of information and procedure.

If needed, password entry is requested at Step 162 b. At Step 162 c, theTV determines whether or not the user desires to print a specific image.If the user desires to print a specific image, then at Step 162 d, theTV adds data of the specific image to the server associated with the UIDor to a print directory of the TV. At Step 162 e, the TV determineswhether or not the TV is connected to a printer and there is anindependent printer. If so, then, at Step 162 f, the RF-ID unit of themedium such as a post card is moved into proximity of a RF-IDreader/writer of the printer. At Step 163 a of FIG. 20A, the printer (i)reads UID of the RF-ID from the medium, (ii) thereby reads image data tobe printed or a location of the image data from the print directory onthe server having the modified information, and (iii) prints the imagedata. At Step 163 b, the printing is completed. Thereby, the aboveprocessing is completed.

Step 163 i of FIG. 20B is the number 23 in FIG. 19. At Step 163 d, theTV determines whether or not the service is for shopping. If the serviceis for shopping, then the TV determines at Step 163 e whether or notauthentication is successful. If the authentication is successful, thenat Step 163 f, the TV reads, from the server, a shopping/billing programassociated with the UID, and executes the program. At Step 163 g, theexecution of the program is completed. Thereby, the above processing iscompleted.

Next, the following describes a method of reading information from aRF-ID unit embedded in a postcard without a RF-ID reader.

At Step 164 a of FIG. 21A, a second RF-ID unit, on which URLs of relayservers are recorded, is attached to or embedded in the medium such as apost card. On the outer surface of the second RF-ID unit, (a) UID of thesecond RF-ID unit and (b) information for identifying a first URL of acertain relay server are printed to be displayed by a two-dimensionalbar-code.

At Step 164 b, there is a camera capable of being connected to a mainserver. The camera has a first RF-ID unit on which a first URL of themain server is recorded. An image capturing unit in the camera opticallyreads the two-dimensional bar-code, and converts the readout informationto information for identifying (a) the UID of a second RF-ID unit in thepost card and (b) a second URL of a relay server.

At Step 164 c, the converted information is recorded onto a memory inthe camera.

At Step 164 d, the camera selects a specific set of images from imagescaptured by the camera, and stores the set of images into a specificfirst directory in the main server. At the same time, the camera uploadsinformation of first directory (first directory information) as well asthe first URL of the main server, a specific second directory in therelay server having the second URL. The camera uploads information forassociating the UID of the second RF-ID unit with the second directory,to the relay server having the second URL. At Step 164 e, the mediumsuch as a post card is mailed to a specific person.

At Step 164 f of FIG. 21B, the person receiving the post card moves theRF-ID unit of the post card into proximity of a RF-ID reader of a TV orthe like. Thereby, the TV reads, from the RF-ID unit, the second URL ofthe relay server and the UID of the post card.

At Step 164 g, the TV accesses the relay server having the second URL.Then, the TV reads, from the relay server, (a) a program in the seconddirectory associated with the UID and/or (b) the first URL and the firstdirectory information of the main server on which specific image data isrecorded. The TV downloads the image data from the main server. The TVdisplays the image data on a screen. In the above case, the imagecapturing unit in the image capturing device according to the firstembodiment of the present invention reads information from thetwo-dimensional bar-code that is generally printed in a product or postcard to record server information. Then, the image capturing devicerecords the information read from the two-dimensional bar-code, asdigital information, onto the second memory of the RF-ID unit. Thereby,the image capturing device allows a RF-ID reader of a TV to read theinformation. As a result, even a TV without an optical sensor fortwo-dimensional bar-codes can indirectly read information oftwo-dimensional bar-codes and automatically access a server or the like.

FIG. 22A illustrates the situation where display is presented when theimage capturing device 1 is moved into proximity of a RF-ID antenna 138of the TV 45.

When the image capturing device 1 is moved into proximity of the antenna138, the TV 45 displays a camera icon 140 for notifying of that themedium is a camera in the manner described previously.

Next, since the number (for example, five) of images not yet beenuploaded is detected, the TV 45 displays five blank images 142 a, 142 b,142 c, 142 d, and 142 e as if these images were taken out from thecamera icon 140.

Thereby, the TV 45 displays “tangible” information of images by changing“materials to information”. As a result, the user can perceive theinformation of images by more natural sense.

Regarding images that have been already uploaded to the server, actualimages 143 a, 143 b, and 143 c are displayed as tangible data in thesame manner as described above.

FIG. 22B illustrates the situation where RF-ID is embedded in a postcard 139. Since the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV 45 reads attributeinformation of the post card from the RF-ID. Thereby, the TV 45 displaysa post-card icon 141 at a bottom left corner of the display unit of theTV 45 as illustrated in FIG. 22B. The TV 45 also displays images storedin the server or a menu screen as tangible data in the same manner asdescribed with reference to FIG. 22A.

Next, the following processing is described in detail. By theprocessing, an operation program 116 illustrated in FIG. 4 istransmitted to the TV 45 illustrated in FIG. 3 that is an apparatus(device) communicating with the RF-ID unit 47 of the image capturingdevice 1. The communicating device (TV 45) executes the transmittedprogram.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram of a configuration in which the apparatuscommunicating with the RF-ID unit 47 in the image capturing device 1executes the transmitted program. FIG. 23 illustrates a communicationsystem including a part of the image capturing device 1 (the RF-ID 47and the second antenna 21), the TV 45, and a remote controller 827 ofthe TV 45. Here, the image capturing device 1 is implemented as a camerawhich has the RF-ID unit 47 to perform proximity wireless communicationwith the RF-ID reader/writer 46. The RF-ID reader/writer 46 is connectedto the TV 45 by an infrared communication path. The camera includes thesecond antenna 21, the data receiving unit 105, the second memory 52,and the data transfer unit 108. The second antenna 21 is used for theproximity wireless communication. The data receiving unit 105 receives,via the second antenna 21, an input signal provided from the RF-IDreader/writer 46. The second memory 52 is a nonvolatile memory holdingat least (a) the UID unit 75 that is identification information foridentifying the image capturing device 1, and (b) the operation program116 that is to be executed by the TV 45 with reference to the UID unit75. The data transfer unit 108 transmits the UID unit 75 and theoperation program 116 stored in the second memory 52 to the RF-IDreader/writer 46 via the second antenna 21, according to the inputsignal received by the data receiving unit 105. The UID unit 75 and theoperation program 116 transmitted from the data transfer unit 108 aretransmitted to the TV 45 via the data transfer unit 108, the secondantenna 21, the RF-ID reader/writer 46, and then the infraredcommunication path. The following explains the above units in moredetail.

The RF-ID unit 47 in the image capturing device 1 has the second memory52. The second memory 52 holds the operation program 116. The operationprogram 116 can be executed by the TV 45 communicating with the RF-IDunit. In more detail, the operation program 116 is an example of theprogram executed by the TV 45 with reference to the identificationinformation of the image capturing device 1. The operation program 116is, for example, an execution program such as Java™ program, avirtual-machine script program such as Javascript™ program, or the like.

The reproducing unit in the RF-ID unit 47 reads necessary informationand the operation program 116 from the second memory 52. The necessaryinformation is required to execute the operation program 116. Thenecessary information includes the UID unique to the image capturingdevice 1, the server specific information including the URL of theserver, and the like. The necessary information and the operationprogram 116 are transmitted to the RF-ID reader/writer 46 in the remotecontroller 827 via the data transfer unit 108 and the second antenna 21.The remote controller 827 remotely controls the TV 45.

The RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the remote controller 827 receives thenecessary information and the operation program from the RF-ID unit 47of the image capturing device 1 and stores them into a RF-ID storageunit 6001.

A remote-controller signal generation unit 6002 in the remote controller827 converts the necessary information and the operation program, whichare transmitted from the RF-ID unit 47 of the image capturing device 1and stored in the RF-ID storage unit 6001, to remote-controller signals.The remote-controller signals, such as infrared signals, are widely usedin communication for present remote controllers.

To the TV 45, a remote-controller signal transmission unit 6003transmits the remote-controller signals including the operation programwhich are generated by the remote-controller signal generation unit6002.

A remote-controller signal receiving unit 6004 in the TV 45 receives theremote-controller signals from the remote controller 827. A programexecution unit 6005, such as a Java™ virtual machine, retrieves thenecessary information and the operation program in the RF-ID unit 47 ofthe image capturing device 1, from the remote-controller signals byusing a decryption unit 5504. Thereby, the program execution unit 6005executes the operation program.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart of execution of the operation program for“downloading data of images from an image server with reference toidentification information (UID in this example) of the image capturingdevice 1, and displaying the images as a slide show”.

When the remote controller is moved into proximity of the imagecapturing device 1, the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the remote controllerprovides power to the RF-ID unit 47 in the image capturing device 1 viaRF-ID communication. Thereby, the UID 75 unique to the image capturingdevice 1, the URL 48 of the image server (image server URL), and theoperation program 116 are read from the second memory 52 (S6001). Thereadout UID, image server URL, and operation program are transmitted tothe remote controller 827 via the data transfer unit 108 and the secondantenna 21 (S6002). Here, as presented in FIG. 25, the operation programincludes server connection instruction 6006, download instruction 6008,slide show display instruction 6010, download-completion-time processingset instruction 6007, and download-completion-time instruction 6009.

The remote controller 827 receives the UID, the image server URL, andthe operation program from the image capturing device 1 via the RF-IDreader/writer 46 (S6003). A determination is made as to whether or notreceiving is completed (S6004). If receiving is completed, then the UID,the image server URL, and the operation program are stored in the RF-IDstorage unit 6001 (S6005). Then, the UID, the image server URL, and theoperation program are converted to remote-controller signalstransmittable by infrared ray (S6006). A determination is made as towhether or not the user performs a predetermined input operation by theremote controller 827 to instruct to transmit the remote-controllersignals to the TV 45 (S6007). If the instruction is received by fromuser, then the remote-controller signal transmission unit 6003 transmitsthe remote-controller signals including the image server URL and theoperation program to the TV 45 (S6008). In other words, serving as acommon remote controller, the remote controller 827 serves also as arelay device that transfers the UID, the image server URL, and theoperation program from the image capturing device 1 to the TV 45 byusing the embedded RF-ID reader/writer 46.

Next, the TV 45 receives the remote-controller signals from the remotecontroller 827 (S6009). The decryption unit 5504 in the TV 45 retrieves(decrypts) the UID, the image server URL, and the operation program fromthe remote-controller signals (S6010). Then, the program execution unit6005 executes the operation program with reference to the image serverURL (S6011 to S6015). More specifically, by the operation program,connection between the TV 45 and the image server 42 on a communicationnetwork is established with reference to the image server URL (S6012,and 6006 in FIG. 25). Then, with reference to the UID unique to acorresponding image capturing unit, image data captured by a specificimage capturing unit is selected from the image data 50 stored in thestorage device of the image server 42, and the selected image data isdownloaded to the TV 45 (S6013, and 6008 in FIG. 25). In other words,the UID is used to select image data associated with the image capturingdevice 1 indicated by the UID, from among pieces of image data stored inthe image server 42. A determination is made as to whether or not theimage download is completed (S6014). If the image download is completed,the downloaded images are sequentially displayed as a slide show (S6015,and 6007, 6009, and 6010 in FIG. 25). The download-completion-timeprocessing set instruction 6007 in FIG. 25 is instruction for settingprocessing to be performed when image downloading is completed. In theexample of FIG. 25, the download-completion-time processing setinstruction 6007 instructs the download-completion-time instruction 6009as the processing to be performed when image downloading is completed.Moreover, the download-completion-time instruction 6009 calls the slideshow display instruction 6010 for performing a slide show of the images.

It should be noted that, referring to FIGS. 23 and 24, it has beendescribed that the operation program and the necessary information forthe operation program are transferred from the image capturing device 1to the TV 45 via the remote controller 827. However, the RF-IDreader/writer 46 of the remote controller 827 may be provided to the TV45. In other words, the RF-ID reader/writer 46 may be embedded in the TV45. Furthermore, the communication path connecting the reader (RF-IDreader/writer 46) to the apparatus may be a wireless communication pathsuch as infrared communication path, or a wired signal cable.

It should also be noted that, in the above-described execution example,the UID is used to select image data associated with the image capturingdevice 1 from among pieces of image data stored in the image server 42.However, it is also possible to use the UID to identify the image serverstoring the image data. Here, it is assumed that, in a communicationsystem including a plurality of image servers, UID is associated with animage server storing image data captured by an image capturing deviceidentified by the UID. Under the assumption, if the operation program iscreated so that a URL of the image server can be identified withreference to the UID, the TV 45 executing the operation program canidentify, by using the UID, the image server associated with the UIDfrom the plurality of image servers and thereby download the image datafrom the identified image server.

It should also be noted that the identification information foridentifying the image capturing device 1 is not limited to UID. Theidentification information may be any other information regarding theimage capturing device 1, such as a serial number, a product serialnumber, a Media Access Control (MAC) address, or information equivalentto the MAC address, for example, an Internet Protocol (IP) address.Moreover, if the image capturing device 1 serves as an access point on awireless LAN, the identification information may be a Service SetIdentifier (SSID) or any information equivalent to SSID. It should alsobe noted that, in the above-described second memory 52, theidentification information (UID unit 75) for identifying the imagecapturing device 1 has been described to be stored separately from theoperation program 116. However, the identification information may bestored (described) in the operation program 116.

It should also be noted that the remote-controller signals (in otherwords, the communication path connecting the reader to the apparatus)are described to employ infrared ray. However, the remote-controllersignals are limited to the above, but may employ a wirelesscommunication method such as Bluetooth. The use of wirelesscommunication that is generally speedier than infrared communication canshorten a time required to transfer an operation program and/or thelike.

It should be noted that the operation program is not limited to theprogram in the format presented in FIG. 25. The operation program may bedescribed in any other programming language. For example, the operationprogram described in Java™ can be easily executed by various apparatuses(devices), because the program execution circumstances called JavaVM™have broad versatility. The operation program may be described in acompact programming language in a script format represented byJavascript™ so as to be stored in a small storage capacity. Theoperation program in such a compact programming language can be storedin the RF-ID unit 47 in the second memory 52 even if the RF-ID unit 47has a small storage capacity. Moreover, the operation program may be inan executable format applied with processing such as compiling, ratherthan a source code presented in FIG. 25. The program can reduce aprocessing load on apparatuses having program execution environments.

The following describes, in detail, the processing of changing executionof a program depending on information unique to a display device (suchas the TV 45) having a RF-ID reader, with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27.

The TV 45 illustrated in FIG. 26 further includes a language codeholding unit 6013. When the operation program received asremote-controller signals is executed to connect the TV 45 to the server42, the program execution unit 6005 reads a language code from thelanguage code holding unit 6013 to connect the TV 45 to the server 42compliant to the language code. Then, the operation program is executedto download a server program from the server 42, and executes thedownloaded server program. For example, if the language code indicatesJapanese language, the TV 45 is connected to the server 42 having aprogram storage unit 6011 in which a server program compliant toJapanese language is stored, and then the server program is obtainedfrom the program storage unit 6011 to be executed in the TV 45. Morespecifically, the operation program stored in the RF-ID unit 47 of theimage capturing device 1 as illustrated in FIG. 23 executes onlyconnection to the server 42, while other processing such as imagedisplay is executed by the server program downloaded from the server 42.

The steps in the above processing are described with reference to FIG.27. The processing by which the TV 45 receives the operation program andthe necessary information for the operation program from the RF-ID unit47 of the image capturing device 1 is the same as the processingdescribed previously with reference to FIG. 24. In FIG. 27, it isassumed that the server specific information which the TV 45 receives asremote-controller signals includes two different server addresses whichare (a) a sever address of a server 42 compliant to English and (a) aserver address of a different server 42 compliant to Japanese. It isalso assumed that the operation program which the TV receives asremote-controller signals includes instruction for connecting the TV 45to a server indicated by the server connection instruction 6006 in FIG.25.

In the execution environments, the TV 45 obtains a language code of theTV 45 (S6016). The TV 45 determines whether or not the language codeindicates Japanese language (S6017). If the language code indicatesJapanese language, then the TV 45 selects, from the server specificinformation, a sever address of a server having a program storage unit6011 storing an operation program for processing compliant to Japanese(S6018). On the other hand, if the language code does not indicateJapanese language, then the TV 45 selects, from the server specificinformation, a server address of a server having a program storage unit6011 storing an operation program for processing compliant to English(S6019). Next, the TV 45 is connected to the server 42 with reference tothe selected server address (S6021). The TV 45 downloads a serverprogram from the server 42 (S6022, S6023). The TV 45 executes thedownloaded server program in the program execution environments (forexample, a virtual machine) of the TV 45 (S6024).

It should be noted that the use of the language code has been describedin FIGS. 26 and 27, but the language code may be replaced by otherinformation. Examples are a product serial number, a serial number ofthe display device (TV 45), and the like each of which indicates acountry where the display device is on the market or equipped.

FIG. 28 illustrates a configuration of a home network 6500 in which theimage capturing device 1 and the TV 45 are connected to each other via awireless LAN or Power Line Communication (PLC). When the image capturingdevice 1 has a direct communication unit 6501 and the TV 45 has a directcommunication unit 6502 so that the image capturing device 1 and the TV45 can communicate directly with each other via the wireless LAN, theimage capturing device 1 can transmit images to the TV 45 without usingthe server on the Internet. In other words, the image capturing device 1serves also as a server. In this case, however, some communicationmediums such as the wireless LAN used in the home network 6500 is easilyintercepted by others. Therefore, safe data communication requiresmutual authentication and exchange of encrypted data. For example, forexisting wireless-LAN terminals (devices), access points serve asauthentication terminals. If such an existing terminal is toauthenticate its communication party, the terminal displays allconnectable access points on its screen. The user selects one of thedisplayed access points from the screen. Then, the user presses a WiredEquivalent Privacy (WEP) key to perform encrypted communication.However, the above processing bothers general users. In addition, if awireless LAN is embedded in home appliances such as a TV, there are somany terminals with which the existing terminal can communicate withauthentication. If the user lives in an apartment house, the user cancommunicate even with terminals in neighbors. As a result, it isdifficult for the user to select a terminal to be authenticated. Forinstance, if a neighbor has a TV 6503 that is the same model of theuser's TV 45, the user has difficulty in distinguishing the TV 45 in theuser's house from the TV 6503 based on the information displayed on thescreen of the existing device.

The first embodiment of the present invention can solve the aboveproblem. In the first embodiment of the present invention, RF-ID is usedto perform authentication. In more detail, an authentication programincluding a MAC address 58 is recorded, as an operation program, in thesecond memory 52 in the RF-ID unit 47 of the image capturing device 1.When the image capturing device 1 is moved into proximity of the RF-IDreader/writer 46 of the TV 45, the image capturing device 1 provides theauthentication program to the TV 45. The authentication program includesnot only the MAC address but also a cryptography key for authentication(hereinafter, “authentication cryptography key”) and an authenticationcommand. When the TV 45 recognizes that the information provided fromthe RF-ID unit 47 includes the authentication command, the TV 45performs authentication processing. The communication unit 171 in theRF-ID unit 47 cannot communicate with the TV 45, until the imagecapturing device 1 is physically located in proximity of the RF-IDreader/writer 46. Therefore, it is extremely difficult to intercept thecommunication between the image capturing device 1 and the TV 45 whichis performed in a house. In addition, since the image capturing device 1is moved into proximity of the TV 45 to exchange data, it is possible toprevent that the image capturing device 1 authenticates a wrong device(apparatus), such as the TV 6503 in a neighbor or a DVD recorder 6504 inthe user's house.

The following is an example of an authentication method without usingRF-ID with reference to FIG. 29. A user inputs, to the TV 45, (a) MACaddresses of terminals to be authenticated, such as the camera (theimage capturing device 1) and the DVD recorder 6504, which the userintends to authenticate for communication, and (b) authenticationcryptography keys 6511 for the terminals. The TV 45 receiving the inputstransmits an appropriate message called a challenge 6513, to a targetterminal having the MAC address. When the image capturing device 1receives the challenge 6513, the image capturing device 1 encrypts thechallenge 6513 using the authentication cryptography key 6511, andreturns the encrypted challenge 6513 to the TV 45 that is a terminalfrom which the challenge 6513 has been provided. In receiving theencrypted challenge 6513, the TV 45 decrypts the encrypted challenge6513 using the authentication cryptography key 6511. Thereby, the TV 45can authenticate the authentication cryptography key 6511 to preventuser's error and intervention of other malicious users. Next, the TV 45encrypts a cryptography key 6512 a for data (hereinafter, a “datacryptography key 6512 a”) using the authentication cryptography key6511. Then, the TV 45 transmits the encrypted data cryptography key 6512a to the image capturing device 1. Thereby, it is possible to performthe encrypted data communication between the TV 45 and the imagecapturing device 1. The TV 45 performs the above-described processingalso with the DVD recorder 6504 and other apparatuses (terminals) 6505and 6506 in order to share the data cryptography key 6512 a among them.Thereby, the TV 45 can perform encrypted communication with allterminals (devices, apparatuses, or the like) connected in the homenetwork.

On the other hand, FIG. 30 illustrates an authentication method usingRF-ID. In the authentication method using RF-ID, the image capturingdevice 1 (camera) generates an authentication program 6521 a. The cameraprovides the generated authentication program 6521 a from the RF-ID unit47 in the camera to a RF-ID unit 46 in the TV 45. The authenticationprogram 6521 a includes an authentication command, a MAC address of thecamera, and an authentication cryptography key 6511 for the camera. Whenthe TV 45 receives the authentication program 6521 a with theauthentication command, the TV 45 retrieves the MAC address and theauthentication cryptography key 6511 from the RF-ID unit 46. The TV 45encrypts a data cryptography key 6512 a using the retrievedauthentication cryptography key 6511 and transmits the encrypted datacryptography key 6512 a to the retrieved MAC address. The transmissionis performed by a wireless-LAN device (terminal). In the authenticationmethod using RF-ID, the authentication is performed automaticallywithout any user's input. Therefore, there is no problem caused byuser's input errors. In addition, since the image capturing device 1(camera) needs to moved into proximity of the TV 45, it is possible toprevent intervention of other malicious users. This authenticationmethod using RF-ID can eliminate pre-processing such as theabove-described challenge. Moreover, the action of physically moving theimage capturing device 1 (camera) into proximity of the TV 45 enablesthe user to easily recognize which terminals the camera hasauthenticated. Furthermore, if the authentication cryptography key 6511is not included in the authentication program, the authentication may beperformed by a technique of general public key authentication. Inaddition, the communication device (medium) is not limited to a wirelessLAN, but may be any medium, such as PLC or Ethernet™ included in thehome network. Moreover, the MAC address may be any identificationinformation for uniquely identifying a communication terminal in thehome network.

FIG. 31 illustrates an authentication method using RF-ID when it isdifficult to move a terminal into proximity of another terminal. Forexample, when the terminals are a refrigerator and a TV which aredifficult to move, it is almost impossible to directly exchange anauthentication program between the terminals using RF-ID. In such asituation, the first embodiment of the present invention can beimplemented by relaying the authentication program between the terminalsusing a device (such as a remote controller 6531) that is an accessoryof the terminal. In more detail, a RF-ID reader/writer embedded in theremote controller 6531 reads the authentication program from a RF-IDunit in the refrigerator. Thereby, the authentication program is storedin a memory in the remote controller 6531. A user moves the remotecontroller 6531 that is mobile. When the remote controller 6531 is movedinto proximity of the TV 45, the remote controller 6531 transfers theauthentication program from the memory of the remote controller 6531, tothe RF-ID unit of the TV 45. It should be noted that the transfer fromthe remote controller 6531 to the TV 45 is not limited to use RF-IDtechnology. Other communication means, such as infrared ray or ZigBee,that is previously set in the remote controller 6531 can be used. Anymedium for which security in communication has already been establishedmay be used.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart of authentication performed by the camera (imagecapturing device 1) side. In an authentication mode, the cameragenerates an authentication cryptography key and sets a timer (S6541).The camera writes a MAC address of the camera, the generatedauthentication cryptography key, and an authentication command, into amemory in the RF-ID unit (S6542). When the user moves the camera tobring the RF-ID unit of the camera into proximity of the RF-ID unit ofthe TV, the camera transfers the information stored in the memory of theRF-ID unit of the camera to the RF-ID unit of the TV (S6543). The cameradetermines whether or not a response of the transfer is received fromthe TV within a predetermined time period counted by the timer (S6544).If the response is received within the predetermined time period, thenthe camera decrypts, by using the authentication cryptography key,encrypted data cryptography key included in the response (S6545). Thecamera starts communicating with the other device (apparatus) using thedata cryptography key (S6546). The camera determines whether or not datacommunication with the TV is successful (S6547). If the datacommunication is successful, then the authentication is completed. Onthe other hand, if data cannot be correctly decrypted (in other words,data communication is not successful), then a notification ofauthentication error is displayed and the authentication is terminated(S6548). Referring back to Step S6544, if there is no response withinthe predetermined time period, then the camera cancels theauthentication mode (S6549) and then displays a notification of time outerror (S6550).

FIG. 33 is a flowchart of authentication performed by the TV 45 side.The TV 45 determines whether or not received information, which isprovided from the RF-ID unit of the camera to the RF-ID unit of the TV45, includes an authentication command (S6560). If the receivedinformation does not include the authentication command, then the TV 45performs other processing according to the received information (S6561).On the other hand, if the received information includes theauthentication command, the TV 45 determines that the informationreceived from the RF-ID unit of the camera is an authentication program,and therefore encrypts a data cryptography key in the TV 45 using anauthentication cryptography key in the authentication program (S6562).Then, the TV 45 transmits the encrypted data cryptography key to theterminal (the camera) having the MAC address designated in theauthentication program (S6563).

Next, the following situation is described in detail with reference tofigures. Here, the image capturing device 1 described with reference toFIG. 3 generates or updates a program executable by the TV 45. Then, theimage capturing device 1 transmits the program to the TV 45 via the datatransmission unit 173. Thereby, the TV 45 executes the program.

FIG. 34 is a block diagram of the first processing unit 35 and thesecond memory 52 of the image capturing device 1 according to the firstembodiment of the present invention. The first processing unit 35includes a second memory reading unit 7003, a URL generation unit 7004,a program generation unit 7005, a program part storage unit 7006, and aprogram writing unit 7007.

The second memory reading unit 7003 reads information from the secondmemory 52 via the recording/reproducing unit 51.

The URL generation unit 7004 reads the UID 75, the server specificinformation 48, the captured image state information 55, and the imagedisplay method instruction information 77 from the second memory 52 viathe second memory reading unit 7003. From the above pieces ofinformation, the URL generation unit 7004 generates a URL that is anaddress of the server 42 to which images have been uploaded from theimage capturing device 1.

The UID 75 is identification information for identifying the imagecapturing device 1. The UID 75 is unique to each image capturing device1. The URL generated by the URL generation unit 7004 includes UID. Forinstance, the image server 42, to which images are uploaded, has animage file in a directory unique to each UID. Thereby, a URL address canbe generated for each image capturing device 1.

The server specific information 48 is a server name for identifying theserver to which the images are uploaded. Via a Domain Name Server (DNS),an IP address of the server 42 is determined to connect the imagecapturing device 1 to the server 42. Therefore, the server specificinformation 48 is included in the generated URL.

The image display method instruction information 77 is information forenabling the user to optionally select the list display 78, the slideshow display 79, or the like. The URL generation unit 7004 generates theURL based on the image display method instruction information 77. Inother words, since the generated URL includes information indicating thelist display 78 or the slide show display 79, the image server (theserver 42) can determine based on the URL whether the images are to bedisplayed as the list display or the slide show display.

As described above, based on the UID 75, the server specific information48, the captured image state information 55, the image display methodinstruction information 77, and the like which are stored in the secondmemory 52, the URL generation unit 7004 generates a URL of the imageserver in which images to be watched are stored. Then, the URLgeneration unit 7004 provides the generated URL to the programgeneration unit 7005.

The program generation unit 7005 generates a program executable by theTV 45, based on (a) the URI generated by the URL generation unit 7004,and (b) forced display instruction 7000, forced print instruction 136,and format identification information 7001 stored in the second memory52. It should be noted that the program generation unit 7005 cangenerate a new operation program based on the above-describedinformation, which is a method of generating a new operation program.The program generation unit 7005 can also generate such a new operationprogram by updating an operation program that has been alreadygenerated.

The program generated by the program generation unit 7005 is executableby the TV 45. The program should be compiled into a machine languageused in a system controller (not shown) of the TV 45, so that the systemcontroller can execute the program. In this case, the program generationunit 7005 has a compiler to convert the generated program to a programin an executable format.

However, the above-described compiler is not necessary if the program ina text format (script) (for example, a general Java™ script) is executedby a browser in the TV 45.

The URL provided to the program generation unit 7005 is used to connectthe TV 45 to the image server (server 42) in which images are stored. Byusing the URL, the program generation unit 7005 generates or updates aconnection program (hereinafter, referred to also as a “serverconnection program” or “connection program”) for connecting the TV 45 tothe image server.

The forced display instruction 7000 is optional and used in thefollowing situation. For example, there is the situation where, whilethe user watches on the TV 45 a TV program provided by general broadcastwaves, the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV 45 becomes communicable withthe image capturing device 1 via the second antenna 21. In thesituation, the forced display instruction 7000 is used to automaticallyset the TV 45 into a browser watching mode so that image data providedfrom the image server is displayed on the TV 45. If this option isselected, the program generation unit 7005 generates a program forforcing the TV 45 to display image data.

The forced print instruction 136 is optional and used in the followingsituation. For example, there is the situation where, while the userwatches on the TV 45 a TV program provided by general broadcast waves,the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV 45 becomes communicable with theimage capturing device 1 via the second antenna 21. In the situation,the forced print instruction 136 is used to automatically print imagedata stored in the image server by a printer (not shown) connected tothe TV 45. If this option is selected, the program generation unit 7005generates a program for forcing the TV 45 to print image data by theprinter.

The format identification information 7001 is information of a format bywhich image data is to be displayed. When an option of language codeoptimization selection in the format identification information 7001 isselected, the program generation unit 7005 generates a program forselecting a URL to be connected, based on the language code set in theTV 45. The following is an example in the situation where the option oflanguage code optimization selection in the format identificationinformation 7001 is selected. If the language code of the TV 45indicates Japanese language, the program generation unit 7005 selects aJapanese site as the URL to be connected. On the other hand, if thelanguage code of the TV 45 does not indicate Japanese language, theprogram generation unit 7005 selects an English site as the URL to beconnected. Or, the URL generation unit 7004 may generate two URLs forthe Japanese site and the English site, and provide the two URLs to theprogram generation unit 7005.

The program part storage unit 7006 holds program command informationused by the program generation unit 7005 to generate a program. Aprogram part stored in the program part storage unit 7006 may be ageneral library or an Application Programming Interface (API). In orderto generate a connection command for connecting the TV 45 to the server,the program generation unit 7005 combines a server connection command“Connect” in the program part storage unit 7006 with the URL generatedby the URL generation unit 7004. Thereby, the program generation unit7005 generates or updates a connection program for connecting the TV 45to the server indicated by the URL.

The program writing unit 7007 is an interface used to write the programgenerated by the program generation unit 7005 to the second memory 52.

The program provided from the program writing unit 7007 is stored into aprogram storage unit 7002 in the second memory 52 via therecording/reproducing unit 51.

When the image capturing device 1 is moved to bring the RF-ID unit ofthe image capturing device 1 into proximity of the RF-ID reader/writer46 connected to the TV 45, the reproducing unit reads out the programfrom the program storage unit 7002 in the second memory 52. Then,transmission signals indicating the program are transmitted to the RF-IDreader/writer 46 via the data transfer unit 108 and the second antenna21. The TV 45 receives the transmission signals via the RF-IDreader/writer 46. The TV 45 executes the receives program.

The TV 45 has the product serial number 7008, the language code 7009,and a program execution virtual machine 7010.

The product serial number 7008 is a product serial number of the TV 45.From the product serial number 7008, it is possible to learn amanufacture date/time, a manufacture location, a manufacturing line, anda manufacturer of the TV 45.

The language code 7009 is predetermined in the TV 45 to be used indisplaying a menu, for example. The language code 7009 is not limited tobe predetermined, but can be switched to another by the user.

The program execution virtual machine 7010 is a virtual machine thatexecutes a received program. The program execution virtual machine 7010may be implemented as hardware or software. For example, the programexecution virtual machine 7010 may be a Java™ virtual machine. The Java™virtual machine is a stack or interpreter virtual machine that executesdefined instruction sets. If the image capturing device 1 has thevirtual machine, the program generated by the program generation unit7005 in the image capturing device 1 is compliant to any executionplatforms. As a result, the program generation unit 7005 can generate aprogram executable in any platforms.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart of processing performed by the program generationunit 7005 of the image capturing device 1.

First, the program generation unit 7005 initializes information used togenerate a program (S7000).

Next, based on the server specific information 48 stored in the secondmemory 52, the program generation unit 7005 generates a connectioncommand for connecting the TV 45 to the server 42, by using the URLgenerated by the URL generation unit 7004 (S7001). In order to generatethe connection command, the program generation unit 7005 selects aninstruction set (for example, “Connect” in FIG. 25) for a serverconnection command from the program part storage unit 7006, and combinesthe selected instruction set with the URL. Thereby, a server connectionprogram (for example, “Connect (URL)”) is generated.

Then, the program generation unit 7005 examines the forced displayinstruction 7000 in the second memory 52 so as to determine whether ornot the forced display instruction 7000 is selected (S7002). If theforced display instruction 7000 is selected, then the program generationunit 7005 calls an instruction set for a forced display program from theprogram part storage unit 7006, and thereby generates a forced displaycommand (S7003). The generated forced display command is added to theprogram (S7004).

On the other hand, if the forced display instruction 7000 is notselected, then the program generation unit 7005 does not generate theforced display command, but proceeds to S7005.

Next, the program generation unit 7005 makes a determination as towhether the forced print instruction in the second memory 52 is selected(S7005). If the forced print instruction is selected, then the programgeneration unit 7005 generates a forced print command for forcing the TV45 to print, by a printer, an image file stored in the server 42(S7006). The generated print command is added to the program (S7007).

Then, the program generation unit 7005 examines the image display methodinstruction information 77 in the second memory 52 so as to determinewhether or not the list display 78 is selected (S7008). If the listdisplay 78 is selected, then the program generation unit 7005 generatesa list display command for causing the TV 45 to display a list of theimage file stored in the server 42 (S7009). The generated list displaycommand is added to the program (S7010).

After that, the program generation unit 7005 examines the image displaymethod instruction information 77 in the second memory 52 so as todetermine whether or not the slide show 79 is selected (S7011). If theslide show 79 is selected, then the program generation unit 7005generates a slide show command for causing the TV 45 to display a slideshow of the image file stored in the server 42 (S7012). The generatedslide show command is added to the program (S7013).

As described above, based on the information set in the second memory52, the program generation unit 7005 in the image capturing device 1generates a program used to display images on the TV 45, by using aninstruction command set that is stored in the program part storage unit7006 to generate the program.

It should be noted that, in the first embodiment, there are commands forthe forced display instruction, the forced print instruction, the listdisplay, and the slide show display. However, the commands (programs)are not limited to the above. For example, if a command for the forceddisplay instruction is to be generated as a program, the programgeneration unit 7005 can also generate a determination command fordetermining whether or not the apparatus (device) executing the programhas a display device or display function, and adds the generateddetermination command to the program. Thereby, the command for theforced display instruction is executed only if the apparatus executingthe program has a display device or display function. As a result, thedetermination command can prevent confusion in the apparatus executingthe program. The same goes for a command for the forced printinstruction. It is preferable that the program generation unit 7005 alsogenerates a determination command for determining whether or not theapparatus executing the program has or is connected to a printingfunction, and adds the generated determination command to the program.Thereby, the command for the forced print instruction is executed onlyif the apparatus executing the program has or is connected to a printingfunction.

The following describes execution of the program generated or updated bythe program generation unit 7005 in the image capturing device 1.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart of execution of the program generated or updatedby the program generation unit 7005. The program is transmitted from theimage capturing device 1 to a device (apparatus) different from theimage capturing device 1 via the second antenna 21 of the imagecapturing device 1. Then, the program is executed by the differentdevice. In the first embodiment, the different device is the TV 45. TheTV 45 receives the program via the RF-ID reader/writer 46 and executesthe received program by a controller or virtual machine (not shown) inthe TV 45.

First, the program is executed to read the language code set in the TV45, as unique information of the TV 45 (S7020). The language code ispredetermined by the user to be used in displaying a menu and the likeon the TV 45.

Next, the program is executed to determine a language indicated in thelanguage code. First, a determination is made as to whether or not thelanguage code indicates Japanese language (S7021). If the determinationis made that the language code indicates Japanese language, then aconnection command for a Japanese site is selected from the connectioncommands in the program (S7022). On the other hand, if the determinationis made that the language code does not indicate Japanese language, thena connection command for an English site is selected from the connectioncommands in the program (S7023). It should be noted that it has beendescribed in the first embodiment that a determination is made as towhether or not the language code indicates Japanese language, andthereby a connection command is selected from the connection command forconnecting to a Japanese site and the connection command for connectingto an English command. However, it is also possible that the programincludes a plurality of connection programs compliant to variouslanguage codes. Thereby, the program can be compliant to two or morelanguage codes. As a result, usability is improved. Next, according tothe selected connection command, the program is executed to connect theTV 45 to the URL indicted in the connection command (S7024).

Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the connection to theURL indicted in the connection command is successful (S7025). If theconnection is failed, then the display unit of the TV 45 displayswarning indicating the connection failure (S7027). On the other hand, ifthe connection is successful, then a command for displaying a slide showof an image file stored in the server is executed to display the slideshow (S7026).

It should be noted that the above is the situation where the operationprogram is for displaying images as a slide show. However, the operationprogram is not limited to the above. The program may be used forperforming list display, forced display, or forced printing. If theoperation program is for forced display, a step (command) ofautomatically changing setting of the TV 45 to setting of displaying animage file stored in the server is added to the program. Thereby, theuser does not need to change the setting of the TV 45 by manual in orderto display images provided from the image server. In the case of theforced printing, a command for automatically changing setting of the TV45 to a printable mode is added to the program. Moreover, in the case ofeach of the forced printing and forced display, a determination commandfor determining whether or not the TV 45 has a printing function or adisplaying function is added to the program. Thereby, the forced printcommand is not executed in an apparatus (device) without a printingfunction. Furthermore, the operation program in the first embodiment ofthe present invention may be a connection program for leading otherprograms. For example, the operation program may be a loader program,such as a boot-loader for loading other programs to be executed.

As described above, the first embodiment of the present invention ischaracterized in that the program generation unit 7005 is included inthe first processing unit 35 of the image capturing device 1 that is adevice having RF-ID communication means (such as the data transfer unit108 and the second antenna 21). It is also characterized in that theprogram generated or updated by the program generation unit 7005 isexecuted by a different device (apparatus) except the image capturingdevice 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention thatis a communication device having RF-ID.

Conventionally, a device having RF-ID needs to transfer ID information(tag information), which the device has, from a RF-ID communication unitto another device (for example, the TV 45 according to the firstembodiment of the present invention). The device (apparatus) receivingthe ID information should previously hold operation programs each uniqueto a corresponding device having RF-ID. Therefore, if new productshaving RF-ID technology appear, the receiving device needs to install anoperation program corresponding to the new products and execute theprogram. Otherwise, the receiving device is excluded as not beingcompliant to the new products. The installation of operation programsrequires technical knowledge. Not everyone can perform the installation.Therefore, if various new devices having RF-ID are produced, otherdevices such as the TV 45 of the first embodiment of the presentinvention become obsolete. As a result, property values of user'sdevices are damaged.

According to the disclosure of the first embodiment of the presentinvention, the device having RF-ID technology has the program generationunit 7005 and sends not ID information (tag information) but a programto another device (apparatus) such as the TV 45. The apparatus such asthe TV 45 receives and executes the program. Therefore, the receivingapparatus does not need to previously have operation programs forvarious devices having RF-ID. Even if a new device having RF-IDtechnology appears, the receiving apparatus does not need to install anew program for the device. Therefore, usability is significantlyimproved.

Therefore, the terminal such as a TV does not need to previously haveapplication programs for respective items, kinds, or application systemsof various objects having RF-ID. Thereby, the terminal such as a TV doesnot need to previously have a storage device, either, for holdingvarious application programs. In addition, maintenance such asversion-up of the programs in the terminal is not necessary.

The program generated by the program generation unit 7005 is useful ifit is executable in any execution platforms such as a Java™ language.Therefore, if the device (apparatus) such as the TV 45 executingprograms has a Java™ virtual machine, programs generated by any devices(apparatuses) can be executed.

It should be noted that the program generation unit 7005 according tothe first embodiment of the present invention may has a function ofupdating the program previously stored in the program storage unit 7003of the second memory 52. The situation of updating a program producesthe same advantages as that in the situation of generating a program.The generating or updating performed by the program generation unit 7005may be generating or updating data used in executing a program by the TV45. In general, the program includes additional initialization settingdata. The additional data is used to switch an execution mode or to seta flag. Therefore, generating or updating of the additional data isequivalent to generating or updating of the program, without deviatingfrom the inventive concepts of the present invention. This is because,for execution of a program, it depends on design whether a parameter formode switching or the like is to be hold and read as data, or is to beincluded in the program to be executed. Therefore, when the programgeneration unit 7005 according to the first embodiment of the presentinvention generates or updates a program, the program generation unit7005 can also generate data such a parameter sequence used by theprogram. The parameter is generated based on the forced displayinstruction 7000, the forced print instruction 136, the image displaymethod instruction information 77, the format identification information7001, or the like stored in the second memory 52.

The following describes characteristic structures and processing of thesecond memory 52 and the first processing unit 35 in the image capturingdevice 1 that is a communication device having RF-ID according to thefirst embodiment of the present invention. In the first embodiment ofthe present invention, the image capturing device 1 that is acommunication device having RF-ID has a use status detection unit in thefirst processing unit 35. The use status detection unit detects atrouble related to operation, a power consumption status, or the like.The image capturing device 1 generates a program for displaying theresult of the detection (use status) on the TV 45 that is a device(apparatus) different from the image capturing device 1.

FIG. 37 is a block diagram of characteristic structures of the secondmemory 52 and the first processing unit 35 in the image capturing device1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

The second memory 52 includes the UID 75, the server specificinformation 48, the camera ID 135, and the program storage unit 7002.

The UID 75 is a serial number unique to the image capturing device 1,and used to identify the single image capturing device 1.

The server specific information 48 is information for identifying theserver 42 to which image data captured by the image capturing device 1is transmitted by the communication unit 37. The server specificinformation 48 includes a sever address, a storing directory, a loginaccount, a login passwords, and the like.

The camera ID 135 includes a product serial number, a manufacturingyear/month/date, a manufacturer, a manufacturing line, a manufacturedlocation, and the like of the image capturing device 1. The camera ID135 also includes camera model information for identifying a model ofthe image capturing device 1.

The first processing unit 35 includes the second memory reading unit7003, a use status detection unit 7020, the program generation unit7005, the program part storage unit 7006, and the program writing unit7007.

The second memory reading unit 7003 reads information from the secondmemory 52 via the recording/reproducing unit 51. In the first embodimentof the present invention, the second memory reading unit 7003 reads theUID 75, the server specific information 48, and the camera ID 135 fromthe second memory 52, and provides the pieces of information to theprogram generation unit 7005. Reading of the pieces of information fromthe second memory 52 is performed when a readout signal is provided froma use status detection unit 7020 that is described later.

The use status detection unit 7020 detects a use status of each unitincluded in the image capturing device 1. The use status detection unit7020 includes sensors each detecting a trouble in operation of acorresponding unit included in the image capturing device 1. Results ofthe detection of the sensors in respective units are provided to the usestatus detection unit 7020. The sensors for the respective units providethe use status detection unit 7020 with trouble information, batteryduration, a power consumption amount, and the like. For example, theimage capturing unit 30 provides the use status detection unit 7020 withinformation indicating whether or not an image capturing operation ofthe image capturing unit 30 has any trouble (whether or not the imagecapturing unit 30 functions correctly, and whether or not the imagecapturing unit 30 responds to a call from the use status detection unit7020). The video processing unit 31 provides the use status detectionunit 7020 with information indicating whether or not data processing forimage data captured by the image capturing unit 30 has any trouble(whether or not the video processing unit 31 functions correctly, andwhether or not the video processing unit 31 responds to a call from theuse status detection unit 7020). The first power supply unit 101provides the use status detection unit 7020 with a voltage level of thebattery and a total power consumption amount. The communication unit 37provides the use status detection unit 7020 with information indicatingwhether or not the communication unit 37 is successfully connected tothe server or the Internet (whether or not the communication unit 37functions correctly, and whether or not the communication unit 37responds to a call from the use status detection unit 7020). The displayunit 6 a provides the use status detection unit 7020 with informationindicating whether or not display processing has any trouble, whether ornot the display unit 6 a correctly responds to a call from the usestatus detection unit 7020, and the display unit 6 a functionscorrectly. Based on the above pieces of status information providedregarding the respective units, the internal trouble detection unit 7021in the use status detection unit 7020 determines whether or not each ofthe units has any trouble in its functional operation. If there is atrouble, then the use status detection unit 7020 provides the programgeneration unit 7005 with information for specifying the trouble. Theuse status detection unit 7020 has a power consumption detection unit7022. The power consumption detection unit 7022 generates powerconsumption information based on the total power consumption informationprovided form the power supply unit, and then provides the powerconsumption information to the program generation unit 7005.

The program generation unit 7005 generates a program for displaying, onthe TV 45, the information for specifying a trouble or the powerconsumption information which is provided from the use state detectionunit 7020. For generation of a program, instruction sets to be includedin the program are previously stored in the program part storage unit7006. Therefore, the program generation unit 7005 generates (a) adisplay command (“display” in FIG. 37) for displaying a trouble or apower consumption amount, and (b) a program for displaying informationfor specifying a location of the trouble and information for specifyingthe trouble in detail. It should be noted that the power consumptionamount may be converted to a carbon dioxide emission amount, andtherefore a program may be generated to display the carbon dioxideemission amount.

The program generated by the program generation unit 7005 is stored inthe program storage unit 7002 in the second memory 52 via the programwriting unit 7007.

The program stored in the program storage unit 7002 in the second memory52 is transmitted to the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV 45 via thedata transfer unit 108 and then the second antenna 21.

The TV 45 executes the received program by the program execution virtualmachine 7010.

With the above-described structure, the program generation unit 7005 inthe first processing unit 35 generates a program for displaying, on theTV 45, trouble information or use status information detected by the usestatus detection unit 7020 regarding use of the image capturing device1. The program is transmitted to the TV 45 that displays the troubleinformation or the use status information of the image capturing device1. Thereby, the TV 45 can present the trouble information or the usestatus information to the user, without installing a plurality ofprograms compliant to various devices including the image capturingdevice 1.

In conventional systems, each of devices such as an image capturingdevice, a camcorder, an electric toothbrush, and a weight scale isprovided with a simple display function such as a liquid crystal device,so as to display the trouble information or the use status informationon the corresponding display function. Therefore, the display functionhas a low display capability for merely displaying the troubleinformation as a symbol sequence or an error code. When the troubleinformation is presented, the user needs to read instruction manual tocheck what kind of trouble it is. Some users have lost instructionmanual and therefore obtain more information from a website on theInternet.

In the system according to the first embodiment of the presentinvention, however, a program for displaying trouble information can beexecuted by the TV 45 not by the image capturing device 1. The TV 45,which displays the trouble information detected by each device such asthe image capturing device 1, has a display capability higher than thatof the conventional systems. Therefore, the system according to thefirst embodiment of the present invention can solve the aboveconventional problem.

The following describes, in detail with reference to figures, thesituation where a program generated by the image capturing device 1described with reference to FIG. 3 is executed by a plurality ofapparatuses (devices) including the TV 45.

FIG. 38 illustrates a system in which a program generated by the imagecapturing device 1 is executed by a plurality of apparatuses. The systemincludes the image capturing device 1, the TV 45, a remote controller(with display function) 6520, and a remote controller (without displayfunction) 6530.

The TV 45 includes the RF-ID reader/writer 46 and a wirelesscommunication device 6512. The wireless communication device 6512 is,for example, a general infrared communication device currently used asmany remote controllers of home appliances, or a short-range wirelesscommunication device used for home appliances using radio waves, such asBluetooth and ZigBee.

The remote controller (with display function) 6520 includes atransmission unit 6521, a display unit 6523, an input unit 6524, a RF-IDreader 6522, a memory 6526, and a program execution virtual machine6525. The transmission unit 6521 transmits signals to the wirelesscommunication device 6512 of the TV 45. The display unit 6523 displaysvideo. The input unit 6524 receives key inputs from a user. The RF-IDreader 6522 communicates with the RF-ID unit 47. The memory 6526 storesa program received by the RF-ID reader 6522. The program executionvirtual machine 6525 is a virtual machine that executes the programreceived by the RF-ID reader 6522. For instance, recent mobile phonesare example of the remote controller (with display function) 6520,having an infrared communication function, Bluetooth, a RF-ID reader, aliquid crystal display, a key input unit, a Java™ virtual machine, andthe like. The display unit 6523 and the input unit 6524 may be a liquidcrystal display and a plurality of character input buttons, or may beintegrated into a liquid-crystal touch panel, for example.

The remote controller (without display function) 6530 includes atransmission unit 6531, an input unit 6533, a RF-ID reader 6532, and amemory 6535. The transmission unit 6531 transmits signals to thewireless communication device 6512 of the TV 45. The input unit 6533such as buttons receives key inputs from a user. The RF-ID reader 6532communicates with the RF-ID unit 47. The memory 6535 temporarily storesdata received by the RF-ID reader 6532.

The remote controller (without display function) 6530 is, for example, ageneral remote controller having a RF-ID reader. Remote controllers arecommon accessory devices of TVs.

In the first embodiment of the present invention, there are thefollowing four possible situations from which the user selects apreferred one. In the first situation, the program generated by theimage capturing device 1 is transmitted directly to the TV 45 via theRF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV 45, and executed by the TV 45. In thesecond situation, the program generated by the image capturing device 1is transmitted indirectly to the TV 45 via the remote controller(without display function) 6530, and executed by the TV 45. In the thirdsituation, the program generated by the image capturing device 1 istransmitted indirectly to the TV 45 via the remote controller (withdisplay function) 6520, and executed by the TV 45. In the fourthsituation, the program generated by the image capturing device 1 istransmitted to the remote controller (with display function) 6520, andexecuted by the remote controller (with display function) 6520.

The first situation has been already described above in the firstembodiment. Therefore, the first situation is not described again below.

The following describes the above second to fourth situations.

In the second situation, a program generated by the image capturingdevice 1 is executed by the TV 45, via the remote controller (withoutdisplay function) 6530, such as general TV remote controllers, that doesnot have a graphical display device such as a liquid crystal panel.

When the user moves the image capturing device 1 to bring the RF-ID unit47 to the RF-ID reader 6532, the RF-ID reader 6532 reads the programgenerated by the image capturing device 1 to store the program in thememory 6535.

Then, when the user presses the input unit 6533, the program held in thememory 6535 is transmitted from the transmission unit 6531 to thewireless communication device 6512 of the TV 45. The program executionvirtual machine 7010 in the TV 45 executes the program. If the wirelesscommunication device 6512 is a directional infrared communicationdevice, the user presses the input unit 6533, facing the remotecontroller (without display function) 6530 to the TV 45. If the wirelesscommunication device 6512 is a non-directional short-range wirelesscommunication device, such as devices using Bluetooth or ZigBee, theprogram is transmitted to the TV 45 that is previously paired with theremote controller (without display function) 6530. In the case of theshort-range wireless communication device, it is also possible that theprogram is automatically transmitted to the paired TV 45 when the RF-IDreader 6532 reads the program from the RF-ID unit 47, without user'spressing of the input unit 6533.

The remote controller (without display function) 6530 may have a displayunit, such as a LED 6534, for notifying the user of that data read bythe RF-ID reader 6532 is stored in the memory 6535. The LED 6534 is litup to encourage the user to press the input unit 6533, when the programis read by the RF-ID reader 6532 and stored in the memory 6535. The LED6534 is lit out when the transmission of the program to the TV 45 iscompleted. Thereby, it is possible to clearly notify the user of thatthe remote controller (without display function) holds the program. TheLED 6534 may be an independent LED or integrated into the input unit6533.

In the second situation, even if the user is far from the TV 45, theprogram can be executed by the TV 45 by using the remote controller(without display function) 6530 in the user's hand.

In the third and fourth situations, if the remote controller (withdisplay function) 6520 has a program execution virtual machine ashigh-function mobile phones called smart phones do, the user can selectwhether the program generated by the image capturing device 1 isexecuted on the remote controller (with display function) 6520 or theprogram is transmitted to the TV 45 to be executed on the TV 45.

When the user moves the image capturing device 1 to bring the RF-ID unit47 to the RF-ID reader 6522, the RF-ID reader 6522 reads the programgenerated by the image capturing device 1 to store the program in thememory 6535.

The following describes the processing performed by the remotecontroller (with display function) 6520 in more detail with reference toa flowchart of FIG. 39.

First, a program read by the RF-ID reader 6522 is transmitted to theprogram execution virtual machine 6525 and executed by the programexecution virtual machine 6525 (S6601).

Next, a determination is made as to whether or not the remote controller6520 has a display function (S6602). If the remote controller 6520 doesnot have any display function (N at S6602), then the program istransmitted to the TV 45 via the transmission unit 6521 and then theprocessing is completed. In this situation, the program is executed bythe TV 45.

If the remote controller 6520 has a display function (Y at S6602), thena further determination is made as to whether or not the remotecontroller 6520 is paired with the TV 45 that is a transmissiondestination (S6603). If the remote controller 6520 is not paired withthe TV 45 (N at S6603), then a rest processing of the program isexecuted by the display unit 6523 of the remote controller 6520. On theother hand, if the remote controller 6520 is paired with the TV 45 (Y atS6603), then the display unit 6523 displays a dialog message “Display onTV or on Remote Controller?” to encourage the user to select one of theoptions (S6604).

Then, the remote controller 6520 receives user's entry by the input unit6524 (S6605). A determination is made as to whether or the user selectsto display data on the TV 45 (S6606). If the user selects the TV 45 todisplay data (Y at S6606), then the program is transmitted to the TV 45via the transmission unit 6521 and thereby the processing is completed.In this situation, the program is executed by the TV 45. On the otherhand, if the user selects the remote controller to display data (N atS6606), then a rest processing of the program is executed by the remotecontroller 6520 using the display unit 6523 (S6607).

It should be noted that the “rest processing of the program” refers todisplaying of a status of a battery, a trouble status, or an instructionmanual regarding the image capturing device 1, but, of course, notlimited to those described in the first embodiment.

With the above structure, a program generated by the image capturingdevice 1 is transmitted to the remote controller with display function,then a capability of the remote controller with display function isexamined, and a determination is made by the remote controller as towhich apparatus (device) is to execute rest processing of the program.Thereby, the remote controller does not need to previously installvarious programs compliant to a plurality of apparatuses. The user canexecute the program in his/her preferred manner.

It should be noted that it has been described in the first embodimentthat the determination is made based on whether or not the remotecontroller has a display function and based on a pairing status of theremote controller. However, it is not limited to the above. A programmay execute any determination based on a capability of the apparatus,such as a communication capability, an audio-video reproductioncapability, a capability of an input unit, a capability of an outputdevice, and the like.

It should also be noted that it has been described in the firstembodiment that the remote controller (without display function) 6530transmits information to the TV 45 every time one RF-ID (the imagecapturing device 1 in this example) is read out. However, the remotecontroller (without display function) 6530 may read two or more piecesof RF-ID and then transmit all of them to the TV 45 at once. This makesit possible, for example, that the remote controller obtains pieces ofinformation sequentially from a RF-ID-attached heat rate meter and alsosequentially from RF-ID-attached Pedometer™, and then transmits thepieces of information to the TV 45. Therefore, the TV 45 can display asingle graph of a history of steps versus a history of a heart rate. Ifthe heat rate meter and the Pedometer™ store programs individually, aprogram to be executed by the TV 45 may be set to be a program stored inan apparatus (device) from which information is read last time, or maybe selected by a user. Or, the user may select a device executed by theprogram. Of course, the remote controller (with display function) 6520may also read two or more pieces of RF-ID and then display all of themon the display unit of the remote controller 6520 at once.

As described above, the storage region of the RF-ID unit holds not onlyinformation but also a program describing operations of an apparatus(device). This considerably simplify changing or updating of a program,which has been necessary for conventional techniques to changeoperations of apparatuses. In addition, it is possible to deal withaddition of various new functions and an increase of cooperativeapparatuses. Moreover, proximity communication using RF-ID technology isa simple operation achieved by simply bringing a device into proximityof an apparatus, which the user can easily understand. Therefore,conventional bothersome device operations by using buttons and a menuare simplified. As a result, the complicated device operations arechanged to be convenient.

Second Embodiment

The following describes the second embodiment of the present invention.In the second embodiment, actual operations of the communication systemare described. In the communication system, images captured by a cameraare uploaded to a server, and then downloaded by a simple operation to aTV to be displayed. The whole configuration of the communication systemaccording to the second embodiment is the same as that of thecommunication system according to the first embodiment.

FIGS. 40A to 40E are flowcharts of processing performed by a camera (theimage capturing device 1) to upload photographs (images). First, thecamera captures images (Step S5101). Then, the captured images arestored into the third memory (Step S5102). Then, the camera updatesinformation stored in the second memory (Step S5103). The second memoryupdating process will be described later. Next, the camera determineswhether or not the communication unit is connectable to the Internet(Step S5104). If connectable, then the camera generates a URL (StepS5105). The URL generation process will be described in more detaillater. After generating the URL, the camera uploads the captured images(Step S5106). In completing the uploading process, the cameradisconnects the communication unit from the Internet (Step S5107). As aresult, the processing is completed. The uploading process will bedescribed in more detail later.

The second memory updating process of Step S5103 enables the server 42and the camera to share identification information for distinguishingphotographs that have already been uploaded to the server 42 fromphotographs that have not yet been uploaded to the server 42. Examplesof the uploading process at Step S5106 are given as following cases 1 to4.

In case 1, the final capturing time (final capturing date/time) 68 ispreviously stored in the second memory, and then updated after thecaptured images are stored into the third memory (Step S5111).

Comparison of a time of uploading the captured images to the finalcapturing time 68 of the camera allows the server 42 and the camera toshare identification information of the uploaded photographs.

In case 2, the above advantages can be produced also by generatingexistence identifiers 64 of images not yet been uploaded to the server42, with reference to images uploaded to the server 42 among thecaptured images, and storing the generated existence identifiers 64 intothe second memory (Step S5121).

In case 3, it is also possible that the not-yet-uploaded imageinformation hashed information 67 is stored in the second memory (StepS5131). Thereby, an amount of the information stored in the secondmemory is reduced, thereby saving a capacity of the second memory.

In case 4, it is further possible that image serial numbers arechronologically generated for captured images, and thereby the finalimage serial number 69 in the second memory is updated (Step S5141).Thereby, even if a time counted by the camera is not correct, it ispossible to synchronize information of uploaded photographs between theserver 42 and the camera.

FIG. 41 depicts details of the URL generation process at Step S5105. Thecamera reads, from the second memory, the server specific information 48including the server address information 81, the login ID 83, and thepassword 84 (Step S5201). Based on the server specific information 48,the camera generates a URL (Step S5202).

FIGS. 42A to 42D depict details of the uploading process at Step S5106.

The cases 1 to 4 in FIGS. 42A to 42D correspond to the above-describedcases 1 to 4 of the second memory updating process in FIGS. 40B to 40E,respectively.

In case 1, the camera receives, from the server 42, a final upload time(final upload date/time) that is a time of finally uploading to theserver 42 (Step S5211). Then, the camera compares the final upload timeto the final capturing time (Step S5212). If the final capturing time islater than the final upload time (in other words, if there is any imagecaptured after final uploading), then the camera uploads, to the server42, any images captured after the final upload time (Step S5213).

In case 2, the camera checks not-yet-uploaded image data existenceidentifiers 64 in the second memory (Step S5231). Thereby, the cameradetermines whether or not there is any image not yet been uploaded (StepS5232). If there is any image not yet been uploaded, then the camerauploads images not yet been uploaded, to the server 42 (Step S5233).Then, the camera updates the uploaded-image information 61 in the secondmemory (Step S5234).

In case 3, the camera checks the not-yet-uploaded image informationhashed information 67 in the second memory (Step S5301). Thereby, thecamera determines whether or not the not-yet-uploaded image informationhashed information 67 in the second memory is the same as hashedinformation that is generated by hashing NULL (Step S5302). If thenot-yet-uploaded image information hashed information 67 is not the sameas the hashed information regarding NULL, then the camera determinesthat there is an image not yet been uploaded to the server 42 andtherefore uploads, to the server 42, any images that are stored in thethird memory but have not yet been uploaded to the server 42 (StepS5303).

In case 4, the camera receives, from the server 42, an image serialnumber of a finally uploaded image (Step S5311). Then, the cameradetermines whether or not the image serial number matches the finalimage serial number 69 in the second memory (Step S5312). If the imageserial number does not match the final image serial number 69, then thecamera uploads any images having UIDs that are newer than UID of thefinal image serial number 69 that is received from the server 42 (StepS5313).

FIG. 43 is a flowchart of RF-ID proximity communication between theimage capturing device 1 and the TV 45.

First, the second antenna 21 embedded in the image capturing device 1receives weak radio power from polling of the RF-ID reader/writer 46 ofthe TV 45, and thereby activates the RF-ID unit 47 operated under thesecond power supply unit 91 (S5401).

The RF-ID unit 47 of the image capturing device 1, which is activated byreceiving weak power at Step S5401, responds to the polling of the RF-IDreader/writer 46 of the TV 45 (Step S5402).

After responding to the polling at Step S5402, mutual authentication isperformed to determine whether or not the RF-ID unit 47 of the imagecapturing device 1 and the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV 45 arelegitimate devices, and also to share a cryptography key used for secureinformation communication between the image capturing device 1 and theTV 45 (Step S5403). The mutual authentication employs a public keycryptography algorism such as elliptic curve cryptography. In general,the employed method for the mutual authentication is the same as that ofmutual authentication used in communication via High DefinitionMultimedia Interface (HDMI) or IEEE1394.

As described earlier, at Step S5403, the mutual authentication isperformed between the RF-ID unit 47 of the image capturing device 1 andthe RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV 45 to generate a commoncryptography key. After that, the server URL generation information 80is read from the server specific information 48 stored in the secondmemory 52 readable from the RF-ID unit 47. The server URL generationinformation 80 is transmitted to the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV 45via the second antenna 21 (Step S5404). The server URL generationinformation 80 includes: the server address information 81 indicatingaddress information of the server 42; the user identificationinformation 82 that is the login ID 83 to the server 42; and thepassword 84 that is a login password to the server 42. The password 84is important information for preventing unauthorized acts of a maliciousthird person. Therefore, the password 84 is sometimes encryptedbeforehand as the encrypted password 85 to be stored, and thentransmitted to the TV 45.

After the server URL generation information 80 is transmitted to theRF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV 45 at Step S5404, the captured imagestate information 55 stored in the second memory 52 is also transmittedto the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV 45 via the second antenna 21(Step S5405). The captured image state information 55 is: the finalcapturing time 68 (case 1); the existence identifiers 64 which areexistence identification information regarding images not yet beenuploaded and each of which is assigned to a corresponding one of thecaptured images so that it is possible to determine whether the imagehas not yet been uploaded (case 2); the not-yet-uploaded imageinformation hashed information 67 (case 3); or the final image serialnumber 69 from among image serial numbers chronologically assigned tocaptured images (case 4). The captured image state information 55 isimportant for examining synchronization between captured images in theimage capturing device 1 and captured images in the server 42.

In case 1, the final capturing time 68 is used as the captured imagestate information 55. Therefore, the TV 45 compares the final capturingtime 68 to the final upload time. If the final capturing time 68 istemporally later than the final upload time that is a time of finallyuploading to the server 42, then it is determined that the image data inthe image capturing device 1 is not in synchronization with the imagedata in the server 42. Therefore, warning information regarding thesynchronization failure is displayed on the display unit of the TV 45.

In case 2, the captured image state information 55 is the existenceidentifiers 64 each of which is assigned to a corresponding one of thecaptured images so that it is possible to determine whether the imagehas not yet been uploaded. Therefore, the TV 45 examines the existenceidentifiers 64 to determine whether or not there is any image not yetbeen uploaded. If there is any image not yet been uploaded, then it isdetermined that the image data in the image capturing device 1 is not insynchronization with the image data in the server 42. Therefore, warninginformation regarding the synchronization failure is displayed on thedisplay unit of the TV 45.

In case 3, the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information 67is employed as the captured image state information 55. Therefore, theTV 45 examines the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information67 to determine whether or not there is any image not yet been uploaded.If there is any image not yet been uploaded, then it is determined thatthe image data in the image capturing device 1 is not in synchronizationwith the image data in the server 42. Therefore, warning informationregarding the synchronization failure is displayed on the display unitof the TV 45.

In case 4, the captured image state information 55 is the final imageserial number 69 from among image serial numbers chronologicallyassigned to the captured images. Therefore, the TV 45 compares (a) thefinal image serial number 69 from among image serial numberschronologically assigned to the captured images to (b) an image serialnumber of an image finally uploaded to the server 42. Here, the finalimage serial number 69 is provided from the image capturing device 1,while the image serial number is provided from the server 42. Based onthe comparison, the TV 45 can determine whether or not there is anyimage not yet been uploaded. If there is any image not yet beenuploaded, then it is determined that the image data in the imagecapturing device 1 is not in synchronization with the image data in theserver 42. Therefore, warning information regarding the synchronizationfailure is displayed on the display unit of the TV 45.

After transmitting the captured image state information 55 from thesecond antenna 21 of the image capturing device 1 to the RF-IDreader/writer 46 of the TV 45 at Step S5405, the image display methodinstruction information 77 is also transmitted from the second memory 52of the image capturing device 1 to the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV45 via the second antenna 21 (Step S5406). The image display methodinstruction information 77 is identification information indicating howthe display unit of the TV 45 is to display the images downloaded fromthe server 42. The image display method instruction information 77includes the list display (indicator) 78 indicating that the images areto be displayed in a list, and the slide show (indicator) 79 indicatingthat the images are to be displayed as a slide show.

As described above, at Steps S5401 to S5406, the image capturing device1 transmits the server URL generation information 80, the captured imagestate information 55, and the image display method instructioninformation 77, which are stored in the second memory 52 of the imagecapturing device 1, from the second antenna 21 of the image capturingdevice 1 to the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV 45. Here, it isdesirable to encrypt all of the above pieces of information to betransmitted, by using the cryptography key information shared betweenthe image capturing device 1 and the TV 45 at the mutual authentication.The encryption achieves secure information communication between theimage capturing device 1 and the TV 45. As a result, intervention of amalicious third person can be prevented.

Since the server URL generation information 80 is transmitted to the TV45, the server 42 (and directory) to which the first antenna 20 of theimage capturing device 1 transmits data is the same as the server (anddirectory) from which the TV 45 downloads the data. Therefore, the TV 45can display the images that have been captured by the image capturingdevice 1 and then uploaded to the server 42.

In addition, the transmission of the captured image state information 55to the TV 45 makes it possible to examine synchronization between thecaptured images stored in the third memory 33 of the image capturingdevice 1 and the images uploaded from the first antenna 20 to the server42. Therefore, the TV 45 can detect a failure of the synchronization.The display of the warning information indicating the synchronizationfailure on the TV 45 can prevent unnecessary confusion of the user.

Moreover, the transmission of the image display method instructioninformation 77 to the TV 45 enables the user to view images by a setimage viewing method without designating the image viewing method on theTV 45. The user merely needs to move the image capturing device 1 intoproximity of the TV 45. The complicated operations using a remotecontroller or the like of the TV 45 are not necessary. The images can beautomatically displayed by the set viewing method.

FIG. 44 is a block diagram of characteristic functions of a TV systemaccording to the second embodiment of the present invention.

The TV 45 according to the second embodiment includes the RF-IDreader/writer 46, the decryption unit 5504, a URL generation unit 5505,a communication unit 5506, a transmission unit 5507, a communicationinterface 5508, a receiving unit 5509, a data processing unit 5510, amemory unit 5511, a display unit 5512, and a CPU 5513.

The RF-ID reader/writer 46 communicates with the RF-ID unit 47 of theimage capturing device 1 via the second antenna 21. The RF-IDreader/writer 46 includes a wireless antenna 5501, a receiving unit5503, and a communicable device search unit (polling unit) 5502.

The wireless antenna 5501 performs proximity wireless communication withthe second antenna 21 of the image capturing device 1. The wirelessantenna 5501 has the same structure as that of wireless antennas ofgeneral-purpose RF-ID reader/writers.

The communicable device search unit (polling unit) 5502 performs pollingto check a RF-ID unit of each of plural cameras in order to examinewhether to have any transmission request (or processing request). If thecommunicable device search unit 5502 receives a response of the pollingfrom the RF-ID unit 47 of the image capturing device 1 (thecorresponding camera), then the mutual authentication is performed toshare a common cryptography key between the TV 45 and the imagecapturing device 1.

When the mutual authentication is completed after receiving the pollingresponse, the receiving unit 5503 receives the server URL generationinformation 80, the captured image state information 55, and the imagedisplay method instruction information 77 from the second memory 52 viathe second antenna 21 of the image capturing device 1.

The decryption unit 5504 decrypts the server URL generation information80, the captured image state information 55, and the image displaymethod instruction information 77 which are received by the receivingunit 5503. The decryption of the server URL generation information 80,the captured image state information 55, and the image display methodinstruction information 77 which have been encrypted is performed usingthe cryptography key shared between the image capturing device 1 and theTV 45 after the mutual authentication by the communicable device searchunit (polling unit) 5502.

The URL generation unit 5505 generates, based on the server URLgeneration information 80, a URL to access the server 42, and thentransmits the generated URL to the communication unit. The URL includesnot only the server specific information, but also the login ID 83 andthe password 85 used to login to the server.

The communication unit 5506 communicates with the server 42 via ageneral-purpose network using the communication interface 5508.

The transmission unit 5507 transmits the URL generated by the URLgeneration unit 5505 via the communication interface 5508 in order toconnect the TV 45 to the server 42.

The communication interface 5508 is a communication interface forconnecting the TV 45 to the server 42 via a general-purpose network. Thecommunication interface 5508 is, for example, a wired/wireless LANinterface.

The receiving unit 5509 receives (downloads) image data and an imagedisplay cascading style sheet (CSS) from the serer 42 connected by thecommunication interface 5508.

The data processing unit 5510 performs data processing for the imagedata downloaded by the receiving unit 5509. If the image data to bedownloaded is compressed data, the data processing unit 5510de-compresses the image data. If the image data is encrypted, the dataprocessing unit 5510 decrypts the image data. In addition, the dataprocessing unit 5510 can arrange the downloaded image data by an imagedisplay style based on the image display CSS. If it is determined, basedon the captured image state information 55 obtained, if necessary, bydecryption of the decryption unit, that the image data in the imagecapturing device 1 is not in synchronization with the image data in theserver 42, then the data processing unit 5510 causes the display unit5512 to display warning information regarding the synchronizationfailure. Thereby, unnecessary confusion of the user can be prevented.Moreover, the data processing unit 5510 sets a mode of displaying thedownloaded image data, according to the image display method instructioninformation 77 provided from the decryption unit 5504. For example, ifthe list display (flag) 78 in the image display method instructioninformation 77 is ON, then the data processing unit 5510 generates alist of the downloaded images and provides the list to the memory unit5511. If the slide show (flag) 79 in the image display methodinstruction information 77 is ON, then the data processing unit 5510generates a slide show of the downloaded images and provides the slideshow to the memory unit 5511.

The memory unit 5511 is a memory that temporarily holds the image dataprocessed by the data processing unit 5510.

The display unit 5512 displays the image data stored in the memory unit5511. The image data has been downloaded from the server 42 and appliedwith data processing by the data processing unit 5510 as describedearlier.

As descried above, based on the server URL generation information 80,the captured image state information 55, and the image display methodinstruction information 77 which are received from the RF-ID unit 47 ofthe image capturing device 1, the TV 45 according to the secondembodiment of the present invention can be connected to the server 42,then download the uploaded image data from the server 42, and displaythe downloaded image data on the display unit 5512. Thereby, the userdoes not need to do complicated processes of removing the third memory33 such as a Secure Digital (SD) card or a flash memory from the imagecapturing device 1 and equipping the third memory 33 to a card reader ofthe TV 45 in order to view captured images. In the second embodiment ofthe present invention, the user can display and view captured imagedata, by simple operations of simply presenting the RF-ID unit 47 of theimage capturing device 1 to the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV 45 forproximity communication. The second embodiment of the present inventioncan provide a captured image viewing system by which even users who arenot familiar with operations of digital devices can easily view imagedata.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart of RF-ID wireless proximity communication betweenthe image capturing device 1 and the TV 45.

First, the communicable device search unit 5502 in the RF-IDreader/writer 46 of the TV 45 transmits a polling signal to search forthe RF-ID unit 47 of the communicable image capturing device 1 (StepS5601).

When the image capturing device 1 receives the polling signal from thecommunicable device search unit 5502 in the RF-ID reader/writer 46 ofthe TV 45, the second power supply unit 91 is supplied with power toactivate (operate) the RF-ID unit 47 (Step S5602). Here, at least theRF-ID unit 47, which can be operated under the second power supply unit91, is activated. It is not necessary to activate all functions in theimage capturing device 1.

When the activation of the RF-ID unit 47 of the image capturing device 1is completed at Step S5602, the image capturing device 1 transmits apolling response for the polling to the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV45 via the second antenna 21 (Step S5603).

After the image capturing device 1 responds to the polling at StepS5603, the TV 45 receives the polling response by the wireless antenna5501 of the RF-ID reader/writer 46 (Step S5604).

After receiving the polling response at Step S5604, the TV 45 determineswhether or not the image capturing device 1 transmitting the pollingresponse is a device mutually communicable with the TV 45 (Step S5605).If the determination is made that the image capturing device 1 cannotmutually communicate with the TV 45, then the processing is completed.On the other hand, if the determination is made that the image capturingdevice 1 is mutually communicable with the TV 45, then the processingproceeds to Step S5606.

If the determination is made that the image capturing device 1 ismutually communicable with the TV 45 at Step S6505, then the TV 45performs mutual authentication to determine whether or not the imagecapturing device 1 and the TV 45 are legitimate devices forcommunication (Step S5606). The mutual authentication is the same asgeneral mutual authentication using HDMI or IEEE1394. In the mutualauthentication, issuing of challenge data and checking of response dataare performed plural times between the TV 45 and the image capturingdevice 1 to eventually generate a common cryptography key. If one of theTV 45 and the image capturing device 1 is not legitimate, the commoncryptography key is not generated, thereby disabling future mutualcommunication.

The image capturing device 1 also performs the same mutualauthentication in the RF-ID unit 47. Generation and transmission ofchallenge data and receiving and checking of response data are performedplural times between the TV 45 and the image capturing device 1 toeventually generate a cryptography key identical to the cryptography keygenerated by the TV 45 (Step S5607).

When the mutual authentication is completed at Step S5607, the imagecapturing device 1 reads the server URL generation information 80 as theserver specific information 48 from the second memory 52, then encryptsthe server URL generation information 80 using the common cryptographykey generated at the mutual authentication, and transmits the encryptedserver URL generation information 80 to the RF-ID reader/writer 46 ofthe TV 45 (Step S5608).

The TV 45 receives the encrypted server URL generation information 80transmitted at Step S5608, by the receiving unit 5503 in the RF-IDreader/writer 46. Then, the decryption unit 5504 decrypts the encryptedserver URL generation information 80 using the common cryptography key.Based on the server URL generation information 80, the URL generationunit 5505 generates a URL to access the server 42. Then, the TV 45transmits, to the image capturing device 1, a notification of completionof receiving the server URL generation information 80 (Step S5609).

After the notification of the receiving completion is transmitted atStep S5609, the image capturing device 1 receives the notification bythe second antenna 21. Then, the image capturing device 1 reads thecaptured image state information 55 from the second memory 52 totransmit the captured image state information 55 to the TV 45 (StepS5610). The captured image state information 55 is: the final capturingtime 68 (case 1); the existence identifiers 64 which are existenceidentification information regarding images not yet been uploaded andeach of which is assigned to a corresponding one of the captured imagesso that it is possible to determine whether the image has not yet beenuploaded (case 2); the not-yet-uploaded image information hashedinformation 67 (case 3); or the final image serial number 69 from amongimage serial numbers chronologically assigned to captured images (case4). The captured image state information 55 is important for examiningsynchronization between captured images in the image capturing device 1and captured images in the server 42.

After the image capturing device 1 transmits the captured image stateinformation 55 at Step S5610, the TV 45 receives the captured imagestate information 55 by the RF-ID reader/writer 46 and then transmits,to the image capturing device 1, a notification of completion ofreceiving the captured image state information 55 (Step S5611). Here,the CPU 5513 in the TV 45 performs the following processing depending onkinds of the received captured image state information 55.

In case 1, the final capturing time 68 is used as the captured imagestate information 55. Therefore, the TV 45 compares the final capturingtime 68 to the final upload time that is a time of finally uploading tothe server 42. If the final capturing time 68 is temporally later thanthe final upload time, then it is determined that the image data in theimage capturing device 1 is not in synchronization with the image datain the server 42. Therefore, warning information regarding thesynchronization failure is displayed on the display unit of the TV 45.

In case 2, the captured image state information 55 is the existenceidentifiers 64 each of which is assigned to a corresponding one of thecaptured images so that it is possible to determine whether the imagehas not yet been uploaded. Therefore, the TV 45 examines the existenceidentifiers 64 to determine whether or not there is any image not yetbeen uploaded. If there is any image not yet been uploaded, then it isdetermined that the image data in the image capturing device 1 is not insynchronization with the image data in the server 42. Therefore, warninginformation regarding the synchronization failure is displayed on thedisplay unit of the TV 45.

In case 3, the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information 67is employed as the captured image state information 55. Therefore, theTV 45 examines the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information67 to determine whether or not there is any image not yet been uploaded.If there is any image not yet been uploaded, then it is determined thatthe image data in the image capturing device 1 is not in synchronizationwith the image data in the server 42. Therefore, warning informationregarding the synchronization failure is displayed on the display unitof the TV 45.

In case 4, the captured image state information 55 is the final imageserial number 69 from among image serial numbers chronologicallyassigned to the captured images. Therefore, the TV 45 compares (a) thefinal image serial number 69 from among image serial numberschronologically assigned to the captured images to (b) an image serialnumber of an image finally uploaded to the server 42. Here, the finalimage serial number 69 is provided from the image capturing device 1,while the image serial number is provided from the server 42. Based onthe comparison, the TV 45 can determine whether or not there is anyimage not yet been uploaded. If there is any image not yet beenuploaded, then it is determined that the image data in the imagecapturing device 1 is not in synchronization with the image data in theserver 42. Therefore, warning information regarding the synchronizationfailure is displayed on the display unit of the TV 45.

After the TV 45 completes receiving of the captured image stateinformation 55 and transmits the notification of the receipt to theimage capturing device 1 at Step S5611, the image capturing device 1reads the image display method instruction information 77 from thesecond memory 52 and transmits the image display method instructioninformation 77 to the TV 45 (Step S5612). The image display methodinstruction information 77 includes the list display (flag) 78 and theslide show (flag) 79.

After the image display method instruction information 77 is transmittedat Step S5612, the TV 45 receives the image display method instructioninformation 77 by the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV 45 and transmitsa notification of completion of receiving the image display methodinstruction information 77 to the image capturing device 1 (Step S5613).The data processing unit 5510 of the TV 45 generates a mode ofdisplaying images downloaded from the server 42, based on the receivedimage display method instruction information 77. For example, if thelist display flag in the image display method instruction information 77is ON, the data processing unit 5510 generates a list of the downloadedimages and stores the generated list in the memory unit 5511 and causesthe display unit 5512 to display the list. On the other hand, if theslide show flag in the image display method instruction information 77is ON, the data processing unit 5510 generates a slide show of thedownloaded images and stores the generated slide show in the memory unit5511 and causes the display unit 5512 to display the slide show.

After receiving the image display method instruction information 77 atStep S5613, the TV 45 disconnects communication from the RF-ID unit 47of the image capturing device 1 (Step S5614).

Next, the TV 45 activates a TV system (Step S5615). The activation ofthe TV system refers to turning the main power of the TV 450N to displaythe downloaded image data on the display unit 5512. Prior to theactivation of the TV system at Step S5615, at least the RF-IDreader/writer 46 of the TV 45 is activated and the display unit 5512 maybe turned OFF.

Then, the communication unit 5506 is activated to connect the TV 45 tothe server 42 based on the URL generated by the URL generation unit 5505(Step S5616).

After connecting to the server 42 at Step S5616, the TV 45 downloadsuploaded image data from the server 42 (Step S5617).

The data processing unit 5510 generates to-be-displayed image data fromthe images downloaded at the Step S5617, based on the image displaymethod instruction information 77 obtained from the camera (the imagecapturing device 1), then stores the generated image data into thememory unit 5511, and displays the image data on the display unit 5512(Step S5618). The data processing unit 5510 of the TV 45 generates amode of displaying the images (image data) downloaded from the server42, based on the received image display method instruction information77. For example, if the list display flag 78 in the image display methodinstruction information 77 is ON, the data processing unit 5510generates a list of the downloaded images and stores the generated listin the memory unit 5511 and causes the display unit 5512 to display thelist. On the other hand, if the slide show flag 79 in the image displaymethod instruction information 77 is ON, the data processing unit 5510generates a slide show of the downloaded images and stores the generatedslide show in the memory unit 5511 and causes the display unit 5512 todisplay the slide show.

After displaying of the images downloaded from the server 42 iscompleted at Step S5617, the TV 45 performs synchronization examinationto determine whether or not the captured images recorded in the thirdmemory 33 of the image capturing device 1 are in synchronization withthe images downloaded from the server 42 (Step S5619). Thesynchronization examination is performed based on the captured imagestate information provided at Step S5611 from the image capturing device1. The captured image state information 55 is: the final capturing time68 (case 1); the existence identifiers 64 which are existenceidentification information regarding images not yet been uploaded andeach of which is assigned to a corresponding one of the captured imagesso that it is possible to determine whether the image has not yet beenuploaded (case 2); the not-yet-uploaded image information hashedinformation 67 (case 3); or the final image serial number 69 from amongimage serial numbers chronologically assigned to captured images (case4). The captured image state information 55 is important for examiningsynchronization between captured images in the image capturing device 1and captured images in the server 42.

FIGS. 46A to 46D are flowcharts of details of the server synchronizationexamination (Step S5619) of FIG. 45 when the captured image stateinformation 55 are cases 1 to 4, respectively.

FIG. 46A is a flowchart of case 1 where the captured image stateinformation 55 is the final capturing time 68.

First, the communication unit 5506 of the 45 receives, from the server42, date/time of finally uploading to the server 42 (hereinafter,referred to also as a “final upload date/time” that may be date/time ofcapturing a final image among uploaded images to produce the sameadvantages) (Step S5701).

Next, the TV 45 compares the final upload date/time to a final capturingdate/time 68 (Step S5702). The final capturing date/time 68, which isdate/time of final capturing of the image capturing device 1, isindicated in the captured image state information 55 provided from theimage capturing device 1 to the RF-ID reader/writer 46. If the finalupload date/time is prior to the final capturing date/time 68, it isdetermined that there is an image captured after the final upload andnot yet been uploaded to the server 42. Therefore, a determination ismade that the images in the image capturing device 1 are not insynchronization with the images in the server 42. Then, warninginformation is displayed at Step S5703. On the other hand, if the finalupload date/time is equal to the final capturing date/time 68, it isdetermined that the images in the image capturing device 1 are insynchronization with the images in the server 42. Then, thesynchronization examination is completed without displaying warninginformation.

If it is determined at Step S5702 that the images in the image capturingdevice 1 are not in synchronization with the images in the server 42,the display unit 5512 displays warning information indicating thesynchronization failure. Here, if time information is generated bycomparing the final upload date/time to the final capturing date/time 68in order to indicate from when captured images are not uploaded, and thegenerated time information is presented as a message together with thewarning information, the warning information is convenient for the user.

FIG. 46B is a flowchart of case 2 where the captured image stateinformation 55 is the existence identifiers 64 each of which is assignedto a corresponding one of the captured images so that it is possible todetermine whether the image has not yet been uploaded.

First, it is determined, based on the existence identifiers of thenot-yet-uploaded image existence identification information, whether ornot there is any image not yet been uploaded to the server 42 from amongthe captured images stored in the third memory 33 of the image capturingdevice 1 (Step S5711). Here, the existence identifiers are indicated inthe captured image state information 55 provided from the imagecapturing device 1 to the RF-ID reader/writer 46. If it is determinedthat there is an image not yet been uploaded to the server 42 at StepS5711, then the processing proceed to Step S5712 to display warninginformation. On the other hand, if there is not image not yet beenuploaded, it is determined that the images in the image capturing device1 are in synchronization with the images in the server 42. Then, thesynchronization examination is completed without displaying warninginformation.

If it is determined that the images in the image capturing device 1 arenot in synchronization with the images in the server 42, the displayunit 5512 displays warning information indicating the synchronizationfailure at Step S5712.

FIG. 46C is a flowchart of case 3 where the captured image stateinformation 55 is the not-yet-uploaded image information hashedinformation 67.

First, it is determined, based on the not-yet-uploaded image informationhashed information 67, whether or not there is any image not yet beenuploaded to the server 42 from among the captured images stored in thethird memory 33 of the image capturing device 1 (Step S5721). Here, thenot-yet-uploaded image information hashed information 67 is indicated inthe captured image state information 55 provided from the imagecapturing device 1 to the RF-ID reader/writer 46. The determination ofStep S5721 is performed by comparing the not-yet-uploaded imageinformation hashed information 67 to a hashed value generated by hashingNULL generated in the TV 45. If it is determined that there is an imagenot yet been uploaded at Step S5721, then the processing proceed to StepS5722 to display warning information. On the other hand, if there is noimage not yet been uploaded, it is determined that the images in theimage capturing device 1 are in synchronization with the images in theserver 42. Then, the synchronization examination is completed withoutdisplaying warning information.

If it is determined that the images in the image capturing device 1 arenot in synchronization with the images in the server 42, the displayunit 5512 displays warning information indicating the synchronizationfailure at Step S5722.

FIG. 46D is a flowchart of case 4 where the captured image stateinformation 55 is a final image serial number from among image serialnumbers assigned to captured images.

First, the communication unit 5506 of the TV 45 receives, from theserver 42, an image serial number of an image finally uploaded to theserver 42 (Step S5731).

Next, the TV 45 compares (a) the image serial number 69 of the imagefinally uploaded which is provided form the server 42 to (b) a finalimage serial number 69 of an image finally captured which is indicatedin the captured image state information 55 provided from the imagecapturing device 1 by the RF-ID reader/writer 46 (Step S5732). If themage serial number 69 of the image finally uploaded is smaller than themage serial number 69 of the image finally captured, it is determinedthat there is an image captured after the final upload and not yet beenuploaded to the server 42. Therefore, a determination is made that theimages in the image capturing device 1 are not in synchronization withthe images in the server 42. Then, the processing proceeds to Step S5733to display warning information. On the other hand, if the mage serialnumber 69 of the image finally uploaded is identical to the mage serialnumber 69 of the image finally captured, it is determined that theimages in the image capturing device 1 are in synchronization with theimages in the server 42. Then, the synchronization examination iscompleted without displaying warning information.

If it is determined at Step S5732 that the images in the image capturingdevice 1 are not in synchronization with the images in the server 42,the display unit 5512 displays warning information indicating thesynchronization failure.

When all of images captured by the image capturing device 1 are notuploaded to the serve 42 (in other words, when images captured by theimage capturing device 1 are not in synchronization with images uploadedto the server 42), any of above cases 1 to 4 makes it possible to detectthe synchronization failure. Thereby, although all of the capturedimages cannot be displayed on the display unit 5512, a convenientmessage can be displayed to the user to inform the synchronizationfailure. As a result, unnecessary confusion of the user can beprevented.

FIG. 47A is (1) a data format used in uploading captured images from theimage capturing device 1 to the server 42. FIG. 47B is (2) a data formatused in RF-ID communication between the image capturing device 1 and theTV 45.

First, (1) a data format 5940 in uploading captured images from theimage capturing device 1 to the server 42 is described. The data format5940 includes camera ID 5901, a sever address 5902, a server login ID5903, a server login password 5904, an image directory 5905, and anuploading-image number 5906.

The camera ID 5901 is camera UID uniquely assigned to each camera (imagecapturing device 1). The camera ID 5901 is ID information recorded inthe camera ID 76 in the second memory 52 of the image capturing device1. Use of the camera ID 5901 as login ID to the server 42 can provide aserver address unique to each image capturing device 1 so that the imagecapturing device 1 can access the server 42 without user's entry oflogin ID. In addition, the camera ID 5901 enables the server 42 tomanage captured images for each capturing camera.

The sever address 5902 is included in the server address information 81in the server specific information 48 stored in the second memory 52 ofthe image capturing device 1. The sever address 5902 enables the TV 45to identify the server to which target image data is uploaded.

The server login ID 5903 is included in the login ID 83 in the useridentification information 82 in the server specific information 58stored in the second memory 52 of the image capturing device 1. Theserver login ID 5903 allows the TV 45 to login, by using the sameaccount, to the server to which the image capturing device 1 uploadsimage data.

The server login password 5904 is included in the password 84 in theserver specific information 58 stored in the second memory 52 of theimage capturing device 1. The server login password 5904 allows the TV45 to login, by using the same account, to the server to which the imagecapturing device 1 uploads image data.

The uploading-image number 5906 is the number of images to be uploadedto the server. The uploading-image number 5906 is equal to the number ofimages which is stored as the not-yet-uploaded-image number 65 in thesecond memory 52 of the image capturing device 1. After capturingimages, the number of images not yet been uploaded is indicated in theuploading-image number 5906.

After transmitting the data format 5940, the image capturing device 1uploads, to the server 42, the images that are stored in the thirdmemory 33 of the image capturing device 1 but not yet been uploaded tothe server 42.

Next, (2) a data format 5950 used in RF-ID communication between theimage capturing device 1 and the TV 45 is described. The data format5950 includes camera ID 5911, a sever address 5912, a server login ID5913, a server login password 5914, a final capturing date/time (finalcapturing time) 5915, and not-yet-uploaded image data existenceidentifiers 5916, not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information5917, a final image serial number 5918, and image display methodinstruction information 5919.

The camera ID 5911 is a camera UID uniquely assigned to each camera(image capturing device 1). The camera ID 5911 is ID informationrecorded in the camera ID 76 in the second memory 52 of the imagecapturing device 1. Use of the camera ID 5911 as login ID to the server42 from the TV 45 can provide a server address unique to each imagecapturing device 1 so that the TV 45 can access the server 42 withoutuser's entry of login ID. The camera ID 5901 may be used in the mutualauthentication between the RF-ID unit 47 of the image capturing device 1and the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV 45.

The sever address 5912 is included in the server address information 81in the server specific information 58 stored in the second memory 52 ofthe image capturing device 1. The sever address 5912 enables the TV 45to identify the server to which target image data is uploaded.

The server login ID 5913 is included in the login ID 83 in the useridentification information 82 in the server specific information 58stored in the second memory 52 of the image capturing device 1. Theserver login ID 5913 allows the TV 45 to login, by using the sameaccount, to the server to which the image capturing device 1 uploadsimage data.

The server login password 5914 is included in the password 84 in theserver specific information 58 stored in the second memory 52 of theimage capturing device 1. The server login password 5914 allows the TV45 to login, by using the same account, to the server to which the imagecapturing device 1 uploads image data.

The final capturing date/time 5915 corresponds to the final capturingtime 68 in the captured image state information 55 stored in the secondmemory 52 of the image capturing device 1. The TV 45 uses the finalcapturing date/time 5915 for the synchronization examination betweencaptured images in the image capturing device 1 and captured images inthe server 42.

The not-yet-uploaded image data existence identifiers 5916 correspond tothe not-yet-uploaded image data existence identification information inthe captured image state information 55 stored in the second memory 52of the image capturing device 1. TV 45 uses the not-yet-uploaded imagedata existence identifiers 5916 for the synchronization examinationbetween captured images in the image capturing device 1 and capturedimages in the server 42. In order to implement each of thenot-yet-uploaded image data existence identifiers 5916, each image ID5928 for identifying a corresponding one of captured images is assignedwith an upload flag 5926 indicating whether or not the correspondingimage has been uploaded to the server 42. Thereby, it is possible todetermine whether or not each of the captured images has been uploadedto the server 42.

The not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information 5917corresponds to the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information67 in the captured image state information 55 stored in the secondmemory 52 of the image capturing device 1. The TV 45 uses thenot-yet-uploaded image information hashed information 5917 for thesynchronization examination between captured images in the imagecapturing device 1 and captured images in the server 42.

The final image serial number 5918 corresponds to the final image serialnumber 69 in the captured image state information 55 stored in thesecond memory 52 of the image capturing device 1. The TV 45 uses thefinal image serial number 5918 for the synchronization examinationbetween captured images in the image capturing device 1 and capturedimages in the server 42.

The image display method instruction information 5919 corresponds to theimage display method instruction information 77 in the captured imagestate information 55 stored in the second memory 52 of the imagecapturing device 1. The image display method instruction information5919 includes identification information by which the TV 45 designates amethod of viewing images downloaded from the server 42.

For each image ID 5927, the image display method instruction information5919 includes a list display flag 5920, a slide show flag 5921, a printflag 5922, a video reproduction flag 5923, a download flag 5924, and asecurity password 5925.

The image ID 5927 is information unique to a captured image. The piecesof image ID 5927 are chronologically assigned to captured images by theimage capturing device 1 in capturing the images.

The list display flag 5920 corresponds to the list display (flag) 78stored in the second memory 52 of the image capturing device 1. The TV45 uses the list display flag 5920 to determine whether or not imagedata downloaded from the server 42 is to be displayed in a list format.If the list display flag 5920 indicates “yes”, the data processing unit5510 of the TV 45 generates a list of the downloaded images, stores thelist to the memory unit 5511, and then displays the list on the displayunit 5512.

The slide show flag 5921 corresponds to the slide show (flag) 79 storedin the second memory 52 of the image capturing device 1. The TV 45 usesthe slide show flag 5921 to determine whether or not image datadownloaded from the server 42 is to be displayed as a slide show. If theslide show flag 5921 indicates “automatic”, the data processing unit5510 of the TV 45 generates a slide show of the downloaded images,stores the slide show to the memory unit 5511, and then displays theslide show on the display unit 5512. If the slide show flag 5921indicates “manual”, the TV 45 permits execution of the slide showaccording to instructions from the user. If the slide show flag 5921indicates “disable”, the TV 45 inhibits display of the slide show.

The print flag 5922 indicates whether or not images to be downloaded tothe TV 45 and then displayed on the display unit 5512 are permitted tobe printed by a printer (not shown) connected to the TV 45. The printflag 5922 is not shown in the image display method instructioninformation 77 stored in the second memory 52 of the image capturingdevice 1. However, if the print flag 5922 is added, it is possible toset whether or not image data is printable. As a result, usabilityrelated to use of images can be improved.

The video reproduction flag 5923 indicates whether or not video datacaptured by the image capturing device 1 and then uploaded to the server42 is permitted to be downloaded by the TV 45 and then viewed. If theimage capturing device 1 has a video capturing function, addition of thevideo reproduction flag 5923 to the image display method instructioninformation 77 stored in the second memory 52 can add setting of whetheror not video reproduction is permitted. As a result, the videoreproduction can be managed without complicated operations by the user.

The download flag 5924 is an identifier indicating whether or not imageor video uploaded to the server 42 is permitted to be downloaded(copied) to a memory in the TV 45. The download flag 5924 can preventthat the image or video is copied by the third person to which imagecapturing is not permitted. Thereby, copy-right protection is alsoachieved.

The security password 5925 is password information that permits only theauthorized user to perform the above-described image viewing, printing,and downloading processes. In the second embodiment, the same passwordis set for each of the above-described image viewing, printing, anddownloading processes. It is preferable, however, to set a differentpassword to each of image viewing, printing, and downloading processes,so that a level of security can be set independently.

As described above, in the system according to the second embodiment ofthe present invention, the image capturing device 1 uploads capturedimages to the server connected to the image capturing device 1 via thefirst antenna. When the image capturing device 1 is prevented to theRF-ID reader/writer 46 of the TV 45, the image capturing device 1transmits the server URL generation information 80, the captured imagestate information 55, and the image display method instructioninformation 77 from the RF-ID unit 47 to the TV 45 by the RF-IDcommunication. Then, the TV 45 connects to the server to which the imagecapturing device 1 has uploaded the captured images, then downloads thecaptured images from the server, and displays the captured images. Here,it is determined whether or not the captured images in the server 42 arein synchronization with the captured images in the image capturingdevice 1. If the synchronization is failure, the TV 45 displaysnotification of the synchronization failure on the display unit 5512.Thereby, the user can display the captured images only by presenting theimage capturing device 1 to the TV 45, although the user conventionallyhas to remove a recording memory from the camera (the image capturingdevice 1) to be equipped to the TV 45 in order to view the images.Thereby, even the user who is not familiar with operations of digitaldevices can easily display the images on the TV 45.

Third Embodiment

The third embodiment according to the present invention is describedbelow.

First, the third embodiment is explained in summary. FIG. 48 is aschematic block diagram of an electronic catalog display systemaccording to the third embodiment. The electronic catalog display systemaccording to the third embodiment includes an electronic catalog serverinformation input device 500, an electronic catalog notification card502, the TV 45, and an electronic catalog server 506. The electroniccatalog server information input device 500 includes a RF-ID writer 501.The electronic catalog notification card 502 includes a RF-ID unit 47.The TV 45 includes a RF-ID reader 504 and a network communication unit509. The electronic catalog server 506 includes an electronic catalogdatabase 507 and a customer attribute database 508.

The electronic catalog server information input device 500 writeselectronic catalog server information from the RF-ID writer 501 to theRF-ID unit 47 attached to the electronic catalog notification card 502.The electronic catalog server information is provided from a user whoprovides services of an electronic catalog (hereinafter, referred to asa “provider user”). When a user who receives the services of theelectronic catalog (hereinafter, referred to as a “customer user”)brings the electronic catalog notification card 502, in which theelectronic catalog server information is written, into proximity of theTV 45, the RF-ID reader 504 in the TV 45 reads the electronic catalogserver information from the RF-ID unit 47. In addition, the TV 45transmits, based on the readout electronic catalog server information, arequest for obtaining an electronic catalog to the electronic catalogserver 506 set on a network via the network communication unit 509.Furthermore, when transmitting the request to the electronic catalogserver, the TV 45 transmits also user information, which is previouslyinputted in the TV 45, to the electronic catalog server 506. Theelectronic catalog server 506 receives the request for the electroniccatalog and the user information from the TV 45. First, the electroniccatalog server 506 obtains customer attribute data from the customerattribute database 508 based on the user information. Next, from theelectronic catalog database 507, the electronic catalog server 506obtains electronic catalog data associated with the customer attributedata. Then, the electronic catalog server 506 transmits the obtainedelectronic catalog data to the TV 45 from which the request for theelectronic catalog has been transmitted. The TV 45 displays theelectronic catalog data received from the electronic catalog server 506,and thereby receives purchase operations from the customer user topurchase products in the electronic catalog data.

The following describes the electronic catalog display system accordingto the third embodiment in more detail.

FIG. 49 is a functional block diagram illustrating a structure of theelectronic catalog server information input device according to thethird embodiment. First, a key input receiving unit 520 receives aninput by input keys operated by the provider user, in order to obtainthe electronic catalog server information. The electronic catalog serverinformation obtained by the key input receiving unit 520 includes: asever address such as a URL; server login ID; a server login password;an electronic catalog display password; electronic catalog displayinformation; and a medium identification information. The electroniccatalog display information indicates whether images ofproducts/services in the electronic catalog are to be displayed in alist (as thumbnails) or sequentially (as a slide show). The mediumidentification information is used for identifying a medium such as acard or a postcard to which RF-ID is attached. The electronic catalogserver information obtained by the key input receiving unit 520 isstored into a storage unit 522. Next, when a RF-ID transmission key andthe like are received after receiving of the electronic catalog serverinformation, a RF-ID transmission input receiving unit 521 notifies atransmission unit 523 of a transmission request. Then, the transmissionunit 523 reads the electronic catalog server information from thestorage unit 522. An antenna unit 524 transmits the electronic catalogserver information. The processing performed by the electronic catalogserver information input device is presented in more detail withreference to a flowchart of FIG. 50.

FIG. 51 is a block diagram of a structure of the RF-ID unit 47 includedin the electronic catalog notification card 502. A structure andprocessing of the RF-ID unit 47 are the same as those described in thefirst and second embodiments. The second power supply unit 91 obtainscurrent from signals received by the second antenna 21, and providespower to each unit in the electronic catalog notification card 502.Received information is recorded into the second memory 52 via the datareceiving unit 105, the second processing unit 95, and the recordingunit 106.

FIG. 52 is a functional block diagram of a structure of the TV 45. Thestructure of the TV 45 according to the third embodiment differs fromthe structure of the TV 45 according to the second embodiment in that auser information input unit 588 is added. The user information inputunit 588 receives the user information and stores the user informationinto a memory unit 583 temporarily. The user information is an attributeof the customer user and previously inputted by the customer userhimself/herself. The user information is preferably gender or ageinformation of the customer user. The user information may be otherinformation, such as a residence or a family structure, which is privateinformation for selecting product/service data in the electroniccatalog. The user information is transmitted to the electronic catalogserver via the communication unit 509, together with the URL of theelectronic catalog server generated by the URL generation unit. In thesame manner as described in the first embodiment, in the thirdembodiment, when the customer user moves the electronic catalognotification card 502 into proximity of a RF-ID reader 504 of the TV 45,the TV 45 receives the electronic catalog server information and therebygenerates a URL of the server to connect to the server. The details ofthis processing are the same as those described in the first embodimentwith reference to FIGS. 7 to 20.

FIG. 53 is a functional block diagram of a structure of the electroniccatalog server 506. The electronic catalog server 506 receives anelectronic catalog destination address and the user information from theTV 45 via a communication unit 600. The electronic catalog destinationaddress is a network address of the TV 45 on a network to which the TV45 and the electronic catalog server 506 belong. Next, based on the userinformation received by the customer attribute data obtainment unit, theelectronic catalog server 506 obtains customer attribute data from thecustomer attribute database 508. For instance, if the user informationincludes a gender and an age of the customer user using the TV 45, theelectronic catalog server 506 obtains, as the customer attribute data,information of a product/service genre and a product/service price rangewhich are in association with the age and gender of the customer user,based on the customer attribute database 508 having a data structureillustrated in FIG. 57. Then, the electronic catalog data obtainmentunit 602 obtains the electronic catalog data from the electronic catalogdatabase 507 based on customer attribute data. For example, if thecustomer attribute data includes product/service genres andproduct/service price ranges, the electronic catalog server 506 obtains,as the electronic catalog data, all of product/service datacorresponding to the product/service genres and the product/serviceprice ranges, from the electronic catalog database 507 having a datastructure illustrated in FIG. 58. The electronic catalog server 506transmits the electronic catalog data obtained by the electronic catalogdata obtainment unit 602 to the TV 45 having the electronic catalogdestination address, via a communication unit 600. The processingperformed by the electronic catalog server 506 is presented in moredetail in a flowchart of FIG. 54.

The following describes processing of the TV 45 after downloading theelectronic catalog data, with reference to a flowchart of FIG. 55. Theprocessing regarding obtaining of the electronic catalog serverinformation from the RF-ID unit at Steps S630 to S632 is the samewhichever the electronic catalog data is downloaded or not. At S633, itis determined whether or not the electronic catalog data associated withthe electronic catalog server information received from the RF-ID unithas already been downloaded and displayed. If the electronic catalogdata has not yet been downloaded, then the TV 45 downloads theelectronic catalog data from the server at S634 and displays theelectronic catalog data at S635. The download processing is the same asthe download processing described in the first embodiment.

If it is determined at S633 that the electronic catalog data has alreadybeen downloaded, then the TV 45 issues a signal of a predetermined key(for example, a signal of a Decide key) to execute operations for thedisplayed electronic catalog data (S636). Here, as illustrated in anexample of a screen display of the electronic catalog data in FIG. 56, ascreen presents the customer user with a few of options for a nextoperation to be executed by the customer user for the displayedelectronic catalog data. Then, a focus circulates among the options onthe screen (as illustrated as options 652 and 653 in FIG. 56) toindicate one of them as a selection candidate every time a predeterminedtime period passes. This allows the customer user to execute anoperation for selecting or purchasing each product in the electroniccatalog data, for example, only by presenting the electronic catalognotification card 502 having the RF-ID unit 47 to the TV 45, when thefocus indicates a desired option of the customer user.

The second memory 52 according to the third embodiment, which isembedded in the RF-ID unit 47 on the electronic catalog notificationcard 502, may be a Read Only Memory (ROM). In this aspect, theelectronic catalog server information input device 500 serves as a RF-IDmemory data input unit in manufacturing the RF-ID unit, or a RF-IDmemory data input means in a RF-ID manufacturing system. In general, aRF-ID unit having a ROM unit is inexpensive more than a RF-ID unithaving a rewritable memory. Therefore, the RF-ID unit having a ROMallows the provider user sending a great number of electronic catalognotification cards to reduce a cost.

It should be noted that it has been described in the third embodimentthat a focus circulates among the options on the screen of the TV 45 (asillustrated as options 652 and 653 in FIG. 56) to indicate one of themas a selection candidate every time a predetermined time period passes.However, the method of operating the electronic catalog data displayedon the screen by using the electronic catalog notification card 502having the RF-ID unit 47 is not limited to the above. For example, it isalso possible that the receiving unit 571 of the TV 45 sequentiallyreceive pieces of information from the RF-ID unit and counts thesequential receiving processes, then thereby calculates a time period(RF-ID proximity time period) during which the RF-ID unit is inproximity of the TV 45, and eventually moves a focus indicating aselection candidate displayed on the screen based on the RF-ID proximitytime period. With the above structure, the following operation for theelectronic catalog is possible. Only when the RF-ID unit is in proximityof the TV, the focus displayed on the screen is circulated to change theselection candidate. If the RF-ID unit is away from the TV, the focus isstopped. After a predetermined time period after stopping of the focus,the selection candidate on which the focus is stopped is decided asselection. In this operation for the electronic catalog, the customeruser can actively operate the electronic catalog by using the RF-IDunit, without waiting for the focus, which automatically circulatesamong options every predetermined time period, to arrive at a user'sdesired option.

It should also be noted that it has been described in the thirdembodiment that the electronic catalog server information input device500 has the key input receiving unit 520 which receives inputs by theinput keys operated by the provider user in order to obtain theelectronic catalog server information. However, the followingconfiguration is also possible. That is, the electronic catalog serverinformation input device 500 has a communication interface tocommunicate with the image server. The image server holds the serverinformation to be transmitted to the electronic catalog serverinformation input device 500. The electronic catalog server informationinput device 500 receives the server information from the image server,in order to obtain the server information. This configuration in whichthe server information is stored in the image server allows theelectronic catalog server information input device 500 to eliminateinputting to the image server. Especially, when a plurality of theelectronic catalog server information input devices 500 are operated fora single image server, this configuration is highly convenient.

The conventional techniques have a program that users who are notfamiliar with operations of digital devices such as personal computersshould learn operations of the devices to do online shopping. However,the system according to the third embodiment enables users usingelectronic catalogs to do online shopping and the like, simply bybringing received cards or post cards into proximity of TVs. Therefore,even users who are not familiar with online terminals such as personalcomputers and mobile phones can easily enjoy shopping on TV screens.

Fourth Embodiment

The fourth embodiment according to the present invention is describedbelow.

FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram of the fourth embodiment. In the fourthembodiment, it is described a method of sending, to a remote location, apost card attached with RF-ID used to access an image server. First, afirst user, who is a sender of a post card, brings the image capturingdevice 1 having the RF-ID unit 47 into proximity of the RF-IDreader/writer 46 of the TV 45. Thereby, the TV 45 generates a server URLused to connect the TV 45 to the image server 42, thereby obtains imagedata from the image server 42, and eventually displays the image data ona screen. This processing is the same as described in the firstembodiment. Next, by using an input means such as a remote controller ofthe TV 45, the first user selects an image(s) to be printed on a postcard and images to be registered in association with the post card (inother words, images to be shown to a second user living in a remotelocation), from among the image data displayed by the TV 45. Inaddition, the first user inputs address information such as adestination address of the post card by using the remote controller orthe like. The TV 45 transmits, to the image server 42, ID of the imageselected by the first user to be printed on the post card (hereinafter,referred to as “print image ID”), ID of the images to be registered forthe post card (hereinafter, referred to as “registration image ID”), andthe destination information of the post card (hereinafter, referred toas “post card destination information”). The image server 42 retrievesthe image data identified by the print image ID and then transmits theimage data and the post card destination information to a printer 800.The printer 800 prints the image data and the post card destinationinformation on the post card. In addition, to the image serverinformation input unit 500, the image server 42 transmits theregistration image ID received from the TV 45, together with imageserver information. The image server information includes: a severaddress such as a URL; server login ID; a server login password; animage display password, image display information indicating whether theimage data (images) is to be displayed in a list (as thumbnails) orsequentially (as a slide show); and medium identification informationindicating a medium, such as a card or post card, to which RF-ID is tobe attached. The image server information input device 500 writes theimage server information and the registration image ID to the RF-ID unit47 of the post card on which the image and the destination informationare printed by the printer 800. The post card 801 applied with printingand RF-ID writing is mailed to the printed destination. Thereby, thesecond user, who is designated by the first user as being thedestination, receives the post card 801. When the second user brings themailed post card 801 into proximity of a RF-ID reader/writer 46 of a TV45 of the second user, the TV 45 of the second user obtains the imageserver information and the registration image ID from the RF-ID unit 47,downloads the images identified by the registration image ID, anddisplays the downloaded images.

The structure and processing of the image capturing device 1 accordingto the fourth embodiment are the same as described in the firstembodiment.

FIG. 60 is a block diagram of a structure of the TV 45 according to thefourth embodiment. A receiving unit 811 receives the image serverinformation from the RF-ID unit 47 of the image capturing device 1 orthe post card 801 via a wireless antenna 570. If the RF-ID unit 47 ofthe post card 801 holds the registration image ID, the receiving unit811 receives also the registration image ID. An image selection unit 584receives an image selection operation from the user via a key unit 585and an infrared ray receiving unit 586, and thereby obtains ID of animage which the first user has selected to be printed on the post card(namely, the print image ID) and ID of images which the first user hasselected to be registered for the post card (namely, the registrationimage ID). Then, the image selection unit 584 provides the obtained IDsto the communication unit 509 (the network communication unit 509). FIG.61 illustrates an example of a screen display on the TV 45 in the imageselection operation. In FIG. 61, 821 is a screen display from which thefirst user selects an image to be printed on the post card. 820 in FIG.61 is a screen display from which the first user selects images to beregistered for the post card. A post card destination information inputunit 810 receives a character input operation of the first user via thekey unit 585 and the infrared ray receiving unit 586. Thereby, the postcard destination information input unit 810 obtains the post carddestination information including an address and a name of thedestination of the post card. Then, the post card destinationinformation input unit 810 provides the post card destinationinformation to the communication unit 509. 823 in FIG. 61 is an exampleof a screen display on which the post card destination information isinputted. The communication unit 509 transmits the post card destinationinformation, the print image ID, and the registration ID to the imageserver via a transmission unit 575 and a communication interface 576.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart of processing performed prior to mailing of thepost card 801, by the image server 42, the printer 800, and the imageserver information input device 500. When the post card 801 is appliedwith printing and RF-ID writing, the post card 801 is mailed to theprinted destination. The second user, who is designated by the firstuser as being the destination, receives the post card 801. When thesecond user presents the received post card 801 to the TV 45, thereceiving unit 811 receives the image server information and theregistration image ID from the RF-ID unit 47 via the wireless antenna570. A decryption unit 572 decrypts encrypted information in the imageserver information and the registration image ID. Next, the URLgeneration unit 573 generates a URL from which only images identified bythe registration image ID from among images stored in the image server42 are downloaded to the TV 45. More specifically, the URL generationunit 573 may designate an internal directory of the server in thegenerated URL or may use a method of embedding the registration image IDto the URL as a URL option. By using the URL generated by the URLgeneration unit 573 to designate the server, the TV 45 accesses theimage server to obtain the images, which is the same as described inmore detail in the first embodiment.

It should be noted that it has been described in the fourth embodimentthat the user inputs the destination information to the TV 45, but theuser may input not only the destination information such as an addressand a name but also a message to be printed with an image on a postcard. The TV 45 receives the input message together with the destinationinformation and provides them to the image server 42. The printer 800prints them on the post card. 822 in FIG. 61 illustrates an example of ascreen of the TV 45 on which a message to be printed is inputted. If theuser can select an image to be printed on the post card and also inputan message added to the image, a flexibility in generating a post cardwith RF-ID is increased.

It should also be noted that the TV 45 according to the fourthembodiment may allow the user to perform operations for images displayedon the TV 45 by using the post card with RF-ID, in the same manner asdescribed in the third embodiment for the processing in which the useroperates an electronic catalog displayed on a screen by using RF-ID.

As described above, the system according to the fourth embodimentenables the user to mail a post card with RF-ID to a person living in adistant location, without creating a post card attached with RF-ID bythe user himself/herself. In addition, when the user wishes to print theimage(s) stored in the image server onto the post card to be mailed, thesystem allows the user to perform operation on a TV screen to select animage(s) to be printed. As a result, high usability is achieved.

Conventionally, if the user intends to show images, on a large screendisplay device, to a different user living in a remote location, theuser in the remote location needs to learn operations of the device(apparatus), an operation acquirer has to go to the remote location tooperate the device, or the display device in the remote location shouldbe remotely controlled. The system according to the fourth embodiment,however, enables such a user in a remote location to easily view imagesby a simple operation, for example, by bringing a physical medium suchas a post card with RF-ID into proximity of a display device.

Fifth Embodiment

The fifth embodiment of the present invention has the followingconfiguration. A mailing object such as a post card is written withfixed information. The image capturing device associates the fixedinformation with an image or a group of images (image data) stored inthe server. A reproduction side reads the fixed information from theRF-ID attached to the post card or the like in order to display theimage data associated with the fixed information. The configuration isillustrated in FIG. 63. Referring to FIG. 63, first, the image capturingdevice reads the fixed information from the mailing object, thenassociates the fixed information with an image(s), and registersinformation of the association (hereinafter, referred to as “associationinformation) into the server. When the user receives the mailing objectfor which the registration is completed, the user brings the mailingobject into proximity of a RF-ID reader of a TV to read the fixedinformation from the mailing object. The TV queries the server using thefixed information, and thereby displays the image(s) associated with themailing object.

The fifth embodiment is characterized in that the RF-ID information inthe mailing object is not rewritable (ROM) or in non-rewritableenvironments so that image data in the server is associated with themailing object without rewriting the fixed information in the mailingobject.

<Image Uploading and Mailing Object Associating by Image CapturingDevice>

The images captured by the image capturing device are uploaded to theserver using the method described in the prior embodiments. Here, anidentifier is assigned to an uploaded image or image group. Theidentifier makes it possible to identify the image or an group of imagesstored in the server.

The following describes a method of associating (i) an image or imagegroup which is captured and uploaded to the server by the imagecapturing device with (ii) fixed information recorded in a RF-ID tag ofa mailing object. FIGS. 64A to 64C illustrate examples of the fixedinformation recorded in the RF-ID tag of the mailing object. FIG. 64Aillustrates fixed information including: mailing object UID unique tothe mailing object; and information such as an address for accessing theimage server. FIG. 64B illustrates fixed information including: themailing object UID; and information such as an address for accessing arelay server. FIG. 64C illustrates fixed information including themailing object UID only. The fixed information may also include a loginID, password information, and the like for accessing the server. It isassumed in the fifth embodiment that such information necessary toaccess the server is included in a URL including the addressinformation.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart of processing performed by the image capturingdevice to associate the RF-ID with image data stored in the server, whenthe image capturing device has a RF-ID reader function.

First, the image capturing device reads information from the RF-ID ofthe mailing object by using the RF-ID reader (S2500). In more detail,the second antenna 21 illustrated in FIG. 3 communicates with the RF-IDof the mailing object, and thereby the data receiving unit 105 receivesthe fixed information from mailing object. Then, the second processingunit 95 performs processing to provide the fixed information of themailing object to the first processing unit 35 via the recording unit106, the second memory 52, and the recording/reproducing unit 51. Thefirst processing unit 35 associates the mailing object UID read from themailing object with an image or image group, according to designationfrom the user (S2501). Then, the image capturing device accesses theserver 42 via the first antenna 20 (S2502). Thereby, the image capturingdevice registers, to the server 42, the association informationregarding the association between the mailing object UID and the imagedata stored in the server 42 (S2503).

If the fixed information read from the mailing object includes anaddress of the image server or a URL including the address, then theprocessing is completed. On the other hand, if the fixed informationread from the mailing object does not include an address of the imageserver or a URL including the address, the image capturing device sets arelay server (FIG. 66).

In order to set a relay server, the image capturing device accesses therelay server (S2510). In more detail, if the fixed information read fromthe mailing object includes an address of a relay server or a URLincluding the address, then the image capturing device accesses therelay server. Otherwise, the image capturing device accesses a relayserver that is previously set for the image capturing device.

After accessing the relay server, the image capturing device sets, in adatabase of the relay server, association information regardingassociation between the mailing object UID and the server that is aredirection destination (transfer destination) (S2511). Thereby,association between the mailing object UID and an address of thetransfer destination is registered in the database of the relay server.

If the image capturing device does not have a RF-ID reader function andthe mailing object is printed with a two-dimensional code or the likeindicating information of the RF-ID reader, the image capturing devicecaptures an image of the two-dimensional code using an image capturingunit to read information from the code so that the image capturingdevice can obtain the same information as the fixed information recordedin the RF-ID unit of the mailing object. The two-dimensional code may bea QR Code™, a PDF417, Veri Code, Maxi Code, or the like. Any other codecan be used if the image capturing device can read information from thecode by capturing an image of the code. In addition, the same advantagesas described in the fifth embodiment can be produced by using a bar-codein a one-dimensional direction only, although a printing area isincreased.

FIG. 67 is an example of the mailing object attached with a RF-ID unit2520 and printed with a two-dimensional code 2521 indicating the sameinformation as that recorded on the RF-ID unit 2520. A flow ofprocessing data when the two-dimensional code is read by the imagecapturing device is described with reference to the block diagram ofFIG. 3. The two-dimensional code printed on the mailing object iscaptured by the image capturing unit 30, then converted into an imagedby the video processing unit 31, and provided to the first processingunit 35 via the recording/reproducing unit 32. The first processing unit35 analyzes the captured two-dimensional code and retrieves theinformation from the two-dimensional code. The information indicated bythe two-dimensional code is basically the same as the informationrecorded in the RF-ID unit. The information indicated by thetwo-dimensional code includes at least the mailing object UID.

The following describes a flow of the processing from reading theinformation of the two-dimensional code to associating the informationwith an image or image group in the server with reference to FIG. 68.

Firstly, the image capturing unit captures an image of thetwo-dimensional code (S2530). Then, it is determined whether or not thecaptured image is a two-dimensional code (S2531). If the captured imageis not a two-dimensional code, then error processing is performed(S2532). Or, normal image capturing processing may be performed. On theother hand, if the captured image is a two-dimensional code, then thetwo-dimensional code is analyzed (S2533). Thereby, information is readfrom the mailing object based on the result of the analysis (S2534).After reading the fixed information from the mailing object, the imagecapturing device associates the mailing object UID with image datastored in the server (S2535). Then, the image capturing device accessesthe server (S2536). Then, the image capturing device sets theassociation information to the server (S2537). The Steps S2535 to S2537are the same as the Steps S2501 to S2503 in FIG. 65. Here, if thereadout information does not include an address of the image server or aURL including the address, then the image capturing device performstransfer setting to a relay server. The transfer setting to the relayserver has been previously described with reference to FIG. 66.

As described above, by reading information from the two-dimensionalbar-code printed on the mailing object, it is possible to complete toassociate the information recorded on the RF-ID unit with image datastored in the server.

If the image capturing device does not have a RF-ID reader function andthe mailing object is not printed with a code such as a two-dimensionalcode, the image capturing device can read information from the mailingobject if the user manually inputs, to the image capturing device, themailing object UID and the URL such as a sever address which are printedon the mailing object. The user inputs the information using buttons 7to 15 illustrated in FIG. 2. In this aspect, the URL and the mailingobject UID may be printed directly as a plane text or coded to be a codewhich the user easily inputs.

As described above, even if the image capturing device does not have aRF-ID reader function and the mailing object is not printed with atwo-dimensional code, it is possible to associate the mailing objectwith image data stored in the server.

<Image Reproducing and Viewing by Using RF-ID on Mailing Object>

Next, the steps for viewing images stored in the server on the TV usingthe mailing object for which association is completed.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart of processing performed by the TV to read RF-IDfrom the mailing object and eventually access the image server.

When the user brings the mailing object into proximity of the RF-IDreader of the TV, the TV reads information of the RF-ID on the mailingobject (S2540). Then, a determination is made as to whether or not thereadout information includes a sever address or a URL including theserver address (S2541). If the readout information includes a severaddress or a URL including the sever address, then the TV accesses thedesignated server (S2542). Then, the TV transmits the mailing object UID(S2543). Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the serverreceiving the transmission is a relay server (S2544). If the server is arelay server, then the relay server redirects to a server (the imagesever) designated in the relay server (S2547). Thereby, the TV accessesan image or image group in the image server (S2548). On the other hand,if it is determined at S2544 that the server receiving the transmissionis the image server, then redirecting is not performed and access to theimage server is performed (S2548). Moreover, if it is determined atS2541 that the readout information does not include a sever address,then the TV accesses a server set by a predetermined default (S2545).Then, the TV transmits the mailing object UID to the default server(S2546). The default server redirects to a server (the image server)designated in the default server (S2547) to access the image server.

Here, if association between the mailing object UID and the designatedserver as a destination of the relay is not registered in a database ofthe relay or default server, the relay or default server redirects to anerror page. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of processing performed by the relayor default server after receiving the mailing object UID. When the relayor default server receives the mailing object UID (S2550), the serversearches its database for information regarding the mailing object UID(S2551). Then, the relay or default server determines whether or not thedatabase holds information regarding the mailing object UID (S2552). Ifthe database holds the information, then the relay or default serverredirects to a server associated with the mailing object UID in thedatabase (S2554). On the other hand, if the database does not hold theinformation (in other words, if there is no association), then the relayor default server redirects to an error page (S2553).

As described above, the mailing object having fixed information in theRF-ID is previously associated with image data stored in the imageserver. Thereby, when the mailing object with the association ispresented to the TV, the user can view an image or image group in theserver which is associated with the mailing object UID, withoutrewriting of the RF-ID of the mailing object. Therefore, even if theuser is away from home and cannot rewrite the RF-ID of the mailingobject, or even if the RF-ID of the mailing object is not rewritable,the user can associate images in the server with the mailing object. Asa result, the user allows a person receiving the mailing object to viewthe images associated with the mailing object.

It should be noted that it has been described in the fifth embodimentthat the mailing object UID is transmitted after accessing the server.However, it is also possible to generate a URL from the mailing objectUID and the sever address recorded on the mailing object in order toaccess the server. In this aspect, it is possible to perform the accessto the server and the transmission of the mailing object UID at the sametime.

According to the fifth embodiment, even in an environment where theRF-ID cannot be rewritten, such as in a sight-seeing location, forexample, the user can associate captured images with a post card andsend the post card to a friend. Thereby, the friend receiving the postcard presents the post card to a TV to view the images the user capturedin the sight-seeing location. As explained above, even in an environmentwhere the RF-ID cannot be rewritten, the user can create a mailingobject associated with images in the server and then send the mailingobject to a person to which the user desires to show the images.

If the image capturing device has a RF-ID writer function to rewrite theRF-ID of the mailing object, the processing is the same as processingperformed by the TV for associating the mailing object with image datain the server, which will be described below in the sixth embodiment.Therefore, the processing is not described in the fifth embodiment.

Sixth Embodiment

In the sixth embodiment, the following configuration is described. Theimage capturing device captures images and uploads the images to theimage server. Then, a user transmitting the images (hereinafter,referred to as a “sending user”) selects an image group from the imagesin the server. Information for accessing the selected image group isrecorded in the RF-ID on the mailing object. The mailing object ismailed to a user receiving the images (hereinafter, referred to as a“receiving user”). The receiving user accesses the image group in theimage server by using the RF-ID on the mailing object.

FIG. 71 is a schematic diagram of a configuration of an imagetransmission side according to the sixth embodiment of the presentinvention. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of a configuration of an imagereceiving side according to the sixth embodiment of the presentinvention. Here, the same reference numerals of FIGS. 1 and 3 areassigned to the identical elements of FIGS. 71 and 72, so that theidentical elements are not explained again below.

In FIGS. 71 and 72, a mailing object 3001 is a post card, envelope, orletter paper which is mailed from the image transmission side to theimage receiving side. A RF-ID unit 3002 is a rewritable RF-ID. At leastpart of the RF-ID unit 302 is a rewritable memory unit 3003. The RF-IDunit 3002 is attached to or incorporated into the mailing object 3001 inorder to be sent to the image receiving side together with the mailingobject.

As described in the prior embodiments, the memory unit 3003 in the RF-IDunit 3002 holds the medium identification information for identifyingthat the medium having the RF-ID unit 3002 is a mailing object.

Referring to FIG. 72, a TV 3045 is a TV display device provided in theimage receiving side. The TV 3045 has the same function as that of theTV 45 in FIG. 71 described in the prior embodiments. Like the TV 45 inFIG. 71, the TV 3045 includes a RF-ID reader/writer 3046 (correspondingto the RF-ID reader/writer 46 in FIG. 71) and a display unit 3047(corresponding to the display unit 110 in FIG. 71). The TV 3045 isconnected to the Internet 40 via a network connection means not shown.

Next, the processing performed by the above configuration is described.

<Image Group Selecting and Mailing Object Writing by Image TransmissionSide>

In the image transmission side in FIG. 71, images captured by the imagecapturing device 1 are transmitted to a wireless access point via thesecond antenna 20 in the image capturing device 1 used for wirelesscommunication, such as a wireless LAN or WiMAX. The images are recordedas the image data 50 onto the image server 42 via the internet 40. Then,the image capturing device 1 is moved into proximity of the RF-IDreader/writer 46 of the TV 45 in order to establish connection with theTV 45 by wireless communication via the first antenna 21 of the imagecapturing device 1 used for RF-ID. The TV 45 obtains, from the imagecapturing device 1, information for accessing the image data 50 in theimage server 42. Then, the TV 45 downloads the images of the image data50 to be displayed on the display unit 110. The above processing is thesame as described in the prior embodiments. The above is just a summary.

Next, the sending user checks the images displayed on the display unit110 of the TV 45 in order to set transmission image selectioninformation indicating whether or not each of the images is to betransmitted to the receiving user (in other words, whether or not eachof the images is to be permitted to be viewed by the receiving user).The sending user can set also restriction on display for the receivinguser, utility form information such as a slide show and printing, whichis described in the prior embodiments. The transmission image selectioninformation and the utility form information are transmitted to andrecorded onto the image server. The image server manages, as an imagegroup, a set of images selected as transmission images in thetransmission image selection information.

The following describes steps performed by the TV 45 for recording, ontothe mailing object 3001, information regarding the image group selectedby the sending use, with reference to a flowchart of FIG. 73.

It is assumed that transmission images have been selected and an imagegroup set with the utility form information has been generated. Underthe assumption, the sending user brings the mailing object 3001 havingthe RF-ID unit 3002 into proximity of the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of theTV 45 in order to establish wireless communication between the RF-IDunit 3002 and the RF-ID reader/writer 46.

When the TV 45 becomes able to communicate with the RF-ID unit 3002 onthe mailing object 3001 via the RF-ID reader/writer 46, the TV 45 readsinformation from the memory unit 3003 (S3101). Then, the TV 45determines whether or not the medium identification informationindicates that the current communication partner is a mailing object(S3102). If the current communication partner is a mailing object, thenthe TV 45 proceeds to steps for writing to the mailing object. Here, ifit is determined at Step S3102 that the current communication partner isnot a mailing object, then the subsequent steps are not described herebut the TV 45 proceeds to steps depending on a medium indicated by themedium identification information.

In order to write to the mailing object 3001, first, the TV accesses theimage server 42 via the internet 40 (S3103). Thereby, the TV 45 obtains,from the image server 42, image group designation information, such as aserver URL and an image group address, for allowing the image receivingside to access the image group in the image server 42 (S3104).

The TV 45 transmits the obtained image group designation information tothe RF-ID unit 3002 on the mailing object 3001 via the RF-IDreader/writer 46 of the TV 45 in order to write the image groupdesignation information to the memory unit 3003 in the mailing object3001, and the RF-ID unit 3002 on the mailing object 3001 records theimage group designation information to a rewritable region of the memoryunit 3003 (S3105).

As described above, the mailing object 3001 on which the image groupdesignation information is recorded is mailed by the sending user to auser of the image receiving side.

<Image Reproducing and Viewing by Image Receiving Side>

Next, the image receiving side is described with reference to FIG. 72illustrating the schematic block diagram of the image receiving side andFIG. 74 illustrating a flowchart of processing performed by the TV inthe image receiving side.

Referring to FIG. 72, the receiving user receives the mailing object3001 from the sending user. Then, the receiving user checks the RF-IDunit 3002 or characters or design indicated on the mailing object 3001to determine whether the mailing object is incorporated with a means foraccessing images. Here, the receiving user needs only to understand thatthe receiving user can access to the images by using the mailing object3001. The receiving user does not need to care about the image groupdesignation information and the like in the RF-ID unit 3002.

In order to reproduce and view the images, the receiving user brings themailing object 3001 into proximity of the RF-ID reader/writer 3046 ofthe TV 3045 in the image receiving side so as to start viewing of theimages.

If the RF-ID unit 3002 on the mailing object 3001 is in enough proximityof the RF-ID reader/writer 3046 of the TV 3045, the RF-ID reader/writer3046 supplies power to the RF-ID unit 3002 of the mailing object 3001via antennas (not shown) of both the RF-ID reader/writer 3046 and theRF-ID unit 3002 in order to activate the RF-ID unit 3002. Thereby,wireless communication between the TV 3045 and the RF-ID unit 3002 ofthe mailing object 3001 starts. When the wireless communication starts,the TV 3045 reads information from the memory unit 3003 of the RF-IDunit 3002 (S3151).

A determination is made as to whether or not the medium identificationinformation in the readout information indicates that the currentcommunication partner is a mailing object (S3152). If the currentcommunication partner is a mailing object, then the TV 3045 proceeds toprocessing of reading the image group designated by the sending userfrom the image server 42.

The access to the image server 42 makes it possible to generate an URLfor accessing the image group in the image server 42 by using the imagegroup designation information in the information read by the RF-ID unit3002 at Step S3151, such as an image group address, and thereby toaccess the image server 42 via the internet 40 (S3153).

The TV 3045 connected to the image server 42 at the above step obtainsthe images (the image group) which are permitted to be displayed, fromamong the image data 50 in the image server 42, based on thetransmission image selection information indicating the image groupmanaged by the image server 42 (S3154). Then, the TV 3045 displays theimages on the display unit 110 (S3155).

Furthermore, according to the transmission image selection informationindicating the image group managed by the image server 42 and theutility form information, the receiving user can use functions of, forexample, reproducing the images as a slide show, printing the images,and downloading the images to a recording medium (not shown) attached tothe TV 3045 or connected to the outside.

In addition, for image printing, the user can print the images by theprinter on a LAN (not shown), and also ask, via the internet 40, aphotograph print service provider to print the images.

As described above, with the above configuration according to the sixthembodiment of the present invention, the image group designationinformation is provided from the RF-ID unit 3002 on the mailing object3001 to the TV 3045 in the image receiving side. Therefore, thereceiving user does not need to input characters of a network accessdestination to obtain images, for example. In other words, the intuitiveand simple operation of simply bringing the mailing object 3001 intoproximity of the TV 3045 enables the receiving user to access the imagedata 50 stored in the image server 42. As a result, the receiving usercan obtain images from the image server, without knowledge ofcomplicated operations such as menu selection and character inputs.

It should be noted that it has been described in the sixth embodimentthat the mailing object 3001 is previously attached or incorporated withthe RF-ID unit 3002. However, the mailing object may be a general postcard or letter paper attached with an independent RF-ID unit 3002 thatis provided separately. In this aspect, the above effect can be producedby later attaching the RF-ID unit to the mailing object. This producesfurther advantages that the sending user can use the sixth embodimentfor any desired mailing object.

It should also be noted that, if the access to the image server 42requires a login operation, a server login ID and a server loginpassword may also be written at Step S3105 into the rewritable region ofthe memory unit 3003 in the RF-ID unit 3002 on the mailing object 3001.Here, it is desirable that the login ID and the login password are notplane texts but are written in an encrypted format for security.

It should also be noted that it has been described in the sixthembodiment that the TV 45 in the image transmission side performsselection of transmission images, setting of the utility forminformation, and writing of the image group designation information tothe RF-ID unit 3002 on the mailing object 3001. However, it is alsopossible that the image capturing device 1 having a RF-ID reader/writerfunction performs setting of the transmission image selectioninformation and the utility form information and writing of the imagegroup designation information, in order to produce the same effect asdescribed above for obtaining images by the simple operation of thereceiving user.

<Variation of Sixth Embodiment>

FIGS. 75A and 75B are flowcharts of processing performed by the TV 45 inthe image transmission side according to a variation of the sixthembodiment of the present invention. Here, the same step numerals ofFIG. 73 are assigned to the identical steps of FIGS. 75A and 75B, sothat the identical steps are not explained again below.

According to the variation of the sixth embodiment, the mailing objectUID is previously recorded on the memory unit 3003 of the RF-ID unit3002 on the mailing object 3001. Here, it is desirable to record themailing object UID on a ROM region of the memory unit 3003 in order toreduce risks of data damages or data manipulation caused by accidentaloperations. FIG. 76 illustrates a diagram of an example of a datastructure of the memory unit 3003.

The TV 45 in the image transmission side sets the transmission imageselection information and the utility form information into theabove-described RF-ID unit in order to designate an image group in theimage serve 42. In this situation, the TV 45 performs processingaccording to the flowchart of FIG. 75A.

The TV 45 reads information from the RF-ID unit 3002 on the mailingobject 3001 (S3101) and determines based on the medium identificationinformation that the communication partner is a mailing object (S3102).After that, the TV 45 obtains the mailing object UID (S3201). Themailing object UID may be the information read at Step S3101 or be newlyobtained from the RF-ID unit 3002. Next, the TV 45 accesses the imageserver 42 via the Internet 40 (S3202). The TV 45 transmits the mailingobject UID to the image server 42, and thereby the image server 42associates with the transmitted mailing object UID with an address ofthe image group and then stores the manages information of theassociation (association information) (S3203).

The TV 45 obtains, from the image server 42, the server URL enabling theimage receiving side to access the image server 42 (S3204). The obtainedserver URL is written into the rewritable region of the memory unit 3003in the RF-ID unit 3002 on the mailing object 3001 via the RF-IDreader/writer 46 (S3205).

As described above, if the image server associates the image group withthe mailing object UID and then stores and manages the associationinformation, the utility form information can be managed separately foreach mailing object UID. Therefore, in the situation where there are aplurality of the mailing objects 3001, it is possible to change anoperation for receiving images for each mailing object, namely, for eachdifferent receiving user.

If, in the configuration described in the sixth embodiment, the imagereceiving side designates an image group for each mailing object,generates a different image group address for each designated imagegroup, and writes the image group address into a corresponding RF-IDunit, the image transmission side needs complicated operations fordesignating image groups separately although the same advantages asthose of the sixth embodiment can be obtained.

Therefore, when the sending user selects the same transmission imagegroup for a plurality of mailing objects, it is preferable that thesending user records and manages different utility form information foreach mailing object by using the mailing object UID as describedearlier. Thereby, it is possible to reduce operations of the sendinguser, and to reduce a memory capacity of the image server because it isnot necessary to hold pieces of the transmission image selectioninformation separately, thereby producing further advantages.

The processing of FIG. 75B differs from the processing of FIG. 75A inthat Steps S3204 and S3205 are replaced by Steps S3214 and 3215. At Step3214, the TV 45 obtains an image group address in addition to the serverURL. At Step S3215, the TV 45 writes the image group address togetherwith the server URL into the memory unit 3003 of the RF-ID unit 3002.

Thereby, when the image receiving side is to receive images, the imagereceiving side accesses the designated image group in the image server42. Here, the access is permitted only when the mailing object UID ofthe image group stored and managed in the image server matches themailing object UID used by the receiving server requesting the access.Thereby, security is increased.

Conventionally, if the user intends to show images, on a large screendisplay device (apparatus), to a different user living in a remotelocation, the user in the remote location needs to learn operations ofthe device, an operation acquirer has to go to the remote location tooperate the device, or the display device in the remote location shouldbe remotely controlled. However, like the fourth embodiment, the systemaccording to the sixth embodiment enables such a user in a remotelocation to easily view images by a simple operation, for example, bybringing a physical medium such as a post card with RF-ID into proximityof a display device. In the fourth embodiment, generation of the postcard with RF-ID and writing of data into the RF-ID is not performed bythe user (who captures and sends images or who views the images), but bya service provider. In the sixth embodiment, however, the sending userin the image transmission side performs generation of the post card withRF-ID and writing of data into the RF-ID.

Seventh Embodiment

In the seventh embodiment of the present invention, a method of changingsetting for a device (apparatus) by using a RF-ID card according to theseventh embodiment of the present invention is described.

The following describes a method of changing setting for a recorder byusing a RF-ID card with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78.

FIG. 77 is a block diagram of a structure of a recorder according to theseventh embodiment.

A recorder 2000 records broadcast contents obtained by a tuner 2001,onto a Hard Disk Drive (HDD) 2008 or an optical disk drive 2009. Inaddition, the recorder 200 reproduces, on the TV 45, the recordedcontents or video/audio contents ready by the optical disk drive 2009.

An input signal processing unit 2002 includes an Analog/Digital (A/D)converter, a decoder, and an encoder, in order to convert inputvideo/audio signals into data in a predetermined video/audio format. TheA/D converter converts analog signals obtained by the tuner 2001 intodigital signals. The decoder decodes scrambled contents. The encoderconverts data into data in a video format according to MPEG-2, forexample.

An output signal processing unit 2003 includes a Digital/Analog (D/A)converter and a decoder in order to provide video and audio to the TV45. The D/A converter converts digital signals to analog signals. Thedecoder decodes data in a data format according to MPEG-2, for example.

A system control unit 2004 controls operations of the recorder 2000. Thesystem control unit 2004 includes a setting information processing unit2011 that switches setting for the recorder 2000. The settinginformation processing unit 2011 will be described in detail later.

A memory 2005 holds recorder ID 2012 for identifying the recorder 2000,and setting information 2013 for the recorder 2000.

An operation input unit 2006 receives inputs from a user using buttonsof a remote controller, a front panel, or the like (not shown).

A communication unit 2007 connects the recorder 2000 to the server 42via the internet or a LAN.

The HDD 2008 has an area in which recorded contents and content listsprovided from the input signal processing unit 2002 are stored.

The optical disk drive 2009 is a disk drive that performs recording orreproducing for an optical disk such as a Digital Versatile Disc (DVD)or a Blue-ray Disc. The optical disk drive 2009 records recordedcontents and content lists provided from the input signal processingunit 2002 onto the optical disc, and reproduces video/audio contents inthe optical disk.

The input signal processing unit 2002, the output signal processing unit2003, the system control unit 2004, the HDD 2008, and the optical diskdrive 2009 of the recorder 2000 are connected one another via a bus2010.

Here, the setting information processing unit 2011 is described in moredetail below.

According to the setting information 2013 stored in the memory 2005, thesetting information processing unit 2011 sets displaying of a menuscreen, a recording/reproducing mode, chapters of recorded contents, TVprogram recommendation based on user's preference, and the likeregarding the recorder 2000. In more detail, the setting informationprocessing unit 2011 reads an identifier indicating, for example, “menuscreen background color: Black” from the setting information 2013, andthereby issues a request for menu screen display to the output signalprocessing unit 2003 together with an instruction for displaying abackground of a menu screen in black.

Here, the setting information 2013 may be stored in an external storageunit such as a SD card not shown. Especially, it is efficient to store,in the HDD 2008, the setting information regarding chapters of recordedcontents stored in the HDD 2008, information having a large size, andthe like.

Conventionally, the setting information 2013 has been set prior topurchase of the recorder 2000, or set by operations of the user usingthe operation input unit 2006. In the seventh embodiment of the presentinvention, however, the setting information 2013 can be changed based oninformation obtained from the RF-ID reader/writer 46.

FIG. 78 is a block diagram of a structure of the RF-ID card from whichinformation is read by the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the recorder 2000to be used to change the settings of the recorder 2000.

The RF-ID card 2100 includes a memory 2101, the antenna (second antenna)21, the power supply unit (second power supply unit) 91, the datareceiving unit 105, the data transfer unit 108, a processing unit 2102,the recording unit 106, and the reproducing unit 107.

When the RF-ID card 2100 is moved to bring the antenna 21 into proximityof the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the recorder 2000, the RF-IDreader/writer 46 supplies power to the power supply unit 91 via theantenna 21 in order to provide power to the respective units in theRF-ID card 2100.

Information regarding data recording/reproducing is read from the RF-IDcard 2100 to the recorder 2000 via the RF-ID reader/writer 46. In therecorder 2000, the information is received by the data receiving unit105 and then provided to the processing unit 2102.

In the RF-ID card 2100, the processing unit 2102 causes the recordingunit 106 to record information onto the memory 2101, and causes thereproducing unit 107 to reproduce the information stored in the memory2101.

The data transfer unit 108 transmits the information provided from theprocessing unit 2102 to the RF-ID reader/writer 46 of the recorder 2000via the antenna 21.

The memory 2101 in the RF-ID card 2100 stores the UID 75, the mediumidentification information 111, and apparatus operation information2103.

The UID 75 and the medium identification information 111 are used toidentify the RF-ID card 2100.

The UID 75 is identification unique to the RF-ID card 2100.

The medium identification information 111 holds an identifier indicatingthat the RF-ID card 2100 is a card.

The apparatus operation information 2103 holds pieces of informationregarding an apparatus (device) to perform an operation using the RF-IDcard 2100 and regarding the operation. The following describes thepieces of information included in the apparatus operation information2103.

Operation apparatus identification information 2104 indicates a type ofthe apparatus (device) to perform the operation using the RF-ID card2100. The operation apparatus identification information 2104 indicatesthe type by an identifier in the similar manner as described for themedium identification information 111. In FIG. 78, the operationapparatus identification information 2104 holds an identifier indicatingthat a type of the apparatus to perform the operation is a recorder.

Target apparatus information 2105 holds information so that only aspecific apparatus (device) can perform the operation using the RF-IDcard 2100. In the example of FIG. 78, the target apparatus information2105 holds recorder ID 2012 for identifying the recorder 2000. It shouldbe noted that, if an apparatus that can use the RF-ID card 2100according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention is limited,for instance, if only recorders can use the RF-ID card 2100, theoperation apparatus identification information 2104 and the targetapparatus information 2105 may not be included in the apparatusoperation information 2103. In addition, if the setting informationprocessing unit 2011 in the recorder 2000 has a structure to changesettings of the recorder 2000 by using the information in cards, themedium identification information 111 may not be included in the memory2101.

Operation instruction information 2106 indicates details of theoperation to be performed by the apparatus designated in the apparatusoperation information 2103. In the example of FIG. 78, the operationinstruction information 2106 includes information 2109 indicating thatsetting is to be changed (setting change), information 2110 indicating atarget for which the setting change is to be performed (change targetinformation), and information 2111 indicating that communication is tobe executed in obtaining the setting information (communicationexecution).

It should be noted that the operation instruction information 2106 isnot limited for a single operation, but may include plural pieces ofinformation for plural operations, or may be a program in which theplural operations are combined.

Communication information 2107 is information regarding a server or thelike. When the recorder 2000 is instructed based on the operationinstruction information 2106 to access the server or the like to obtaindata, the recorder 2000 accesses the server or the like using thecommunication information 2107. In the example of FIG. 78, thecommunication information 2107 includes a URL 2112, login ID 2113, and apassword 2114 of the server or the like. The URL 2112 may be replaced byan IP address. If the recorder 2000 is to access a different apparatus(device) via an office or home network, the URL 2112 may be informationfor identifying the apparatus, such as a MAC address.

The following describes processing by which the recorder 2000 registersthe setting information from the recorder 2000 to a server by using theRF-ID card 2100 with reference to FIG. 79.

At Step 2201, when the recorder 2000 receives an input from the userusing the operation input unit 2006, the setting information processingunit 2011 causes the output signal processing unit 2003 to issue, to theTV 45, a request for message display. In response to the request, the TV45 displays a message “Please present a RF-ID card” on its screen atStep 2202. The message may be displayed on a console (not shown) of therecorder 2000. It is also possible that the recorder 2000 requests theuser for authentication such as a password or biometric authenticationwhen the user performs the input operation, and after theauthentication, proceeds to the setting registration processing. It isfurther possible that the recorder 2000 does not request the TV 45 forthe message display, but the user needs to present the RF-ID card 2100to the RF-ID reader/writer 46 when using the recorder 2000 in order toperform steps of and after 2203. It is still further possible that anenquiry message is displayed to enquire where the setting information2013 is to be registered, and the setting information 2013 is registeredinto the location the user designates. For example, the settinginformation 2013 may be registered into the RF-ID card 2200, or into asever different from the server 42.

At Step 2203, the recorder 2000 detects the RF-ID card. After that,mutual authentication between the recorder 2000 and the RF-ID card 2100is performed at Step 2204.

If the mutual authentication at Step 2204 is successful, then theprocessing proceeds to Step 2205. Otherwise, the processing returns toStep 2202 to repeat the detection of the RF-ID card.

At Step 2205, the recorder 2000 obtains the UID 75 from the memory 2101in the RF-ID card 2100.

At Step 2206, the recorder 2000 obtains the communication information2107 from the memory 2101 in the RF-ID card 2100. If the memory 2101 inthe RF-ID card 2100 does not hold the communication information, therecorder 2000 may issue, to the user, a request for providing thecommunication information. Moreover, if the user instructs at Step 2201the recorder 2000 to register the setting information 2013 into alocation that is not designated in the RF-ID card 2100, Step 2206 is notperformed. If plural pieces of the communication information 2107 arestored in the RF-ID card 2100, it is possible to display a list of theplural pieces of the communication information 2107 from which the usercan select a desired one.

At Step 2207, the recorder 2000 gets the recorder ID 2012 and thesetting information 2013 from the memory 2005. The setting information2013 is not limited to information currently stored, but may beinformation inputted by the user in the setting registration processing.

At Step 2208, in the recorder 2000, the setting information processingunit 2011 issues, to the communication unit 2007, a request for accessto a server or the like having the URL 2112 included in the obtainedcommunication information 2107. The communication unit 2007 accesses theserver using the login ID 2113 and the password 2114.

At Step 2209, it is determined whether or not the access to the server42 is successful. If the access is successful, then the processingproceeds to Step 2210. Otherwise, the setting registration processing isterminated.

At Step 2210, the recorder 2000 transmits, to the server 42, the UID 75,and the recorder ID 2012 and the setting information 2013 which areobtained from the memory 2005, thereby registering the settinginformation 2013 into the server 42.

At Step 2211, the recorder 2000 generates the operation instructioninformation 2106, using (a) the operation designated at Step 2201 or astorage location of the setting information 2013 selected at Step 2201,(b) the setting information 2013 obtained at Step 2207, and (c) thecommunication information 2107 obtained at Step 2206.

At Step 2212, the recorder 2000 performs the same step as Step 2202 tocause the TV 45 to displays a message “Please present a RF-ID card” onits screen.

At Step 2213, the recorder 2000 detects the RF-ID card. After that,mutual authentication between the recorder 2000 and the RF-ID card 2100is performed at Step 2214.

If the mutual authentication at Step 2214 is successful, then theprocessing proceeds to Step 2215. Otherwise, the processing returns toStep 2212 to repeat the detection of the RF-ID card 2100.

At Step 2215, the recorder 2000 obtains the UID from the memory 2101 inthe RF-ID card 2100.

At Step 2216, it is determined whether or not the UID 75 obtained atStep 2205 matches the UID obtained at Step 2215. If the UIDs match, thenthe processing proceeds to Step 2217. Otherwise, the processing returnsto Step 2211 to repeat the detection of the RF-ID card 2100.

At Step 2217, the recorder 2000 transmits, to the RF-ID card 2100, theoperation apparatus identification information 2104 (not shown in FIG.77) stored in the memory 2005, the recorder ID 2012, the operationinstruction information 2106 generated at Step 2211, and thecommunication information 2107, in order to record (register) thesepieces of information onto the memory 2101 of the RF-ID card 2100. As aresult, the setting registration processing is completed.

Referring to FIG. 80, the setting information registered into the server42 by the above-described processing of FIG. 79 is described.

Each of the setting information registered in the server 42 ishereinafter referred to as setting information 2250. Each settinginformation 2250 is registered in association with a corresponding oneof the UID 75 and a corresponding one of the target apparatusinformation 2105. In more detail, the setting information 2250 holds anidentifier indicating, for example, “menu screen background color:Black”. In the example of FIG. 80, a letter “A” or “B” at the end ofpieces of the setting information 2250 indicates that the setting isdifferent from another.

It is also possible that plural pieces of setting information areregistered for a single UID such as UID0001 in FIG. 80. It is furtherpossible that a single piece of the target apparatus information 2105,such as REC-0001, is registered for plural pieces of setting informationassociated with different UID. Here, the setting information may includethe change target information 2110.

Next, referring to FIG. 81, the apparatus operation information 2103registered in the memory 2101 of the RF-ID card 2100 by theabove-described processing of FIG. 79 is described.

It is assumed in the example of FIG. 81 that the UID 75 designates“UID0001” and the medium identification information 111 designates a“card”.

The apparatus operation information 2103 includes sets each includingthe operation apparatus identification information 2104, the targetapparatus information 2105, the operation instruction information 2106,and the communication information 2107. Here, it is possible that thecommunication information 2107 is not registered as being informationnot related to the other pieces of information. For instance, it ispossible that only a piece of the communication information 2107 isregistered to always access the same server in using the RF-ID card2100.

The operation instruction information 2106 includes instruction detailinformation 2260, instruction target information 2261, and communicationexecution information 2262. The instruction detail information 2260holds an identifier indicating an operation to be performed by thedevice designated by the target apparatus information 2105. Theinstruction target information 2261 holds an identifier indicating asetting, such as a menu screen mode or recording mode, of the apparatusto perform the operation, such as REC-0001. The communication executioninformation 2262 holds an identifier indicating whether or notcommunication is to be executed in performing the operation indicated inthe instruction detail information 2260. It should be noted that theapparatus operation information 2103 may include only the communicationinformation 2107 if the operating to be performed using the RF-ID card2100 is limited to changing of setting.

The communication information 2107 holds a URL, login ID, a password,and the like for accessing a server that is a partner of communication,if the communication execution information 2262 indicates that thecommunication is to be executed.

Next, the description is given for processing of changing the setting ofthe recorder 2000 by using the RF-ID card 2100 with reference to FIG.82. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of processing by which the settinginformation processing unit 2011 in the recorder 2000 updates thesetting information 2013 by using the RF-ID card 2100.

First, at Step 2301, the recorder 2000 detects the RF-ID card 2100.After that, at Step 2302, the recorder 2000 performs mutualauthentication with the RF-ID card 2100.

At Step 2303, the recorder 2000 determines whether or not the mutualauthentication is successful. If the mutual authentication issuccessful, then the processing proceeds to Step 2304. Otherwise, thesetting update processing is terminated.

At Step 2304, the recorder 2000 obtains the UID 75 and the apparatusoperation information 2103 from the memory 2101 of the RF-ID card 2100.

At Step 2305, the recorder 2000 searches the apparatus operationinformation 2103 for the operation apparatus identification information2104. At Step 2306, the recorder 2000 compares the searched-outoperation apparatus identification information 2104 to apparatusidentification information (not shown) in the memory 2005 of therecorder 2000.

If it is determined at Step 2306 that the operation deviceidentification information 2104 matches the device identificationinformation, then the processing proceeds to Step 2307. Otherwise, theprocessing proceeds to Step 2314.

At Step 2314, the recorder 2000 determines whether or not all pieces ofthe operation apparatus identification information 2104 in the apparatusoperation information 2103 have been examined. If all pieces of theoperation apparatus identification information 2104 have been examined,then the setting update processing is terminated.

At Step 2307, the recorder 2000 searches the device operationinformation 2103 for the target apparatus information 2105. At Step2308, the recorder 2000 compares the searched-out target apparatusinformation 2105 to the recorder ID 2012 in the memory 2005 of therecorder 2000.

If it is determined at Step 2308 that the target device information 2105matches the recorder ID 2012, then the processing proceeds to Step 2309.Otherwise, the setting update processing is terminated.

At Step 2309, the recorder 2000 obtains the operation instructioninformation 2106 associated with the target device information 2105 fromthe apparatus operation information 2103.

At Step 2310, the recorder 2000 obtains the operation instructioninformation 2107 associated with the target apparatus information 2105from the apparatus operation information 2103.

At Step 2311, the recorder 2000 determines, based on the instructiondetail information 2260 in the operation instruction information 2106 inthe device operation information 2103, that an operation to be performedis updating of setting, and thereby accesses the server 42 to obtain thesetting information 2250 from the server 42. The step will be describedin more detail with reference to FIG. 83.

At Step 2312, the recorder 2000 determines whether or not the obtainmentof the setting information 2250 is successful. If the obtainment of thesetting information 2250 is successful, then the processing proceeds toStep 2313. At Step 2313, the setting information processing unit 2011 inthe recorder 2000 updates the setting information 2013 in the memory2005 of the recorder 2000 by the setting information 2250. On the otherhand, if the obtainment of the setting information 2250 fails, then thesetting update processing is terminated.

The following describes Step 2311 in FIG. 82 in more detail withreference to FIG. 83. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of processing by which thesetting information processing unit 2011 in the recorder 2000 accessesthe server 42 to obtain the setting information 2250 from the server 42.

At Step 2351, the communication unit 2007 in the recorder 2000 accessesthe server 42 having the URL 2112 included in the communicationinformation 2107.

At Step 2352, the setting information processing unit 2011 provides thecommunication unit 2007 with the login ID 2113 and the password 2114which are included in the communication information 2107, and therebythe communication unit 2007 logins to the server 42.

At Step 2353, it is determined whether or not authentication (namely,the login) is successful. If the authentication is successful, then theprocessing proceeds to Step 2354. Otherwise, the processing isterminated as being failure of obtaining the setting information 2250.

At Step 2354, the recorder 2000 searches the server 42 for UID. At Step2355, the recorder 2000 determines whether or not the searched-out UIDmatches the UID 75 obtained at Step 2304 in FIG. 82. If the searched-outUID matches the UID 75, then the processing proceeds to Step 2356.Otherwise, the processing returns to Step 2354 to repeat the search forUID until it is determined at Step 2359 that all pieces of UID in theserver 42 have been examined. If it is determined at Step 2359 that allpieces of UID in the server 42 have been examined, then the processingis terminated as being failure of obtaining the setting information2250.

At Step 2356, the recorder 2000 searches the server 42 for the targetapparatus information associated with the UID 75. At Step 2357, therecorder 2000 determines whether or not the searched-out targetapparatus information matches the target apparatus information 2105obtained at Step 2305 in FIG. 82. If the searched-out target apparatusinformation matches the target apparatus information 2105, then theprocessing proceeds to Step 2358. On the other hand, if the searched-outtarget apparatus information does not match the target apparatusinformation 2105, then the processing proceeds to Step 2358, then theprocessing returns to Step 2354 to repeat the search for the targetapparatus information until it is determined at Step 2360 that allpieces of the target apparatus information in the server 42 have beenexamined. If it is determined at Step 2360 that all pieces of the targetapparatus information have been examined, then the processing isterminated as being failure of obtaining the setting information 2250.

At Step 2258, the recorder 2000 obtains, from the server 42, the settinginformation 2250 associated with the UID 75 and the target apparatusinformation 2105.

As described above, the use of the RF-ID card 2100 enables the user toperform setting of the recorder 2000 without complicated operations.Even if the user is not familiar with operations of apparatuses(devices) the user can easily change the setting of the recorder 2000 byusing the RF-ID card 2100. Moreover, the operation executable for therecorder 2000 by using the RF-ID card 2100 is not limited to the settingchange. For example, the instruction detail information can designate anoperation of obtaining a list of recorded contents in the recorder. Inthis case, the list is registered in the RF-ID card or the server.Thereby, the user can check the list on a different apparatus (device)other than the recorder by using the RF-ID card. In addition, the RF-IDcard holding information illustrated in the FIG. 84 allows the user toperform timer recording in the recorder simply by presenting the RF-IDcard to the recorder. In more detail, if the change target informationassociated with Index 1 in FIG. 84 is applied, the recorder can performtimer recording according to setting of “TV program ID” and “recordingmode” designated in the instruction target information, simply bypresenting the RF-ID card to the recorder. Thereby, the timer recordingcan be performed without accessing the server. In addition, if thechange target information associated with Index 2 in FIG. 84 is applied,the recorder can perform timer recording according to “TV program code”designated in the instruction target information, simply by presentingthe RF-ID card to the recorder. Here, the recorder can obtain, from theserver, (a) program ID or a start time and end time, and (b) channelinformation. As a result, the time recording can be performed accordingto the setting of the “recording mode”. Furthermore, it is also possiblethat “recommended TV program” is designated in the instruction targetinformation in the RF-ID card. After presenting the RF-ID card to therecorder, the recorder obtains ID of the recommended TV program from theserver. Thereby, the recorder can obtain a content of the recommended TVprogram from the server and performs timer recording of the content. Theabove functions may be used as service for providing the RF-ID card asbeing a supplement of a TV program guide magazine, for example. ThisRF-ID card can reduce user's bothersome procedures for timer recording.For another service, it is also possible in the RF-ID card that theinstruction detail information designates a download operation, theinstruction target information designates video or software in a versionwhere a function is restricted, and the communication informationdesignates a URL of a download website. Such RF-ID cards are providedfor free to users. The users can use the video or software as trial, andpurchase it if the user likes it.

It should be noted that the description in the seventh embodiment hasbeen given for the recorder, but the present invention is not limited tothe recorder.

For example, the seventh embodiment of the present invention may beimplemented as a TV having a reader/writer for the RF-ID card and thesetting information processing unit. The TV can register, as the changetarget information, (a) setting of an initial display channel or initialsound volume immediately after power-on, (b) setting of child lock forexcluding adult broadcasts and violence scenes, (c) setting of zappingfor favorite channels, (d) setting of contrast and brightness of ascreen, (e) setting of a language, (f) setting of a continuous use time,and the like, simply by presenting the RF-ID card to the TV. Thereby,the TV can perform settings according to usability. Furthermore, theseventh embodiment may be implemented also as a vehicle navigationsystem having a reader/writer for the RF-ID card and the settinginformation processing unit. In this aspect, the instruction detailinformation designates “highlighted display” and the instruction targetinformation designates “landmark information”. Thereby, by using theRF-ID card, the vehicle navigation system can display the designatedlandmark as being highlighted, by changing a character font, charactersize, or color. The landmark information may be obtained from a server.In this case, the RF-ID cards, on which the apparatus operationinformation illustrated in FIG. 85 is recorded, are offered to users atrest areas or interchanges on expressways, sightseeing spots, and thelike. Thereby, the RF-ID cards allow vehicle navigation systems of theusers to display a recommended landmark, where an even is currently heldfor example, as highlighted display. In addition, the seventh embodimentmay be implemented as a laptop having a reader/writer for the RF-ID cardand the setting information processing unit. The laptop can designate(a) setting of a resolution of a screen, (b) setting of a position of anicon or the like on a display, (c) setting of a wallpaper, (d) settingof a screen saver, (e) setting of start-up of resident software, (f)setting of employed peripheral devices, (g) setting of a dominant handfor a mouse or the like, and the like, by simply by presenting the RF-IDcard to the laptop. Therefore, if the user brings the RF-ID card in abusiness trip, the user can operate a different personal computer at thebusiness trip location, with the same settings as those the user usuallyuses. The seventh embodiment may be implemented further as a gamemachine having a reader/writer for the RF-ID card and the settinginformation processing unit. The user visiting a friend's house uses aRF-ID card in which the instruction detail information designatessetting change. By presenting the RF-ID card to the game machine at thefriend's house, the user can change (a) setting of positions of keys ona remote controller and (b) setting of a structure of a menu screen. Inaddition, the user can save data in the game machine by using the RF-IDcard. Moreover, the following service using the RF-ID card is alsopossible. The RF-ID card holds the instruction detail informationdesignating a download operation. Such RF-ID cards are offered to usersas supplements of magazines or the like. The users can use the RF-IDcards to download an additional scenario, a rare item, or the like.

The RF-ID card according to the seventh embodiment of the presentinvention can be also applied to home appliances connected to oneanother via a network. In this aspect, the RF-ID card previously holds(a) setting of a temperature of an air conditioner, (b) setting for atemperature of hot water in a bus tab, and the like, depending of theuser's preference. Thereby, the user presents the RF-ID card to RF-IDreader/writers in the user's house so as to manage settings of the homeappliances at once. In addition, the RF-ID card may designate anoperation for checking foods stored in a refrigerator. Here, informationof the foods which is registered in the refrigerator is obtained byusing RF-ID tags previously attached to the foods. Or, video of theinside of the refrigerator is captured by using camcorder. Thereby, theuser can check a list of the foods on a TV by using a RF-IDreader/writer to obtain information from the RF-ID card. As describedabove, the RF-ID card according to the seventh embodiment of the presentinvention can be applied for various usages. It is also possible tocombine (a) RF-ID cards for designating apparatuses (such as fourdifferent cards indicating “heating appliance”, “cooling appliance”,“stove”, and “fan”, respectively) and (b) RF-ID cards for designatingsetting of the apparatuses (such as three different cards indicating“weak”, “medium”, and “strong”, respectively). It is further possiblethat such RF-ID cards having the apparatus-designating andsetting-designating functions are integrated into a single RF-ID card.And, the settings of the apparatuses can be customized.

Although only some exemplary embodiments of the present invention havebeen described in detail above, those skilled in the art will be readilyappreciate that many modifications are possible in the exemplaryembodiments without materially departing from the novel teachings andadvantages of the present invention. Accordingly, all such modificationsare intended to be included within the scope of the present invention.

For example, if two users (hereinafter, referred to as a user A and auser B) exchanges photographs between them, the user B can viewphotographs taken by the user A by the following method. The user B hasa TV having an apparatus ID and a relay server having a URL. Theapparatus ID and the URL are previously stored in a RF-ID (hereinafter,referred to as a RF tag B). The user B generates information(hereinafter, referred to as device generation information B) from theinformation in the RF tag B and stores the generated device generationinformation B into the RF tag B. The user B transmits the devicegeneration information B to the user A via e-mail or the like. The userA stores a URL of a server holding the photographs into the relayserver, in association with the received device generation informationB. Thereby, the user B simply presents the RF tab B to a RF-IDreader/writer of the TV in order to view the photographs taken by theuser A. Here, it is assumed that the RF tag B previously holds an e-mailaddress of the user A. When the user B simply presents the RF tag B tothe RF-ID reader/writer of the TV, the device generation information Bmay be automatically written into the TV and a notification of thedevice generation information B may be automatically transmitted to thee-mail address of the user A. Thereby, even if the user B is notfamiliar with operations of the devices, the user B can exchangephotographs with the user A. Furthermore, it is also possible that theuser A encrypts at least one of a URL, login ID, and a password by usingthe device generation information B and sends, to the user B, a postcard with RF-ID on which the encrypted information is recorded. Thismakes it possible to restrict an apparatus permitted to display thephotographs, only to the TV of the user B. It is further possible thatthe user A sends, to the user B, a post card with two RF-IDs that are aRF-ID for sending and a RF-ID for returning. In this aspect, the user Arecords, onto the RF-ID for returning, device generation information Athat is previously generated by a TV or the like of the user A. This canrestrict an apparatus permitted to display photographs stored by theuser B. More specifically, when the user B receives the post card withthe two RF-IDs and returns the post card to the user A, the user Bencrypts, by using the device generation information A, a URL, a loginID, or a password of a server storing the photographs of the user B, andthen records the encrypted data onto the RF-ID for returning. Or, whenthe user B stores the photographs, the user B associates the photographswith the device generation information A. Therefore, an apparatuspermitted to display photographs stored by the user B can be restricted.

Moreover, the mailing object UID of the RF-ID on the mailing object maybe a combination of (a) a group ID that is common among a plurality ofmailing objects and (b) a UID unique that is unique to each mailingobject. Thereby, image data in the server is associated not with everymailing object UID but with the group ID. Therefore, when post cardswith RF-ID on which the image data is associated with a plurality oftargets are mailed, it is possible to eliminate user's bothersomeprocedures for performing registration for each of the UIDs. It is alsopossible that the image data stored in the server in association withthe group ID is switched to be permitted or inhibited to be viewed foreach of the UID. Thereby, if, for example, a printer prints destinationaddresses on the mailing objects, the printer having a RF-IDreader/writer reads the UIDs on the mailing objects and therebyassociates the UIDs with addresses in an address list, respectively.Thereby, the address list can be used to manage thepermission/inhibition of viewing the images stored in the server.

It is also possible that a post card or card is provided with aplurality of RF-ID tags having various different functions. In thisaspect, the single post card or card can switch the functions bydisconnecting communication of a part of the RF-ID tags which are notcurrently used. For example, a post card has (a) an upper portion onwhich a RF-ID tag having a function of displaying a slide show ofphotographs is attached and (b) a lower portion on which a RF-ID taghaving a function of reproducing video. A user can switch the displayfunction or the reproduction function, by selecting the upper portion orthe lower portion to be brought into proximity of a RF-ID reader/writer.The RF-ID tags having different functions can be provided to a frontside and a back side of the post card. It is also possible that coversmade of a material blocking communications are applied on the RF-ID tagsso that the user can select a RF-ID tag to be used by opening the coveron it.

It is further possible that photographs are stored in a plurality ofservers, and a RF-ID tag holds URLs of the servers. Thereby, a user canaccess the servers to obtain the photographs to display them in a list.

Moreover, the RF-ID reader/writer may be provided not only to anapparatus (device) such as the TV or the recorder but also to the inputmeans such as a remote controller for operating the apparatus. Forinstance, if a plurality of apparatuses are connected to one another viaa network, an input means for collectively operating the apparatuses maybe provided with a RF-ID reader/writer to operate the respectiveapparatuses. Furthermore, an input means such as a remote controller maybe provided with an individual authentication means for biometricauthentication such as fingerprint authentication or faceauthentication, password, or the like. In this aspect, the input meanshaving a RF-ID reader/writer exchanges data with a RF-ID tag, only whenthe individual authentication is successful. It is also possible thatthe individual authentication information is previously stored in theRF-ID tag, and individual authentication is performed by the apparatusor the remote controller using the RF-ID tag.

It should be noted that the definition of the term “RF-ID” frequentlyused in the description of the present invention is not limited tonarrow meaning. In general, the term “RF-ID” narrowly refers to a “taghaving a nonvolatile memory on which identification information isrecorded”. RF-ID having a dual interface function or a security functionseems commonly called as a “IC card” or the like. However, in theembodiments of the present invention, the “RF-ID” widely refers to an“electronic circuit which has a nonvolatile memory on which individualidentification information is recorded and which can transmit theindividual identification information to the outside via an antenna”.

Conventionally, if a user who is not familiar with operations of anapparatus (device) wishes to perform complicated settings for theapparatus, it is necessary that a seller, repairer, or serviceperson ofthe apparatus visits a location of the apparatus to perform the settingsor controls the apparatus remotely. Even in remotely controlling theapparatus, the seller, repairer, or serviceperson has to visit thelocation for setting of the remote control. In the seventh embodiment ofthe present invention, however, the RF-ID card 2100 enables the user toperform the settings of the apparatus (the recorder 2000) withoutcomplicated operations. Therefore, even the user not familiar withoperations of the recorder can easily change the settings of therecorder.

The present invention can be implemented also as an image presentationmethod of presenting image related to a communication device on anapparatus (device) having a display screen, in a communication systemhaving (a) the apparatus having the display screen, (b) a reader deviceconnected to the apparatus via a communication path, and (c) thecommunication device performing proximity wireless communication withthe reader device. The present invention can be implemented further as aprogram stored in the communication device with identificationinformation of the communication device, the program being described bycodes executed by a virtual machine included in a device performingproximity wireless communication with the communication device, andbeing for executing: accessing a server connected via a communicationnetwork; downloading, form the server, image associated with theidentification information from among image stored in the accessedserver; and displaying the downloaded image. In addition, the presentinvention can be implemented as a computer-readable recording mediumsuch as a CD-ROM on which the above program is recorded.

The communication device according to the present invention may be used,of course, as various devices having a RF-ID unit in whichidentification information and a virtual machine program are stored. Forexample, the communication device may be electronic devices such as acamera, home appliances such as a rice cooker and a refrigerator, anddaily commodities such as a toothbrush.

Here, an embodiment in which a RF-ID reader is provided to a remotecontroller of a TV or the like is described with reference to diagrams(a) and (b) in FIG. 86, a flowchart (c) in FIG. 86, and a flowchart ofFIG. 87.

First, as described earlier, a child device (or child communicator) 5050such as a camera has the memory (second memory) 52 and the antenna(second antenna) 21. When an antenna 5063 of a remote controller 5051 ismoved into proximity of the antenna 21, the antenna 5063 supplies powerto the antenna 21. Thereby, data in the memory 52 is transmitted fromthe antenna 21 to the antenna 5063. The remote controller 5051 convertsthe received data into digital data by a communication circuit 5064, andthen stores the digital data into a memory 5061 (Step 5001 a in FIG.87). Then, a transmission unit of the remote controller 5051 is faced tothe TV 45 and a transmission switch 6065 on the remote controller 5051is pressed (Step 5001 b). Thereby, the data in the memory 5061 istransmitted as light to a light receiving unit 5058 of the parent device(apparatus) 45 (the TV 45) via a light emitting unit 5062 (Step 5001 c).The communication may be not light but wireless.

Referring back to a flowchart (c) in FIG. 86, the embodiment of thepresent invention used in social systems should be applicable even intwenty or thirty years. An example of the program described in a virtualmachine language or the like is known Java™. However, such programs areexpected to be extended or replaced by totally different programsdescribed in more efficient languages. In order to address the abovesituation, in the embodiment of the present invention, the parent device45 such as the TV holds parent device version information 5059 (orparent device version information n₁) that indicates a language type orversion of a virtual machine language or the like (Step 5060 i in (c) ofFIG. 86). In the beginning of the memory 52 of the child device 5050,child device version information 5052 (or child device versioninformation n₂) indicating a version of a program language or the likefor the child device is recorded ((a) in FIG. 86). Following to thechild device version information 5052, a program region 5053 is recordedin the memory 52. The program region 5053 stores a program 5056 a in aversion 5055 a, a program 5056 b in a version 5055 b, and a program 5056c in a version 5055 c. Following to the program region 5053, a dataregion 5054 is recorded in the memory 52.

At Step 5060 i in the flowchart of FIG. 86, the parent device 45 storesthe parent device version information n₁ of the parent device 45 isstored. Then, the parent device 45 obtains the child device versioninformation n₂ from the memory of the child device (Step 5060 a). Then,the parent device 45 selects an execution program n having a maximumvalue of n₁≧n₂ (Step 5060 b). The parent device 45 executes the selectedexecution program (Step 5060 c). Then, it is determined whether or notthe parent device 45 is connected to the Internet (Step 5060 d). If theparent device 45 is connected to the Internet, then the parent device 45is connected to the server via the Internet (Step 5060 e). The parentdevice 45 thereby transmits language information 5065, which is set inthe parent device 45, to the server (Step 5060 f). The server providesthe parent device 45 with a program in the language indicated in thetransmitted language information 5065, for example in French, and causesthe parent device 45 to execute the program. Alternatively, the servermay execute the program on the server itself.

On the other hand, if it is determined at Step 5060 d that the parentdevice 45 is not connected to the Internet, then the processing proceedsto Step 5060 h. At Step 5060 h, the parent device 45 executes a localprogram in order to display, on a screen of the parent device 45,attribute information of the child device 5050. The attributeinformation is, for example, information for notifying a trouble orinformation regarding the number of stored photographs. As describedabove, the memory 52 in the child device 5050 holds the child deviceversion information 5052. The memory 52 stores a program, procedure,URL, or the like of each generation. The program, procedure, URL, or thelike will be developed every 10 years. Such data format on whichinformation is recorded for each generation can be kept being used evenin twenty or thirty years in order to operate the parent device 45. (a)of FIG. 86 illustrates an example of information on which versions orgenerations of a program are recorded. However, the same advantages arealso offered in another example illustrated in (b) of FIG. 86. In (b) ofFIG. 86, addresses of data stored in the server are recorded inassociated with respective different versions. In this example, a URL5057 a in a version 5055 d, a URL 5057 b in a version 5055 e, and a URL5057 c in a version 5055 f are recorded. The above can achieve backwardcompatibility for many years. For example, it is assumed that a userpurchases a product (the parent device 45) in version 1 this year andthe product has RF-ID. Under the assumption, it is expected that, intwenty or thirty years, programs described in virtual machine languagesor the like such as Java™, which are compliant to versions 1, 2, and 3,will be installed into the parent device 45. In the situation, the childdevice 5050 can provide the parent device 45 with the child deviceversion information 5052. Based on the child device version information5052, the parent device 45 can select a program to be compliant to anappropriate version. It is also expected that, in thirty years, thechild device will hold information of programs in all versions 1, 2, and3. Therefore, a different parent device 45 in version 3 employs the bestfunction of a version among them. On the other hand, the former parentdevice 45 in version 1 employs a rather limited function of a versionolder than the version employed by the parent device 45 in version 3. Asa result, perfect compatibility can be achieved.

The flowchart of FIG. 87 is explained below. At Step 5001 a, pressing aread switch 6066 on the remote controller 5051, a user brings the remotecontroller 5051 into proximity of the antenna 21 of the child device5050. Thereby, data in the memory 52 of the child device 5050 istransmitted to the memory 5061 of the remote controller 5051. Next, atStep 5001 b, facing the remote controller 5051 to the parent device 45such as a TV, the user presses a transmission switch 6065 (Step 5001 b).Thereby, the data in the memory 5061 is transmitted as light to theparent device 45 (Step 5001 c). In the embodiment of the presentinvention, the data is referred to as “tag data” for convenience. Theparent device 45 extracts or selects an execution program from the tagdata (Step 5001 d). The parent device 45 executes the extracted orselected execution program by a virtual machine language set in theparent device 45 (Step 5001 e). The parent device 45 reads Internetconnection identification information for the parent device 45 (Step5001 f). At Step 5001 g, it is determined whether or not theidentification information does not indicate “Connectable to theInternet” (in other words, it is determined based on the identificationinformation whether or not the parent device 45 is connectable to theInternet. If the identification information does not indicate“Connectable to the Internet” until Step 5001 g, then the parent device45 executes a non-connectable-state program in the execution program(Step 5001 t). The non-connectable-state program is to be executed whenthe parent device 45 is not connectable to the Internet. Then, theparent device 45 displays a result of the execution on its screen (Step5001 u). In the embodiment of the present invention, the memory 52stores not only the information regarding connection to the Internet,but also the non-connectable-state program to be executed when theparent device 45 is not connectable to the Internet. Therefore, theparent device 45 can display a result of a minimum required operationwhen the parent device 45 is not connectable to the Internet.

On the other hand, if it is determined at Step 5001 g that theidentification information indicates “Connectable to the Internet”, thenthe parent device 45 executes a connection program (Step 5001 h). Theconnection program includes a part of the above execution program.

The connection program may be generated by adding, into the executionprogram in the tag data, data such as a URL of the server, user ID, anda password. More specifically, the added such as a URL of the server,user ID, and a password are added in the data region 5054 illustrated in(a) of FIG. 86. Such connection program can extend the execution programin the tag data, and also reduce a capacity of the nonvolatile memory inthe memory 52. In this case, it is also possible that the connectionprogram in the memory 52 is recorded onto a memory such as anon-rewritable ROM in the program region 5053, while the URL of theserver and the like are recorded onto the data region 5054 that isrewritable. As a result, a tip area and a cost can be reduced.

At Step 5001 i, the parent device 45 connects to a server having aspecific URL. At Step 5001 j, it is determined whether or not the serverrequests the parent device 45 to upload data to the server. If theserver requests for uploading of data, then at Step 5001 p, the parentdevice 45 uploads data and/or a program to the server. The serverexecutes a program using the data (Step 5001 q). The server provides aresult of the execution to the parent device 45 (Step 5001 r). Theparent device 45 displays the result and the like of the execution onits screen (Step 5001 s).

On the other hand, if it is determined at Step 5001 j that the serverdoes not request for uploading of data, then, the parent device 45downloads information including a specific program from the serverhaving the URL (Step 5001 k). The parent device 45 executes thedownloaded program (Step 5001 m). Then, the parent device 45 displaysthe result of the execution on its screen (S5001 n).

The memory in the RF-ID unit or the child device has a limited capacitydue to restriction on power consumption, a volume, or a cost. Therefore,a common program cannot be stored in the memory. However, the use of theconnection program and the server as described in the embodiment of thepresent invention allows an infinitely large program to be executed.

A huge program may be executed on the server. Or, such a program may bedownloaded from the server to be executed. These aspects are in thescope of the present invention.

The embodiment described with reference to FIG. 86 has been described touse a remote controller of a TV. In this example, the remote controllerhas a battery, buttons for switching TV channels, an antenna for readingRF-ID, a communication circuit, and an infrared light emitting unit. Theremote controller can be replaced by a mobile phone to produce the sameeffects as described above. Since mobile phones generally have aninfrared light emitting unit, they are easily used instead of remotecontrollers. In addition, mobile phones have a communication line.Therefore, mobile phones can offer the same capability of that of remotecontroller, being directly connected to the server. However, acommunication cost of a mobile phone is burden of a user. A displayscreen of a mobile phone is significantly smaller than that of a TV.Therefore, a mobile phone may have the transmission switch 6065 asillustrated in FIG. 86. Thereby, if there is a TV near the mobile phone,the user faces the light emitting unit of the mobile phone to the TV totransmit tag data in the memory 52 of the mobile phone directly to theTV. As a result, the user can view data on a large screen of the TVhaving a high resolution. The above method does not incur a cost, whichis greatly advantageous for the user. The communication using thereadout tag data via the mobile phone line is stopped in cooperationwith the transmission switch.

In this case, in the same manner as described for as the remotecontroller with reference to FIG. 86, the mobile phone has at least areader for RF-ID or a Near Field Communication (NFC) unit. In thefuture, mobile phones are expected to have a reader function for readingRF-ID or the like. If RF-ID readers are provided to mobile phones, thepresent invention can be implemented with a much lower additional cost,which is greatly advantageous for the user. Moreover, the presentinvention can be easily implemented not only as a remote controller or amobile phone, but also as a Personal Digital Assistance (PDA) terminal,a laptop, or a mobile media player.

Eighth Embodiment

The following describes the eighth embodiment according to the presentinvention with reference to the drawings.

The eighth embodiment describes an aspect different from the aspectsdescribed in the first to seventh embodiments. However, the eighthembodiment is a system having the basically same configuration asdescribed in the first to seventh embodiments, including: a terminaldevice, such as the image capturing device 1, which has a RF-ID tag; acommunication device, such as the TV 45, which has a RF-IDreader/writer; and a server, such as the server 42, which is connectedto the communication device via a general-purpose network to communicatewith the communication device.

In the eighth embodiment, for example, a TV remote controller or mobilephone terminal (hereinafter, referred to also as a “communicationdevice”) which has a RF-ID reader/writer is moved to touch an externaldevice having RF-ID. Thereby, the communication device reads informationincluding ID and the like regarding the external device (hereinafter,referred to as “external device information”) from the external device.Then, the communication device pairs the external device informationwith information regarding the communication device itself (hereinafter,referred to as “communication device information”), and transfers thepaired information to a server. As a result, it is possible to register,into a database in the server, the external device information inassociation with the communication device information. The aboveconfiguration is useful when a user of the external device wishes toperform user registration of the external device by a single operationusing the communication device such as a mobile terminal. For example,it is assumed that the external device information is a product serialnumber (warranty number) of the external device, and that thecommunication device information is an e-mail address registered in thecommunication device. Under the assumption, a single operation of thecommunication device can read the product serial number of the externaldevice and then register, to the database in the server, the productserial number in association with the e-mail address registered in thecommunication device. This can simplify user registration of theexternal device.

Conventionally, operations for registering an e-mail address, a productserial number, and the like into a server are performed by a user. Thecomplicated operations inhibit increase of the external devices withuser registration. A method described in the eighth embodiment, however,enables a user of the external device to complete user registration by asingle operation. Therefore, even if the user is not familiar withInformation Technology (IT) devices, the user can easily, speedily, andintuitively perform the user registration. As a result, the registereddevices are expected to be increased.

FIG. 88 is a block diagram of a system according to the eighthembodiment of the present invention. As illustrated in FIG. 88, thesystem according to the eighth embodiment is the basically same systemas described in the first to seventh embodiments. The system accordingto the eighth embodiment includes an external device 8001, acommunication device 8002, and a server 8003.

Examples of the external device 8001 according to the eighth embodimentare the terminal device such as the image capturing device 1 describedin the first to seventh embodiments, and also home appliances includinga microwave, a washing machine, and a refrigerator, and audio-visual(AV) home appliances (apparatuses) such as a TV and a recorder. Theexternal device 8001 may be a book or a food, for instance. Basically,the external device 8001 may be anything that can communicate with areader/writer using a passive/active RF-ID or Near Field Communication(NFC) unit.

Examples of the communication device 8002 according to the eighthembodiment are the communication device such as the TV 45 described inthe first to seventh embodiments, and also a mobile phone terminal and amobile device. The communication device 8002 may be anything having areader/writer which can communicate with the RF-ID or NFC unit of theexternal device 8001. Desirably, the communication device 8002 isportable.

An example of the server 8003 according to the eighth embodiment is aserver connected to the communication device via a general-purposenetwork, in the same manner as described for the server 42 according tothe first to seventh embodiments. The server 8003 according to theeighth embodiment includes at least a database 8839. The server 8003 hasa function of registering data into the database 8839 based oninformation (registration information) transmitted from thecommunication device 8802.

For the convenience of the explanation, it is assumed in the followingexample that the external device 8001, the communication device 8002,and the server 8003 are connected in the system. However, each of theexternal device 8001, the communication device 8002, and the server 8003has specific characteristics in its structure, and the system connectingthem has also characteristics.

Referring to FIG. 88, the external device 8001 includes a CPU 8802, thesecond memory 52, a first encryption unit 8803, amodulation/demodulation unit 8804, a power induction unit 8805 (havingthe same function as that of the second power supply unit 91), and anantenna 8806 for proximity wireless communication.

The CPU 8802 is a system control unit of the external device 8001. TheCPU 8802 is supplied with power from the power induction unit 8805, abattery (not shown), or other power source.

The second memory 52 has the same structure as that of the second memory52 described in the first to seventh embodiments. Therefore, theidentical elements in the second memory 52 are assigned with the samenumeral references and will not be explained again below. The secondmemory 52 according to the eighth embodiment holds at least UID (productserial number or the like of the external device) for identifying theexternal device 8001. If the external device 8001 has a function ofaccumulating use histories of the external device 8001 or a function ofdetecting a trouble, for example, the second memory 52 holds informationof the use histories of the external device 8001 or error codes definingtroubles. The information or code corresponds to the captured imagestate information 55 in the image capturing device 1 according to thefirst to seventh embodiment. Therefore, the second memory 52 accordingto the eighth embodiment holds all pieces of information, such as theserver specific information for specifying the server 8003, which arerecorded in the second memory 52 illustrated in FIG. 4.

The first encryption unit 8803 encrypts information (detailed data) inthe second memory 52 to prevent tapping and manipulation of theinformation along a transmission path when the information is to betransmitted to the communication device 8002 using proximity wirelesscommunication. The encryption is performed using a first cryptographykey. The first cryptography key may be a public key or a private key.

The modulation/demodulation unit 8804 performs modulation anddemodulation when the external device 8001 performs proximity wirelesscommunication with the communication device 8002. When the informationin the second memory 52 which is encrypted using the first cryptographykey is to be transmitted to the communication device 8002, themodulation/demodulation unit 8804 modulates the information to beoutputted. On the other hand, when information is received from thecommunication device 8002, the modulation/demodulation unit 8804demodulates the received information.

The power induction unit 8805 induces power from radio waves usingelectromagnetic induction to perform proximity wireless communicationwith the communication device 8002. The power induction unit 8805 maysupply power generated using the electromagnetic induction, to otherunits included in the external device 8001.

The antenna 8806 is a loop antenna for the proximity wirelesscommunication. In the eighth embodiment, it is assumed in proximitywireless communication that the RF-ID or NFC unit operates at a HighFrequency (HF) of 15.56 MHz. However, the frequency band is not limitedto the above. The frequency band may be an Ultra High Frequency (UHF)ranging from 900 Mz to 1 GHz, or may exceed 2 GHz.

Here, the eighth embodiment aims at a simple operation for userregistration of the external device 8001. Therefore, the second memory52 needs to hold UID for identifying each external device 8001. It isdesirable that the second memory 52 further holds information forspecifying a manufacturer of the external device 8001, information forspecifying a manufacturing date, information for specifying manufactureprocesses (factory, line, lot, person in charge of manufacturing), andthe like. It is further desirable that the second memory 52 holds theserver specific information 48 allowing the communication device 8002 toeasily access a specific server of each manufacturer of the externaldevice 8001. Thereby, the communication device 8802 can be connected tothe specific server of its manufacturer that differs for each externaldevice 8001, without any complicated operations. As a result, a cost ofthe communication device 8002 can be reduced.

Next, a structure of the communication device 8002 is explained.Referring again to FIG. 88, the communication device 8002 according tothe eighth embodiment includes a CPU 8807, an antenna 8808, amodulation/demodulation unit (proximity wireless communication unit)8809, an output switch unit 8810, a modulation/demodulation switch unit8811, a registration information generation unit 8812, a deviceinformation storage unit 8813, an input unit 8820, a key 8821, anexternal device information memory 8822, a second encryption unit 8823,an access control information generation unit 8824, a server informationstorage unit 8825, a server communication unit 8830, an InternetProtocol (IP) communication information storage unit 8831, and a displayunit 8842.

The CPU 8807 is a system controller of the communication device 8002.The CPU 8807 manages operations of each unit included in thecommunication device 8002.

The antenna 8808 corresponds to the antenna unit according to the aspectof the present invention. The antenna 8808 serves as a partner of theantenna 8806 in the external device 8001. The antenna 8808 communicateswith the external device 8001 using proximity wireless communication.

The modulation/demodulation unit 8809 corresponds to the proximitywireless communication unit according to the aspect of the presentinvention. The modulation/demodulation unit 8809 performs modulation anddemodulation for a proximity wireless communication path connected tothe external device 8001. The modulation/demodulation unit 8809demodulates information (the external device information, for example)provided from the external device 8001, and modulates information to betransmitted to the external device 8001. The modulation method ordemodulation method is compatible with various methods such as ahigh-speed high-output method and a low-speed low-output method. Thishas been already described in detail in the first embodiment, andtherefore will not be described again below.

The output switch unit 8810 is one of the characteristic units in theeighth embodiment. The output switch unit 8810 is included in theantenna unit according to the aspect of the present invention. Theoutput switch unit 8810 switches an output power of radio wave signalsto be transmitted from the antenna 8808. When, for example, thecommunication device 8002 is far from the external device 8001 so thatstable communication is impossible between them, the output switch unit8810 selects high-output (high-powered) signals. On the other hand, whenthe communication device 8002 is near the external device 8001, theoutput switch unit 8810 selects low-output (low-powered) signals toprevent that the output signals transmitted from the antenna 8808interfere with signals transmitted from other devices.

The switch of output power is desirably performed according to a requestfrom the external device 8001. In this aspect, the external device 8801is provided with, for example, a communication radio wave strengthmeasurement unit which detects a voltage value of inducted power or asize of output power of communication radio waves and thereby causes theexternal device 8801 to transmit an output switch command to thecommunication device 8802. Based on the command, the output switch unit8810 in the communication device 8002 changes a strength of outputsignals transmitted from the antenna 8808. Here, the informationindicating a power level of power inducted by the external device 8001,such as the voltage value of inducted power or the size of output powerof communication radio waves may be included in the external deviceinformation to be transmitted.

The modulation/demodulation switch unit 8811 is included in theproximity wireless communication unit according to the aspect of thepresent invention. The modulation/demodulation switch unit 8811 switchesa modulation method between a high-speed modulation method and alow-speed modulation method. Thereby, when the communication device 802is far from the external device 8001 so that communication quality isnot good, the modulation/demodulation switch unit 8811 selects alow-speed modulation method to assure communication reliability. Here,the switch of speed in modulation/demodulation is desirably performedaccording to a request from the external device 8001. In this aspect,the external device 8801 is provided with, for example, a communicationradio wave strength measurement unit which detects a voltage value ofinducted power or a size of output power of communication radio wavesand thereby causes the external device 8801 to transmit amodulation/demodulation switch command to the communication device 8802.Based on the command, the modulation/demodulation switch unit 8811 inthe communication device 8002 changes a modulation method for acommunication path for proximity wireless communication with theexternal device 8001. Here, the information indicating a power level ofpower inducted by the external device 8001, such as the voltage value ofinducted power and the size of output power of communication radio wavesmay be included in the external device information to be transmitted.The switch of modulation methods has already been described in the firstembodiment in detail, and therefore will not be described again below.

An external device ID storage unit 8850 included in the communicationdevice 8002 stores external device ID for identifying each externaldevice 8001. The external device ID is obtained by proximity wirelesscommunication with the external device 8001. The external device IDstorage unit 8850 holds information of output power of communicationradio waves and a modulation method for each external device ID.Thereby, only the external device ID which has a small data amount issecurely read out at low speed and high output. On the other hand,reading of the information of use histories of regarding the externaldevice (hereinafter, referred to as “use history information”) iscontrolled according to stored data in the external device ID storageunit 8850 to determine whether or not the use history information can beread at high speed and low output. As a result, it is possible tocontrol the switch of output power of radio waves and the switch ofmodulation methods for access to each external device 8001.

In the eighth embodiment, the external device 8001 may be any variousdevices as described earlier. The communication device 8002 cannotaccess all kinds of external devices 8001 using the same reading method,because the external devices 8001 have RF-ID units on respectivedifferent positions. It is bothersome to adjust output power and amodulation method for each access. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment,the communication device 8002 is provided with the external device IDstorage unit 8850 for recording status histories of communication witheach external device 8001. The recorded histories are used to achievehigh-speed proximity wireless communication on the whole, withoutadjustment for each access. In short, the output switch unit 8810 andthe modulation/demodulation switch unit 8811 perform their switchingprocesses according to data stored in the external device ID storageunit 8850, thereby achieving high-speed proximity wireless communicationon the whole. The external device ID storage unit 8850 may be physicallyincluded in the device information storage unit 8813. If so, a partialarea of the device information storage unit 8813 is dedicated to theexternal device ID storage unit 8850.

The registration information generation unit 8812 corresponds to theregistration information generation unit according to the aspect of thepresent invention. The registration information generation unit 8812generates information (registration information) to be transmitted tothe server 8003, by adding the communication device informationregarding the communication device 8002 itself which is stored in thedevice information storage unit 8813 to the external device informationprovided from the external device 8801. The communication deviceinformation added to the external device information is stored in thedevice information storage unit 8813. The communication deviceinformation includes communication device identification information8814 and user information 8815.

The communication device identification information 8814 isidentification information for uniquely identifying the communicationdevice 8002. The communication device identification information 8814 isdifferent from a MAC address and an IP address used in communicationcontrol. If the communication device 8002 is a mobile phone terminal,the communication device identification information 8814 is, forexample, identification information for identifying a SubscriberIdentity Module (SIM) card, or identification information registered foreach RF-ID reader/writer control application installed in the mobiletelephone terminal. Or, the communication device identificationinformation 8814 may be a product serial number or a serial number ofthe communication device 8002. The user information 8815 is informationfor identifying a user of the communication device 8002. The userinformation 8815 includes, for example, a telephone number 8816, anelectronic mail (e-mail) address 8817, user identification information8818, and a post code 8819 (or an address, of course).

The input unit 8820 is used to register the communication deviceinformation into the device information storage unit 8813 using the key8821. A slot for a SIM card inserted to a mobile phone terminal is alsothe input unit 8820.

The external device information memory 8822 is a memory that temporarilystores the external device information provided from the external device8001 by the proximity wireless communication. The external deviceinformation memory 8822, which serves as a work memory for theregistration information generation unit 8812, adds the communicationdevice information to the stored external device information to generatetransmission information to be transmitted to the server 8003.

Here, it is preferable that the registration information generation unit8812 generates the registration information in which the communicationdevice information is indicated as parent (primary, stem) informationand the external device information is indicated as child (secondary,branch) information. If the communication device information isregistered as parent information and the external device is registeredas child information in the database 8839 in the server 8003 asdescribed later, loads on the server 8003 can be reduced.

The second encryption unit 8823 encrypts the transmission information(registration information) that is generated by the registrationinformation generation unit 8812 to be transmitted to the server 8003. Acryptography key used in the second encryption unit 8823 is a secondcryptography key different from the first cryptography key used in thefirst encryption unit 8803 of the external device 8001.

The following describes advantages of employing both the firstencryption unit 8803 in the external device 8001 and the secondencryption unit 8823 in the communication device 8002.

The encryption by the first encryption unit 8803 has two purposes. Forthe first purpose, the encryption by the first encryption unit 8803prevents tapping and manipulation of the external device informationtransmitted from the external device 8001 in proximity wirelesscommunication between the external device 8001 and the communicationdevice 8002. For the second purpose, the encryption by the firstencryption unit 8803 prevents that the external device informationitself transmitted from the external device 8001 is inspected by thecommunication device 8002. For example, in the situation where acommunication device 8002 manufactured by a B company reads externaldevice information of an external device 8001 manufactured by an Acompany, there is a risk that the communication device 8802 manufacturedby the B company which is a competitor of the A company reads andanalyzes use history information of the external device 8001manufactured by A company. Therefore, if the external device informationregarding the external device 8001 manufactured by the A company isencrypted in the external device 8001, it is possible to reduce the riskthat the communication device 8002 manufactured by the B company readsthe external device information.

On the other hand, the encryption by the second encryption unit 8823 hasa purpose of preventing tapping and manipulation of the transmissioninformation (registration information) in communication with the server8003. In the configuration according to the eighth embodiment, theexternal device information transmitted to the server 8003 has beenapplied with double encryption processes of the first encryption in theexternal device 8001 and the second encryption in the communicationdevice 8002. The second cryptography key may be a private key generateddepending on a result of authentication with the server 8003, or apublic key.

The access control information generation unit 8824 corresponds to theaccess control information generation unit according to the aspect ofthe present invention. The access control information generation unit8824 generates access control information used when the communicationdevice 8002 accesses the server 8003. The access control information isa so-called Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) generated by addingdefinition of a communication protocol or the server specificinformation stored in the server information storage unit 8825 to thetransmission information (registration information) generated by theregistration information generation unit 8812.

Here, the server specific information stored in the server informationstorage unit 8825 includes a server name 8826, a sever address 8827, anda login account 8828 and a login password 8829 for login to the server8003. Thereby, the access control information that is a so-called URI isgenerated in a form of a transmission command to be transmitted to theserver 8003.

The server communication unit 8830 transmits the access controlinformation generated by the access control information generation unit8824 to the server 8003 via the Internet 8834 on a packet-by-packetbasis. In general, communication via the Internet needs IPcommunication. Therefore, the server communication unit 8830automatically adds an IP address 8832 and a MAC address of thecommunication device 8002 which are stored in the IP communicationinformation storage unit 8831, to the access control information on apacket-by-packet basis to be transmitted.

The communication device identification information 8814 added to theexternal device information by the registration information generationunit 8812 is clearly different from the IP address and the MAC addressstored in the IP communication information storage unit 8831. The MACaddress is information for uniquely identifying the communication device8002 in communication control. Therefore, the MAC address is informationfor identifying the device within the Internet communication network.The communication device identification information 8814, however, isinformation registered to specify product attributes of thecommunication device 8002, such as a manufacturer and a product type ofthe communication device 8002. Moreover, while the IP address and theMAC address are added for each transmission packet to the server forcommunication control, the communication device identificationinformation 8814 is one of the registration information to be registeredinto the database 8839 of the server 8003. In addition, the MAC addressof the communication device 8002 is replaced by a MAC address of arouter when the packet passes the router before arriving at the server8003. Therefore, the MAC address of the communication device 8002 hasalready been deleted when the packet arrives at the server 8003. The IPaddress also has a possibility of being changed by a personal computeror the like. Therefore, the IP address is not information for alwaysidentifying the communication device 8802.

Furthermore, the communication device identification information 8814 isadded to each transmission information (registration information)generated by the registration information generation unit 8812 to betransmitted to the server 8003, while the IP address and the MAC addressare added to each communication packet in the communication path to theserver 8003. Moreover, the communication device identificationinformation 8814 is applied with the second encryption as thetransmission information (registration information) generated by theregistration information generation unit 8812. However, the IP addressand the MAC address added to each packet are not encrypted. The IPaddress would be encrypted when communication with the server 8003 isperformed using Security Architecture for Internet Protocol (IPsec).However, this encryption is different from the second encryption forencrypting the transmission information (registration information)generated by the registration information generation unit 8812. Theencryption of IPsec is performed for each IP packet.

Next, the server 8003 according to the eighth embodiment is descried.The server 8003 according to the eighth embodiment includes acommunication unit 8835, a second decryption unit 8836, a firstdecryption unit 8837, a database registration unit 8838, the database8839, a display detail selection unit 8840, and a WEB server 8841.

The communication unit 8835 is connected to the communication device8002 via the Internet 8834 to communicate with the communication device8802. Thereby, the communication unit 8835 performs IP communicationwith the communication device 8802.

The second decryption unit 8836 serves as a partner of the secondencryption unit 8823 in the communication device 8002. The seconddecryption unit 8836 decrypts the transmission information (registrationinformation) encrypted by the second encryption unit 8823 of thecommunication device 8002. The second decryption unit 8836 therebyextracts the communication device identification information 8814 andthe user information 8815 added by the communication device 8002 and theexternal device information encrypted by the external device 8001.

The first decryption unit 8837 decrypts the encrypted external deviceinformation that is obtained by the decryption of the second decryptionunit 8836. The first decryption unit 8837 thereby extracts the externaldevice information.

As described above, the external device information is encrypted in theexternal device 8001 and transmitted to the communication device 8002.Next, the external device information is further encrypted by thecommunication device 8002 and transmitted to the server 8003. Then, theexternal device information received by the server 8003 is decrypted inthe server 8003. Therefore, the external device information is notinspected by the communication device 8802. This produces advantageswhen the external device 8001 and the communication device 8002 aremanufactured by different manufacturers, which has already beendescribed earlier and therefore will note be described again here.

The database registration unit 8838 registers (stores) the decryptedcommunication device information and external device information intothe database 8839. The communication device information includes thecommunication device identification information 8814 and the userinformation 8815. The external device information includes the externaldevice identification information such as a manufacturer and a productserial number for specifying a product type of the external device, theuse history information of the external device, trouble historyinformation, and failure codes.

The database registration unit 8838 registers the communication deviceinformation as parent (stem) information and the external deviceinformation as child (branch, leaf) information, according to theregistration information in which the communication device informationis indicated as parent (primary, stem) information and the externaldevice information is indicated as child (secondary, branch)information. Therefore, the database 8839 can manage the communicationdevice information as parent (stem) information and the external deviceinformation as child (branch, leaf) information.

For example, since the communication device information includes theuser information and the like, the communication device information canoffer the same effect as that produced by the user registration of theexternal device 8001. More specifically, while a user of the externaldevice 8001 conventionally needs to perform user registration requiringcomplicated processes such as entry of user information, a productserial number, and the like, the configuration according to the eighthembodiment enables the user to perform the user registration simply bypresenting the communication device 8002 to the external device 8001.

In addition, the configuration according to the eighth embodiment allowsa manufacturer of the external device 8001 to examine informationassociated with the communication device in order to determine whichuser possesses which product. As a result, a traceability of productscan be improved.

The display detail selection unit 8840 selects, from the WEB server8841, detail to be displayed on the display unit 8842 of thecommunication device 8002. More specifically, the display detailselection unit 8840 selects data to be displayed on the communicationdevice 8802, depending on the external device information decrypted bythe first decryption unit 8837. Thereby, the external device informationallows the communication device 8002 to display a website depending oneach external device 8001.

For example, if the external device 8001 is a washing machine, a websiteof the washing machine which includes an instruction manual of thewashing machine is displayed. When if the external device 8001 is amicrowave, a website of the microwave is displayed.

The external device information decrypted in the first decryption unit8837 includes, for example, failure codes regarding the external device8001. The display detail selection unit 8840 can select display detailbased on a failure code. Therefore, the display detail selection unit8840 can cause the communication device 8002 to display a websitedescribing how to deal with failures of the external device information.

Combination of the display detail selection unit 8840 and the database8839 can transmit, to the communication device 8002, a notification of aproduct having a possibility of causing serious accidents. For example,it is assumed that it is found that a microwave A as the external device8001 has a possibility of causing serious accidents. The microwave A hasalready been touched by the communication device 8802 (hereinafter,referred to as a “communication device A”) to register information ofthe microwave A to the server (in other words, to perform userregistration). This means that the information of the microwave A isalready registered in the database 8839 in association with thecommunication device A. Under the assumption, a user of thecommunication device A purchases a washing machine B as a new externaldevice 8001, and touches the washing machine B by the communicationdevice A. Thereby, the information of the washing machine B is newlyregistered in the database 8839 of the server 8003 in association withthe communication device A. This allows the server 8003 to notice thatthe communication device A is associated with the microwave A having apossibility of accidents. Therefore, the display detail selection unit8840 transmits a registration screen for registering the information ofthe washing machine B together with a notification for asking to stopuse of the microwave A. As a result, the possibility of seriousaccidents can be significantly reduced.

FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram illustrating a method of managing, in thedatabase 8839 of the server 8003, the communication device informationand the external device information which are transmitted from thecommunication device 8002, according to the eighth embodiment of thepresent invention. Referring to FIG. 89, a communication device 1touches external devices 1 to 3 to register information of theseexternal devices into the database 8839, and a communication device 2touches external devices 4 to 7 to register information of theseexternal devices into the database 8839. Here, the communication devices1 and 2 are examples of the communication device 8002, and the externaldevices 1 to 7 are examples of the external device 8001.

The management as illustrated in FIG. 89 shows that a possessor of thecommunication device 1 possesses the external devices 1 to 3 and apossessor of the communication device 2 possesses the external devices 4to 7.

Thus, the eighth embodiment is characterized in managing, at least,information of an external device in association with a communicationdevice without registering private information. For example, if atelephone number, an e-mail address, and the like are previouslyregistered in the communication device 8002 such as a mobile phone, itis possible to manage information of the external device 8001 inassociation with the private information registered in the communicationdevice 8002. In any cases, the simple operation of touching the externaldevice 8001 by the communication device 8002 allows a system to performuser registration or the like.

FIG. 90 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an URI that isaccess control information generated by the access control informationgeneration unit 8824 in the communication device 8002 to control accessto the server 8003, according to the eighth embodiment of the presentinvention.

Referring to FIG. 90, the URI as the access control information includesa protocol name http and a sever address (or server name) followed bythe communication device information and the external deviceinformation. Here, the communication device information is applied withthe second encryption, and the external device information is appliedwith the first and second encryption.

As described above, the user of the external device 8001 can performuser registration regarding the external device 8001 by the simpleoperation of a single touching process using the communication device8002. The system according to the eighth embodiment enables even theexternal device 8001 that cannot possess an Internet communicationfunction to perform registration of its external device informationincluding ID, such as user registration, by relaying the information bythe communication device 8802 connectable to the Internet.Conventionally, the user registration requires complicated operations inwhich a user should enter data by hands to a personal computer or mobilephone connectable to the Internet. The eighth embodiment can simplifythe complicated operations. In the eighth embodiment, the externaldevice 8001 does not need to have an expensive Internet connectiondevice. Instead, the external device 8001 is provided with a module forproximity wireless communication, such as a RF-ID unit, which isimplemented at a significantly low cost.

As described above, according to the eighth embodiment, the systemconfiguration connecting the external device 8001, the communicationdevice 8002, and the server 8003 can simplify user registrationregarding the external device 8001. As described earlier, each of theexternal device 8001, the communication device 8002, and the server 8003has a characteristic structure.

Although the eighth embodiment has been described in detail above forthe communication device according to the present invention, thoseskilled in the art will be readily appreciate that many modificationsare possible in the embodiment without materially departing from thenovel teachings and advantages of the present invention. Accordingly,all such modifications are intended to be included within the scope ofthis invention.

Ninth Embodiment

FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating environments of home networksaccording to the ninth embodiment.

The following describes the ninth embodiment. FIG. 91 illustratesenvironments of home networks assumed in the ninth embodiment. A homenetwork is established in each of houses M1001, M1002, and M1003. Eachof the home networks is connected to a registration server M1005 via theInternet M1004.

If services provided via a home network are limited within acorresponding house, the registration server M1005 may exist in thehouse. It is also possible that a home network is divided into variousplaces such as a vacation house and an office, and that a plurality ofhome networks are used in a single house such as a dormitory or aroom-sharing house.

It is assumed that, in a house, there are home appliances which arealways connected to the Internet M1004 (hereinafter, referred to as“always-connected home appliances”) and home appliances which are notalways connected to the Internet M1004 (hereinafter, referred to as“non-always-connected home appliances”). The always-connected homeappliances, such as TVs M1008 and M1009, a DVD recorder M1010, and thelike, are connected to the Internet M1004 via a router M1006 or awireless Access Point (AP) M1007. The non-always-connected homeappliances, such as a digital camera M1011, a microwave M1012, and arefrigerator M1013, are indirectly connected to the Internet M1004 asneeded. In the ninth embodiment, a mobile terminal such as a mobilephone M1014 is also a terminal included in the home network.

The devices in the ninth embodiment can perform simple datacommunication with other device each other by using a proximity wirelesscommunication device. Each of the devices obtains information of otherdevice using the proximity wireless communication device, and registersthe obtained information into the registration server M1005 using a homenetwork device.

FIG. 92 is a hardware diagram of a communication device M1101 accordingto the ninth embodiment.

The communication device M1101 is assumed to have two devices forcommunication.

One of them is a proximity wireless communication device M1102. Theproximity wireless communication device M1102 is generally a so-calledNFC or RF tag.

The other device is a home network communication device M1103. Examplesof the home network communication device M1103 are: a wirelesscommunication device using wireless Local Area Network (LAN) or ZigBee,which is used in connecting home appliances to each other; a wiredcommunication device using Ethernet™ or Poser Line Communication (PLC);and a communication device using WiMax or Third Generation PartnershipProject (3GPP), which is used in mobile phones.

The communication device M1101 also includes a user interface (IF)device M1104. The user IF device is, for example, an input device suchas buttons, a display, and an output device using a Light Emitting Diode(LED) or the like. For devices such as TVs and air conditioners, datainput/output is generally performed by using a remote controller that isphysically separated from the device. For convenience of thedescription, such a remote controller is also considered as the user IFdevice M1104 in the ninth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 93 is a functional block diagram for explaining a function of a CPUM1105 in the communication device M1101.

A device UID obtainment unit M1202 in the communication device M1101obtains information including device UID for identifying a registrationdevice M1201 (that is a device to be registered), by using the proximitywireless communication device M1102.

Here, the registration device M1201 transmits a registration command andregistration information including device UID of the registration deviceM1201 to the communication device M1101, by using the proximity wirelesscommunication device M1102.

A registration information generation unit M1204 obtains theregistration information including the device UID from the device UIDobtainment unit M1202, and obtains home ID from a home ID managementunit M1205. Then, the registration information generation unit M1204adds the home ID to the registration information obtained from theregistration device M1201 via the device UID obtainment unit M1202, togenerate information-added registration information. If positioninformation of the registration device M1201 or the like is to be addedto the registration information, the registration information generationunit M1204 obtains the position information from a position informationobtainment unit M1206.

Examples of the position information are address information based on apost code inputted to a TV, geographical position information generatedby a Global Positioning System (GPS) of a mobile phone, and the like. Ifposition information of the registration device M1201 is registered, theregistered position information can be used to easily provide servicesto improve home appliance traceability or the like.

The registration information generation unit M1204 transmits theregistration information added with the home ID to the registrationinformation transmitting/receiving unit M1207.

The home ID management unit M1205 manages home ID that is different fromcommunication device ID used by the communication device included in theabove-described home network.

In conventional home networks, a master device of each communicationdevice manages information for the communication device. The managementmethod is different depending on a type of the correspondingcommunication device. Therefore, it is not possible to manageinformation on home-by-home basis. Although there is a situation whereID is inputted by a user for each service, this results in quite lowusability.

In the ninth embodiment, introduction of new different ID that is homeID makes it possible to manage pieces of information of devices includedin a home network without using a communication device or services.

When the home ID management unit M1205 registers information of a deviceto the server at the first time, the home ID management unit generateshome ID. The home ID may be generated based on position information orUID of the communication device. It is also possible to generate home IDbased on a random number to check whether or not the generated home IDdoes not overlap with any other ID in the registration server. It isfurther possible that a user sets the home ID.

When a registration information transmitting/receiving unit M1207 in thecommunication device M1101 receives registration information from theregistration information generation unit M1204, the registrationinformation transmitting/receiving unit M1207 transmits the receivedregistration information to the registration server M1005 using the homenetwork communication device M1103.

The registration server M1005 compares the received registrationinformation to pieces of information stored in the registration databaseM1208 to determine whether or not the received registration informationcan be registered. Then, the registration server M1005 sends aregistration response back to the communication device M1101.

In receiving the registration response, the registration informationtransmitting/receiving unit M1207 notifies the user of a result of thedetermination by using the user IF device M1104. If the registrationserver M1005 determines that the received registration informationcannot be registered, the registration informationtransmitting/receiving unit 1207 notifies the determination to theregistration information generation unit M1204 in order to requestchange of the registration information. Thereby, it is possible tocollectively manage devices in a home network including white goods thatdo not have user IF devices for communication.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart of registering information of the communicationdevice.

The communication device M1101 receives the registration command and thedevice UID from the registration device M1201 by using the device UIDobtainment unit M1202 (M1301).

After receiving the registration command and the device UID, thecommunication device M1101 determines whether or not the communicationdevice M1101 has home ID (M1302). If the communication device M1101 doesnot have the home ID (NO at M1302), then the communication device M1101obtains home ID (the processing is referred to as “home ID obtainment”)(M1303). On the other hand, if the communication device M1101 has thehome ID (YES at M1302), the communication device M1101 generatesinformation of the communication device to be registered into thecommunication device M1101 itself (hereinafter, referred to as“registration information” or “home ID”) (M1304).

Next, the communication device M1101 transmits the registrationinformation to the registration server M1005 by using the registrationinformation transmitting/receiving unit M1207 (M1305).

The communication device M1101 determines whether or not thecommunication device M1101 receives a response (registration response)to the transmitted registration information from the registration serverM1005 (M1306). If the response is not received, then the communicationdevice M1101 presents a user with a registration failure notificationfor notifying a failure of the registration processing (M1307) andterminates the registration processing. On the other hand, if thecommunication device M1101 receives the response, then the communicationdevice M1101 presents the user with an inquiry asking whether or not toregister the generated information into the communication device M1101(M1308). If the user replies OK, then the communication device M1101completes the registration processing. If the user replies NO, thecommunication device M1101 returns to the home ID obtainment. When it isdifficult to obtain home ID, the registration processing is terminatedas a failure.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the home ID obtainment.

The communication device M1101 determines whether or not thecommunication device M1101 has a function of automatically generatinghome ID (hereinafter, referred to also as an “automatic generationfunction”) (M1401). If the communication device M1101 has the function,then the communication device M1101 automatically generates the home ID.On the other hand, if the communication device M1101 does not have thefunction, the communication device M1101 asks the user to manually inputthe home ID. If there is no method for manually inputting home ID or theuser refuses to the manual input, then the communication device M1101notifies the user of a failure of the registration processing (M1403) topersuade the user to obtain the home ID by any different method. Whenthe communication device M1101 automatically generates home ID, thecommunication device M1101 selects an appropriate automatic generationfunction (M1404). If the communication device M1101 can obtaingeographical position information by a GPS or the communication deviceM1101 is a terminal such as a TV for which an address as positioninformation has been generally registered, the communication deviceM1101 generates the home ID using the position information (M1405). Ifthe communication device M1101 is a terminal generally set in a house,the communication device M1101 generates the home ID using a uniqueidentifier of the communication device M1101 (M1406). Especially if itis difficult to generate effective home ID, the communication deviceM1101 generates the home ID using a random number (M1407). Aftergenerating the home ID, the communication device M1101 transmits thehome ID to the server (M1408). Then, the communication device M1101receives information regarding the generated home ID from the server,and thereby determines whether or not the home ID can be used (M1409).If it is determined that the home ID cannot be used, then thecommunication device M1101 returns to the processing of generating thehome ID. On the other hand, if the home ID can be used, then thecommunication device M1101 asks the user whether to not to register thegenerated home ID into the communication device M1101 itself (M1410). Ifthe user replies OK, then the communication device M1101 registers thehome ID into the communication device M1101 itself (M1411). Otherwise,the communication device M1101 returns to the processing of generatingthe home ID.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart of registering information of the registrationdevice.

The registration device M1201 transfers a registration command andinformation including device UID for identifying the registration deviceM1201, to the communication device M1101 via the proximity wirelesscommunication device. If the communication device M1101 does not havehome ID, the communication device M1101 generates provisional home IDand transmits the generated provisional home ID to the registrationserver M1005 via the home network communication device. The registrationserver M1005 sends a response with information regarding the provisionalhome ID to the communication device M1101. On the other hand, if thecommunication device M1101 has home ID or if the communication deviceM1101 receives, from the registration server M1005, home ID that isallowed by the registration server M1005 to be used, the communicationdevice M1101 transmits the home ID and the registration informationincluding the device UID to the registration server M1005, therebycompleting the registration of information of the registration deviceM1201.

Tenth Embodiment

In the tenth embodiment of the present invention, a configuration inwhich the home ID is shared among communication terminals (communicationdevices) is described.

FIG. 97 is a functional block diagram illustrating a function of sharinghome ID between communication devices.

Communication devices M1101S and M1101R included in a home network sharethe same home ID using a home network M1601 and the home networkcommunication devices M1103. The communication devices M1101S and M1101Rmay share the home ID using the proximity wireless communication devicesM1102.

The communication device according to the tenth embodiment (hereinafter,referred to as a “transmitting communication device M1101S”) can sharethe home ID with another communication device (hereinafter, referred toas a “receiving communication device M1101R”) in the same house, bytransferring a sharing command and home ID to the receivingcommunication device via the proximity wireless communication devicesM1102.

In the transmitting communication device M1101S, a home ID sharing unitM1602S in a home ID management unit M1205S provides the sharing commandand the home ID that is held in a home ID storage unit M1209S, to aproximity wireless communication device M1102S.

For example, when the proximity wireless communication device M1102S ofthe transmitting communication device M1101S is moved into proximity ofa proximity wireless communication device M1102R of the receivingcommunication device M1101R, information is transferred between them.

Thereby, the home ID in the transmitting communication device M1101S isstored into the proximity wireless communication device M1102R of thereceiving communication device M1101R.

If a home ID storage unit M1209R in the receiving communication deviceM1101 does not hold any home ID, a home ID sharing unit M1602R in thereceiving communication device M1101R stores the received home ID intothe receiving communication device M1101R itself. Thereby, it ispossible to quite easily share the home ID between the communicationdevices. On the other hand, if the home ID storage unit M1209R alreadyholds home ID, the receiving communication device M1101R transmits boththe held home ID and the received home ID to the registration serverM1005. In receiving both home IDs, the registration server M1005 managesboth home IDs virtually as a single home ID. The registration serverM1005 may notify both communication devices of one of the home IDs tounify them. Even in this case, the registration server M1005 managesboth home IDs virtually as a single home ID since there arenon-always-connected devices in the home network. It is possible that IDof a non-always-connected device is updated every time of beingconnected to the home network and the virtual management by theregistration server M1005 ends when updating of all of the registrationdevices (namely, devices to be registered which are included in the homenetwork) are completed. Thereby, it is possible to unify originallyplural home networks into a single network.

The home ID sharing can be performed by using the home network. When acommunication device is to be connected to the home network M1601 and ahome network connection detection unit M1603S of the communicationdevice detects that the communication device does not hold home ID, thecommunication device broadcasts a request for home ID sharing toterminals connected to the home network M1601. Terminals holding home IDamong the terminals connected to the home network M1601 transmit thehome ID to the communication device. Thereby, the home ID sharing iscompleted prior to start of communication. Here, if a master terminal torespond to requests for home ID sharing is previously selected fromamong terminals holding the home ID, it is possible to prevent that adevice requesting home ID sharing receives responses from a plurality ofterminals thereby overburdening the home network. If there is noresponse, the communication device terminal requesting home ID sharingmay obtain home ID by itself.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart of processing performed by the receivingcommunication device M1101R when home ID is shared using the proximitywireless communication device M1102.

When the receiving communication device M1101R receives a sharingcommand and home ID (M1701), the receiving communication device M1101Rdetermines whether or not the receiving communication device M1101Rholds home ID (M1702). If the receiving communication device M1101R doesnot hold home ID, then the receiving communication device M1101Rregisters the received home ID, as home ID, into the receivingcommunication device M1101R itself (M1703). On the other hand, if thereceiving communication device M1101R holds home ID, the receivingcommunication device M1101R compares the held home ID to the receivedhome ID. If the held home ID is identical to the received home ID, thereceiving communication device M1101R terminates the processing withoutany further processes. On the other hand, if the held home ID is notidentical to the received home ID, the receiving communication deviceM1101R selects home ID (M1705). The selection of home ID may beperformed by the receiving communication device M1101R or theregistration server. In the situation where the receiving communicationdevice M1101R asks the registration server to perform the selection, thereceiving communication device M1101R transmits the held home ID and thereceived home ID to the registration server as sharing information(M1706). Thereby, the receiving communication device M1101R receives,from the registration server, a sharing response including home IDselected by the registration server (M1707). Then, the communicationdevice M1101R inquiries the user whether or not to share (register) theselected ID into the communication device M1101R (M1708). If the userreplies OK, the registration processing is completed. It the userreplies NO, the received ID receiving communication device M1101Rreturns to the processing for selecting home ID. In the case where thereceiving communication device M1101R itself selects the held home ID,the receiving communication device M1101R transmits the held home ID ashome ID and the received home ID as sharing home ID to the registrationserver (M1709). The registration server notifies updating of the home IDto other communication devices already sharing home ID. In the situationwhere the receiving communication device M1101R selects the receivedhome ID, then the receiving communication device M1101R updates the heldhome ID by the received home ID (M1710). In addition, the receivingcommunication device M1101R transmits the previously held home ID assharing home ID and the received home ID as home ID to the registrationserver (M1711). The registration server notifies updating of the home IDto other communication devices already sharing home ID.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart of processing performed by the transmittingcommunication device M1101S when home ID is shared using the proximitywireless communication device M1102.

After transmitting a sharing command and home ID to the registrationserver, the transmitting communication device M1101S determines whetheror not a response to the home ID sharing is received from theregistration server (M1752). If there is no response, the transmittingcommunication device M1101S terminates the processing. On the otherhand, if the response including a notification of updating home ID isreceived, the transmitting communication device M1101S updates the homeID by the notified home ID (M1753) and completes the processing.

FIG. 100 is a sequence diagram of the situation where the registrationserver selects home ID.

The transmitting communication device M1101S transmits home ID_A to thereceiving communication device M1101R by using the proximity wirelesscommunication device. The receiving communication device M1101Rtransmits home ID_B that is held in the receiving communication deviceM1101R itself and the received home ID_A to the registration serverM1005. The registration server selects the home ID_B from the receivedhome IDs, and notifies the home ID_B to a communication device holdingthe home ID_A and the receiving communication device M1101R to cause thedevices to register the home ID_B.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart of processing performed by the transmittingcommunication device M1101S when home ID is shared using the homenetwork communication device M1103.

The transmitting communication device M1101S detects connection to thehome network (M1801), and broadcasts a request for home ID sharing toterminals in the home network (M1802). If a response to the request forhome ID sharing is received, the transmitting communication deviceM1101S registers home ID received with the response into thetransmitting communication device M1101S itself (M1804). On the otherhand, if the response is not received, the transmitting communicationdevice M1101S performs the home ID obtainment (M1303).

FIG. 102 is a flowchart of processing performed by the receivingcommunication device M1101R when home ID is shared using the homenetwork communication device M1103.

After receiving the request for home ID sharing (M1851), the receivingcommunication device M1101R determines whether or not the receivingcommunication device M1101R itself is a master terminal selected in thehome network (M1852). If the receiving communication device M1101R isthe master terminal, then the receiving communication device M1101Rtransmits home ID held in the receiving communication device M1101Ritself in response to the request (M1853). On the other hand, if thereceiving communication device M1101R is not the master terminal, thenthe receiving communication device M1101R does not perform anyprocesses. Here, if a master terminal is not selected from terminalsholding home ID, the receiving communication device M1101R responds toall requests for home ID sharing from any terminals without thedetermination regarding the master terminal.

FIG. 103 is a sequence diagram of the situation where the home ID isshared using the home network communication device M1103.

When a communication device detects connection to a home network, thecommunication device broadcasts a request for home ID sharing toterminals in the home network. Only a communication device M1854selected as the master terminal from among communication devicesreceiving the request responds to the request. The communication devicereceiving the response registers home ID received with the response,into the communication device itself.

Eleventh Embodiment

A communication device according to the eleventh embodiment of thepresent invention is described in detail with reference to the drawings.The communication device according to the eleventh embodiment of thepresent invention reads terminal device information regarding a terminaldevice from the terminal device by using a NFC function, and transfersthe terminal device information to a server via a general-purposenetwork.

FIG. 104 illustrates a system according to the eleventh embodiment. Thesystem according to the eleventh embodiment includes a terminal deviceY01, a communication device Y02, and a server Y04. The subject of theeleventh embodiment is the communication device Y02.

The terminal device Y01 is a device having a NFC function (RF-ID unit,IC tag, or NFC tag emulation). The terminal device Y01 is, for example,an electronic terminal device such as a refrigerator, a microwave, awashing machine, a TV, or a recording device. The terminal device Y01has an internal memory for holding, as terminal device information, aproduct serial number that is ID for identifying the terminal deviceY01, use history information of the terminal device Y01, errorinformation, and the like.

The communication device Y02 has a NFC function for communicating withthe NFC function of the terminal device Y01 by proximity wirelesscommunication. The communication device Y02 includes a reader/writerfunction of reading the terminal device information from the terminaldevice Y01. The communication device Y02 is, for example, a portabledevice such as a mobile phone or a remote controller terminal of a TV.

The server Y04 is a server connected to the communication device Y02 inorder to communicate with the communication device Y02, via ageneral-purpose network such as the Internet. The server Y04 includes adatabase (DB) for accumulating the terminal device information that isread from the terminal device Y01 to the communication device Y02.

The terminal device Y01 includes a CPU Y011, a failure sensor unit Y012,a use history logging unit Y013, a memory Y014, a modulation unit Y017,and an antenna Y018.

The CPU Y011 is a unit that controls a system of the terminal deviceY01. The CPU Y011 controls the failure sensor unit Y012, the use historylogging unit Y013, the memory Y014, and the modulation unit Y017 whichare units included in the terminal device.

The failure sensor unit Y012 is a unit that detects a location anddetail of a failure occurred in each unit included in the terminaldevice Y01. A piece of failure information detected by the failuresensor unit Y012 is accumulated in a RAM in the memory Y014. Thedetected failure information is represented by an error code that isuniquely defined depending on a location and condition of the failure.

The use history logging unit Y013 is a unit that performs logging foreach piece of use history information every time the terminal device Y01is operated by the user. The use history information applied withlogging is accumulated into the RAM Y016 in the memory Y014. In general,when use history information is used to examine how a failure hasoccurred, several pieces of use history information up to occurrence ofthe failure have high priorities of being examined. Therefore, it isdesirable that the use history logging unit Y013 according to theeleventh embodiment uses the RAM Y016 as First In First Out (FIFO) tochronologically accumulate new pieces of use history information intothe RAM Y016. Moreover, when use history information is used to examinehow a failure has occurred, it is desirable that several pieces of usehistory information up to a timing detected by the failure sensor unitY012 are stored as priorities into the RAM. Therefore, if when fiveminor failures are detected in using the terminal device Y01, severalpieces of operation (use) history information up to the five failuresare stored as priorities.

The memory Y014 includes a ROM Y015 and the RAM Y016.

The ROM Y015 previously stores at least a product serial number foruniquely identifying the terminal device Y01 when the terminal deviceY01 has been shipped. The user of the terminal device Y01 cannot updatethe information previously held in the ROM Y05. The product serialnumber is desirably information by which a manufacturer, a manufacturinglot number, and a manufacturing date of the terminal device Y01 can bedetermined. It is also desirable that the ROM Y015 is embedded in asemiconductor chip of the CPU Y011. This structure prevents informationduring memory access to be easily inspected. Therefore, secret keyinformation for authentication and encrypted communication in proximitywireless communication with the communication device can be recorded onthe ROM Y015 when shipping.

The RAM Y016 is a rewritable memory in which the failure informationdetected by the failure sensor unit Y012 and the use history informationapplied with logging of the use history logging unit Y013 areaccumulated.

The modulation unit Y017 is a unit that modulates communication data forproximity wireless communication with the communication device Y02. Themodulation method varies depending on employed NFC standard. Forexample, Amplitude Shift Keying (ASK), Frequency Shift Keying (FSK),Phase Shift Keying (PSK), and the like are used.

The antenna Y018 generates electromagnetic induction from radio wavesemitted from an antenna of the communication device Y02. The antennaY018 performs at least processing of providing power to the modulationunit Y017 and the memory Y014 to be operated. In addition, the antennaY018 overlaps reflected waves of the radio waves emitted from thecommunication device Y02 with signals modulated by the modulation unitY017 to transmit the terminal device information that is stored in thememory Y014 to the communication device Y02.

As described above, the terminal device according to the eleventhembodiment detects failures occurred in each unit included in theterminal device. Then, the terminal device performs logging for usehistories to accumulate the use histories into the memory. Then, if theterminal device is moved into proximity of the communication device Y02to be capable of performing proximity wireless communication with thecommunication device Y02, the terminal device can transmit the terminaldevice information stored in the memory into the communication deviceY02.

Next, the communication device Y02 according to the eleventh embodimentis described. It should be noted that the subject of the eleventhembodiment is the communication device Y02.

The communication device Y02 includes an antenna Y021, a CPU Y022, ademodulation unit Y023, a memory Y024, a position informationdetermination unit Y027, a GPS antenna Y031, a communication memoryY032, an information adding unit Y035, and a communication unit Y036.

The antenna Y021 performs polling for calling any terminal devices inorder to search for a terminal device communicable with thecommunication device Y02 by proximity wireless communication. Inreceiving a response to the polling, the antenna Y021 establishesproximity wireless communication with the responding terminal device Y01to receive modulated terminal device information from the terminaldevice Y01, and provides the modulated terminal device information tothe demodulation unit Y023. In general, the polling processing is alwaysnecessary even if there is no terminal device communicable with thecommunication device Y02 by proximity wireless communication. Thisconsumes power. Therefore, the communication device Y02 is provided witha switch (not shown) for controlling a timing of start of polling, sothat polling processing is performed when the switch is turned ON. Thisstructure can significantly shorten a time period of the polling. As aresult, the power consumption amount can be considerably reduced. Thisis especially efficient when the communication device Y02 operates by alimited power source such as a battery.

The CPU Y022 is a unit that controls a system of the communicationdevice Y02. The CPU Y022 controls operations of each unit included inthe communication device Y02.

The modulation unit Y023 is a unit that demodulates data modulated bythe modulation unit Y017 of the terminal device Y01. The demodulatedterminal device information is temporarily stored into the memory Y024.

The memory Y024 includes a ROM Y025 and a RAM Y026.

The ROM Y025 is a memory that cannot be rewritten by the outside. TheROM Y025 previously holds a product serial number for uniquelyidentifying the communication device Y02 when the communication deviceY02 has been shipped. The product serial number is desirably informationby which a manufacturer, a manufacturing lot number, and a manufacturingdate of the communication device Y02 can be determined. It is alsodesirable that the ROM Y025 is embedded in a semiconductor chip of theCPU Y022. This structure prevents information during memory access frombeing easily inspected. Therefore, secret key information forauthentication and encrypted communication in proximity wirelesscommunication with the terminal device Y01 can be recorded on the ROMY025 when shipping.

The RAM Y026 holds the terminal device information of the terminaldevice Y01 which is received by the antenna Y021 and demodulated by thedemodulation unit Y023. As described earlier, the terminal deviceinformation includes the product serial number for uniquely identifyingthe terminal device Y01, the use history information of the terminaldevice Y01, and failure codes.

The position information determination unit Y027 is a group of sensorsfor determining a location of the communication device Y02. The positioninformation determination unit Y027 includes a latitude/longitudepositioning unit (GPS) Y028, an altitude positioning unit Y029, and aposition correction unit Y030. The position information determinationunit Y027 does not need to always determine a location of thecommunication device Y02 (location information) if the locationinformation is generated at a timing where the communication device Y02becomes communicable with the terminal device Y01 using the antennaY021. As a result, power consumption of the communication device Y02 canbe reduced.

The latitude/longitude positioning unit Y028 is a general GlobalPositioning System (GPS) that receives radio waves from satellites toperform 3-dimensional positioning of the earth.

The altitude positioning unit Y029 is a general altimeter. The altitudepositioning unit Y029 may be any various altimeters, such as analtimeter receiving radio waves to extract an altitude, an altimeterdetecting an air pressure to measure an altitude, and the like. Thealtitude positioning unit Y029 is provide to the communication deviceY02 so that an altitude can be detected even in a building where GPScannot receive radio waves.

The position correction unit Y030 is a unit that corrects a valuemeasured by the GPS to generate more accurate position information. Ingeneral, when radio waves from satellites cannot be received in a roomor the like, the GPS cannot generate correct position information.Therefore, the position correction unit Y030 includes an electroniccompass and a 6-axis acceleration sensor. The electronic compass is usedto detect a direction in which the communication device Y02 moves andthe acceleration sensor is used to detect a speed of the movement.Thereby, it is possible to correct position information generated by theGPS in a location where the GPS is difficult.

Regarding the information adding unit Y035, when the terminal deviceinformation that has been provided from the terminal device Y01 andstored into the memory Y024 is to be transmitted to the server Y04, theinformation adding unit Y035 adds (a) the product serial number of thecommunication device Y02 that is stored in the ROM Y025 in the memoryY024 and (b) the position information measured by the positioninformation determination unit Y027, to the terminal device information.This enables the server Y04 to determine which communication devicetransmits the terminal device information, where the transmittingterminal device is located, for example, and then manage the results ofthe determination. For example, if a manufacturer of the terminal devicefinds that the terminal device has a possibility of causing seriousaccidents, the information in the database of the server Y04 allows themanufacturer to determine where the terminal device is. Thereby, thepossibility of causing serious accidents can be reduced. As a result, itis possible to increase sense of safety and security of the user usingthe terminal device. Furthermore, when the communication device Y02 hasa display function as mobile phone terminals have, the above-describedterminal device information generated by the information adding unitY035 makes it possible to determine with which communication device theterminal device having a possibility of accidents can perform proximitywireless communication, and thereby display a notification of thepossibility of accidents in the terminal device on the communicationdevice Y02. Thereby, even if such a terminal device generally does nothave any display function and is not connected to a general-purposenetwork, it is possible to transmit a notification of the accidentpossibility of the terminal device to the communication device Y02 inorder to warn the user using the terminal device. As a result, it isalso possible to provide a terminal device that can increase sense ofsafety and security of the user using the terminal device.

The communication unit Y036 is a unit that communicates with the serverY04 via the Internet by using general LAN, wireless LAN, or mobile phonenetwork. Thereby, the communication unit Y036 transmits, to the serverY04, the terminal device information added with the product serialnumber and the position information of the communication device Y02 asthe communication device information. Here, the added terminal deviceinformation is further added with a MAC address and an IP address to betransmitted to the server Y04.

The server Y04 is connected to the communication device Y02 via ageneral-purpose network such as the Internet. The server Y04 includes adevice management database (DB) for managing the terminal deviceinformation.

The device management DB Y041 stores the terminal device information inassociation with the communication device information. In the devicemanagement DB Y041 according to the eleventh embodiment, thecommunication device information is managed as parent deviceinformation, and the terminal device information is managed as childdevice information in association with the parent device information.The child device information is added with the position informationgenerated by the communication device in order to manage furtherinformation indicating where the terminal device is.

As described above, in the system according to the eleventh embodiment,the terminal device information is read from the terminal device by thecommunication device using proximity wireless communication. Thecommunication device is touched to the terminal device to communicatewith the terminal device to obtain the terminal device information. Thecommunication device adds a product serial number and positioninformation of the communication device to the obtained terminal deviceinformation, and transmits the generated information to the server.Thereby, the server can manage the communication device information asparent device information in association with the terminal deviceinformation as child device information. Therefore, if a manufacturer ofthe terminal device finds that the terminal device would cause seriousaccidents, the manufacture can easily recall the terminal device ordisplay a notification of a possibility of the serious accident on adisplay unit of the communication device. As a result, it is possible toachieve traceability of the products and to provide the users of theproducts with safety and security.

FIG. 105 is a sequence diagram of processing performed by the unitsincluded in the system described with reference to FIG. 104.

First, the communication device Y02 performs polling to the terminaldevice Y01 to establish proximity wireless communication. In terms ofpower consumption amount of the communication device, it is desirable asdescribed earlier that a switch operated by a user is provided so thatthe polling is performed while the switch is being pressed or thepolling starts when the switch is pressed (SY01).

Next, the terminal device Y01 sends a response to the polling to thecommunication device Y02 in order to establish proximity wirelesscommunication with the communication device Y02 (SY02). At this timing,the position information determination unit Y027 of the communicationdevice Y02 generates position information of a current position to beused as position information of the terminal device Y01. The generationof the position information is not limited to be performed only incompletion of the polling. The position information may be generated anytime while the proximity wireless communication is established after theresponse to the polling. It is important to determine the position ofthe terminal device at a high accuracy, by generating positioninformation of the position where proximity wireless communication,which can be performed when a distance between communicating devices isonly several centimeters, is established.

After the establishment of the proximity wireless communication at SY02,mutual authentication between the terminal device Y01 and thecommunication device Y02 is performed using general public keycryptography, and also key sharing is temporarily performed to sharecryptography keys generated by the terminal device Y01 and thecommunication device Y02 between the devices (SY03). After that, whilethe proximity wireless communication is established, data on thecommunication path is encrypted using the cryptography keys tocommunicate between the devices. As a result, tapping of the data can beprevented.

After completing the key sharing, the terminal device Y01 transmits theterminal device information recorded on the memory Y014 of the terminaldevice Y01, to the communication device Y02 (SY04).

When the communication device Y02 receives the terminal deviceinformation from the terminal device Y01, the communication device Y02stores the received terminal device information into the memory Y024 ofthe communication device Y02 (SY05).

When the communication device Y02 completes receiving of the terminaldevice information from the terminal device Y01, the communicationdevice Y02 issues a connection request to the server Y04 (SY06).

The server Y04 responds to the connection request of SY06 to establishcommunication with the communication device Y02 (SY07).

After establishing communication between the communication device Y02and the server Y04, the communication device Y02 adds the communicationdevice information of the communication device Y02 to the terminaldevice information of the terminal device Y01 to be transmitted to theserver Y04 (SY08). Here, the communication device information includes,for example, a product serial number of the communication device Y02,position information of the communication device Y02 when proximitywireless communication with the terminal device Y01 is established, ane-mail address of the user registered in the communication device Y02(if any), a connection account to the server Y04 registered in thecommunication device Y02 (if any), and the like.

After adding the communication device information to the terminal deviceinformation at SY08, then the communication device Y02 transmits theterminal device information added with the communication deviceinformation to the server Y04 (SY09).

The server Y04 registers the terminal device information added with thecommunication device information received from the communication deviceY02, into the device management DB Y041. Thereby, the processing iscompleted.

Thereby, the server Y04 can manage pieces of information regardingdevices for each house, by managing information of each terminal deviceY01, which establishes proximity wireless communication with thecommunication device Y02 touching the terminal device Y01, inassociation with identification information (product serial number orthe like) of the communication device Y02. In addition, for the positioninformation registered as information of a position at which theterminal device is equipped, position information indicating a positionwhere proximity wireless communication is established between thecommunication device Y02 and the terminal device Y01 is used. Since theproximity wireless communication according to the eleventh embodiment isperformed at common High Frequency (HF) of 13.56 MHz, the communicationis possible when a distance between communicating devices is withinseveral centimeters. Therefore, if the position information detected inestablishing proximity wireless communication is set to be positioninformation of the terminal device, a maximum error is severalcentimeters which results in assuring an enough accuracy to achievetraceability of the products.

FIG. 106 is a schematic diagram illustrating a group of pieces ofinformation of terminal devices managed in association with informationof the communication device Y02 in the device management DB Y041 of theserver Y04.

When the user intends to perform user registration or the like for aterminal device using the communication device Y02 in purchasing theterminal device, the following processing is performed. The user equipsthe terminal device and touches the terminal device by the communicationdevice Y02. Thereby, terminal device information of the terminalinformation is provided to the communication device Y02 using proximitywireless communication. The communication device Y02 adds thecommunication device information of the communication device Y02 to theterminal device information in order to be transmitted to the serverY04. In receiving the terminal device information added with thecommunication device information, the server Y04 manages the terminaldevice information as child device information and the communicationdevice information as parent device information in association with eachother in the device management DB. For example, in the device managementDB, terminal device information of a terminal device 1 (for example, amicrowave Y052), terminal device information of a terminal device 2 (forexample, a washing machine Y053), and terminal device information of aterminal device 3 (for example, a TV Y054), all of which are touched bya communication device Y051, are managed in association with a productserial number of the communication device Y051. Each of the terminaldevice information includes whereabout information (longitude, latitude,altitude, and the like) and use status information (use histories, errorcodes, use time periods, and the like). Thereby, the server Y04 canmanage pieces of information of devices for each house, because thecommunication device Y051 touches these terminal devices. As a result,traceability of the terminal devices can be achieved.

Furthermore, the communication device generates position informationwhen proximity wireless communication with the terminal device isestablished and uses the generated position information as positioninformation of the terminal device. Therefore, it is possible toregister a position of the terminal device with an error of severalcentimeters which is a distance capable for proximity wirelesscommunication between devices. Since the GPS in the communication deviceis used to generate the position information of the terminal device,each terminal device does not have a GPS, thereby reducing a cost.

FIG. 107 is a schematic diagram illustrating display screens of thedisplay unit of the communication device Y02 when the communicationdevice Y02 touches the terminal device Y01.

First, the description is given for the situation where thecommunication device Y02 touches the terminal device Y01 to registerinformation of the terminal device Y01 into the server Y04.

When the user operates the communication device Y02 to start up areader/writer application of the communication device Y02, thecommunication device Y02 displays, on a display screen, a messagepersuading the user to touch the terminal device Y01 for proximitywireless communication (Y060).

When the communication device Y02 touches the terminal device Y01,proximity wireless communication is established between the devices. Thecommunication device Y02 reads terminal device information of theterminal device Y01 from the terminal device Y01, generates positioninformation of a current position, and provides the pieces ofinformation to the memory in which the pieces of information aretemporarily stored. Then, the communication device Y02 establishescommunication with the server Y04 and transmits the terminal deviceinformation added with communication device information of thecommunication device Y02 to the server Y04. The server Y04 determineswhether or not the terminal device information has already beenregistered in the device management DB. If it is determined that theterminal device information has not yet been registered in the devicemanagement DB, then the server Y04 causes the communication device Y02to display, on the display unit of the communication device Y02, amessage asking the user whether or not to register information of theterminal device Y01 (Y061).

Next, when the user selects to register the information of the terminaldevice Y01, the server Y04 causes the communication device Y02 todisplay a message asking the user whether or not to register positioninformation of the terminal device. When the user selects to registerthe position information, the server Y04 registers the positioninformation associated with the terminal device information transmittedfrom the communication device Y02 to the server Y04, into the devicemanagement DB of the server Y04 as position information of the terminaldevice Y01 (Y062).

Next, the description is given for the situation where the positioninformation of the terminal device Y01 is different from the positioninformation registered in the device management DB of the server Y04.

When the user operates the communication device Y02 to start up areader/writer application of the communication device Y02, thecommunication device Y02 displays, on the display screen, a messagepersuading the user to touch the terminal device Y01 by thecommunication device Y02 to perform proximity wireless communication(Y063).

When the communication device Y02 touches the terminal device Y01,proximity wireless communication is established between the devices. Thecommunication device Y02 reads terminal device information of theterminal device Y01 from the terminal device Y01, generates positioninformation, and transmits the terminal device information added withcommunication device information of the communication device Y02 to theserver Y04. The server Y04 compares (a) a product serial number of theterminal device which is included in the received terminal deviceinformation to (b) a product serial number registered in the devicemanagement DB, in order to examine whether or not information of thetouched terminal device is already registered in the server Y04. Inaddition, the server Y04 extracts the position information from thereceived communication device information, and examines whether or notthe extracted position information is identical to the positioninformation registered in the device management DB. Since the positioninformation has an error, of course, the determination is made tocompare the position information to a threshold value that has the orderof several centimeters (in other words, the threshold value is a valuecorresponding to a distance between devices capable for proximitywireless communication). If it is determined that the extracted positioninformation is different from the registered position information, theserver Y04 causes the communication device Y02 to display, on thedisplay unit, a message notifying the user of the result of thedetermination (Y064).

Then, the communication device Y02 displays, on the display unit, amessage asking the user whether or not to update the positioninformation of the terminal device Y01 to information of a currentposition of the terminal device Y01 (Y065).

If the user selects to update the position information, thecommunication device Y02 registers the position information generated bytouching the terminal device Y01 by the communication device Y02, intothe device management DB of the server Y04 as new position informationof the terminal device Y01.

Therefore, according to the eleventh embodiment, even if the positioninformation that has been registered is changed because the terminaldevice Y01 is moved and equipped at a different location, it is possibleto update the position information to new position information that isgenerated by touching the terminal device Y01 by the communicationdevice Y02. Thereby, an accuracy of traceability of the terminal deviceY01 can be improved.

Twelfth Embodiment

FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating a system according to the twelfthembodiment of the present invention.

The system according to the twelfth embodiment of the present inventionincludes a home network N100, a plurality of networked productsillustrated in FIG. 111, a mobile device N20 illustrated in FIG. 109,and a registration server N40 illustrated in FIG. 110. The home networkN100 is provided in a house illustrated in FIG. 111. Each of thenetworked products includes a RF-ID unit N10 illustrated in FIG. 108.

FIG. 108 is a functional block diagram of the RF-ID unit N10 accordingto the twelfth embodiment of the present invention.

Referring to FIG. 108, the RF-ID unit N10 includes an antenna N11, apower supply unit N12, a memory N13, a reproducing unit N14, and a datatransfer unit N15. The antenna N11 is used for proximity wirelesscommunication. The power supply unit N12 is supplied with power via theantenna N11. The memory N13 is a nonvolatile memory in which pieces ofindividual identification information are stored. The reproducing unitN14 reproduces data registered in the memory N13. The data transfer unitN15 transmits the data registered in the memory N13 into the outside viathe antenna N11.

The memory N13 stores UID N13A, a part number N13B, server specificinformation N13, and an operation program N13D. The UID N13A is used toidentify a product having the RF-ID unit N10. The part number N13B isused to identify a part number of the product having the RF-ID unit N10.The server specific information N13C is used to specify the registrationserver N40 illustrated in FIG. 110. The operation program N13D is to beexecuted by the mobile device N20 illustrated in FIG. 109.

FIG. 109 is a functional block diagram of the mobile device N20according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention.

Referring to FIG. 109, the mobile device N20 includes a RF-IDreader/writer N21, a RF-ID storage unit N22, a program execution unitN23, a data processing unit N24, a memory unit N25, a display unit N26,a communication I/F unit N27, a transmission unit N28, a receiving unitN29, a communication unit N30, a GPS N31, a 6-axis sensor N32, aposition information storage unit N33, and a CPU N34. The RF-IDreader/writer N21 receives data from the RF-ID unit N10 illustrated inFIG. 108. The RF-ID storage unit N22 holds the data provided from theRF-ID reader/writer N21. The program execution unit N23 executes aprogram included in the data. The data processing unit N24 performs dataprocessing for image data included in the data. The memory unit N25holds the image data processed by the data processing unit N24. Thedisplay unit N26 displays the image temporarily stored in the memoryunit N25. The communication I/F unit N27 connects the mobile device N20to other device via a general-purpose network. The transmission unit N28transmits data to the outside via the communication I/F unit N27. Thereceiving unit N29 receives data from the outside via the communicationI/F unit N27. The communication unit N30 communicates with other devicevia a general-purpose network by using the communication I/F unit N27.The GPS N31 measures a position of the mobile device N20 to generateabsolute position information of the mobile device N20. The 6-axissensor N32 measures a position of the mobile device N20 to generaterelative position information of the mobile device N20. The positioninformation storage unit N33 holds results of the measurement of the GPSN31 and the 6-axis sensor N32. The CPU N 34 analyzes the positioninformation stored in the position information storage unit N33.

FIG. 110 is a functional block diagram of the registration server N40according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention.

Referring to FIG. 110, the registration server N40 includes acommunication I/F unit N41, a transmission unit N42, a receiving unitN43, a communication unit N44, a product information management unitN45, an image data storage unit N46, a program storage unit N47, aposition information generation unit N48, and a product control unitN49. The communication I/F unit N41 connects the registration server N40to other device via a general-purpose network. The transmission unit N42transmits data to the outside via the communication I/F unit N41. Thereceiving unit N43 receives data from the outside via the communicationI/F unit N41. The communication unit N44 communicates with other devicevia a general-purpose network by using the communication I/F unit N41.The product information management unit N45 manages product informationreceived from the communication I/F unit N41. The image data storageunit N46 holds image data to be transmitted to the mobile device N20.The program storage unit N47 holds a program to be transmitted to themobile device N20. The position information generation unit N48generates a map indicating position relationships among the productshaving the RF-ID unit N10, by combining the pieces of productinformation stored in the product information management unit N45. Theproduct control unit N49 controls the products having the RF-ID unitsN10 by using the pieces of product information stored in the productinformation management unit N45 and information of a current position ofthe mobile device N20.

The twelfth embodiment differs from the other embodiments in that theproducts in the house are controlled based on a product map generatedfrom (a) the position information of the mobile device N20 and (b)pieces of position information of the products having the RF-ID unitsN10 illustrated in FIG. 108.

FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating an example of an arrangement of thenetworked products according to the twelfth embodiment of the presentinvention.

Referring to the arrangement diagram of FIG. 111, in the house, thereare: a TV N10A, a BD recorder N10B, an air conditioner N10C, and a FFheater N10K in a living room on the first floor; an air conditioner N10Dand a fire alarm N10E in an European-style room on the first floor; anair conditioner N10F and a fire alarm N10G in a Japanese-style room onthe first floor; a TV N10I and an air conditioner N10J on the secondfloor; and a solar panel N10H on a roof.

As described earlier, FIG. 112 is the diagram illustrating an example ofthe system according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 112 is a configuration of home appliances in the arrangement ofFIG. 111.

This system includes: products from the TV N10A to the FF heater N10K;the mobile device N20 illustrated in FIG. 109 and on the far right sideof FIG. 112; the registration server N40 illustrated in FIG. 110 and atthe bottom of FIG. 112; a home network N100; and an external networkN101. Each of the products N10A to N10K has the RF-ID unit N10illustrated in FIG. 108 and a communication I/F unit N18 to communicatewith other products and devices via a general-purpose network. The homenetwork N100 connects the products N10A to N10K and the mobile deviceN20 to one another. The external network N101 connects the home networkN100 to the registration server N40.

The following describes an example of a method of registeringinformation regarding a product having the RF-ID unit N10 into theregistration server N40 with reference to FIGS. 113 to 118.

FIG. 113 is a sequence diagram for registering information of the TVN10A into the registration server N40.

First, when a user moves the mobile device N20 to bring the RF-IDreader/writer N21 of the mobile device N20 to proximity of an antennaN11 of the TV N10A, the RF-ID reader/writer N21 supplies power to apower supply unit N12 of the TV N10A via the antenna N11 to providepower to each unit in the RF-ID unit N10 ((1) in FIG. 113).

The reproducing unit N14 in the RF-ID unit N10 generates productinformation. The product information includes the UID N13A, the partnumber ID N13B, the server specific information N13C, and the operationprogram N13D stored in the memory N13.

FIGS. 114A and 114B are tables illustrating examples of a structure ofthe product information.

The product information illustrated in FIG. 114A includes: part numberID that is a part number of the TV N10A (including color information);UID that is a product serial number of the TV N10A; server specificinformation including an address, a login ID, and a password regardingthe registration server N40; and an operation program to be executed bythe program execution unit N23 in the mobile device N20.

The data transfer unit N15 in the RF-ID unit N10 modulates the productinformation and transmits the modulated product information to the RF-IDreader/writer N21 of the mobile device N20 via the antenna N11 ((2) inFIG. 113).

The RF-ID reader/writer N21 in the mobile device N20 receives theproduct information and stores the received product information into theRF-ID storage unit N22.

The program execution unit N23 executes the operation program includedin the product information stored in the RF-ID storage unit N22.

Here, the program execution unit N23 executes the operation program to“generate server registration information to be transmitted to theaddress of the registration server N40 which is designated in theproduct information”.

FIG. 114B is a table illustrating another example of a structure of theproduct information.

The server registration information illustrated in FIG. 114B includes:part number ID that is a part number of the TV N10A (including colorinformation); UID that is a product serial number of the TV N10A; serverspecific information including a login ID and a password regarding theregistration server N40; and position information of the mobile deviceN20.

Next, the position information of the mobile device N20 is explained.

The GPS N31 in the mobile device N20 constantly operates while themobile device N20 is active. Detected results of the GPS N31 are storedin the position information storage unit N33.

The 6-axis sensor N32 operates when the mobile device N20 is outside anarea in which the GPS N31 can perform positioning. The 6-axis sensor N32stores detected results into the position information storage unit N33.

The program execution unit N23 generates position information to beincluded in the server registration information, from the resultsdetected by the GPS N31 and the 6-axis sensor N32 which are stored inthe position information storage unit N33.

From the generated position information and information stored in theRF-ID storage unit N22, the program execution unit N23 generates theserver registration information as illustrated in FIG. 114B.

Next, the communication unit N30 designates an address of theregistration server N40 which is recorded on the RF-ID storage unit N22,to be a destination address of the server registration information.

The transmission unit N28 transmits the generated server registrationinformation via the communication I/F unit N27 ((3) in FIG. 113).

The receiving unit N43 of the registration server N40 receives theserver registration information via the communication I/F unit N41.

The communication unit N44 confirms the login ID and the password in theserver registration information.

If the login ID and the password are correct, the registration serverN40 stores, into the product information management unit N45, the partnumber ID, the UID, and the position information included in the serverregistration information.

FIG. 115A is a table illustrating an example of a structure of productinformation regarding the TV N10A which is registered on the productinformation management unit N45.

The product information includes the part number ID, the UID, and theposition information. The position information includes latitude,longitude, and altitude.

Next, when the registration of the product information of the TV N10A iscompleted, the registration server N40 generates a server registrationcompletion notification. The server registration completion notificationincludes (a) image data that is previously stored in the image datastorage unit N46 and (b) the operation program stored in the programstorage unit N47. Then, the communication unit N44 in the registrationserver N40 designates an address of the mobile device N20 to be adestination of the server registration completion notification.

The transmission unit N42 transmits the generated server registrationcompletion notification via the communication I/F unit N41 ((4) in FIG.113).

The receiving unit N29 of the registration server N20 receives theserver registration completion notification via the communication I/Funit N27.

The communication unit N30 in the mobile device N20 confirms thedestination address of the server registration completion notification,and provides the received server registration completion notification tothe program execution unit N23.

The program execution unit N23 executes the operation program includedin the server registration completion notification.

Here, the program execution unit N23 executes the operation program to“display image data on the display unit N26.”

In more detail, the program execution unit N23 instructs the dataprocessing unit N24 to perform processing for the image data.

The data processing unit N24 thereby performs data processing for theimage data. For example, if downloaded image data is compressed, thedata processing unit N24 decompresses the image data. If the image datais encrypted, the data processing unit N24 decrypts the image data. Thedata processing unit N24 may also arrange the downloaded image data inan image display style based on an image display style sheet.

In completing the data processing, the data processing unit N24 providesthe processed image data to the memory unit N25 in which the processedimage data is temporarily stored.

The display unit N26 displays the image data stored in the memory unitN25.

In this example, the image data accumulated in the memory unit N25 isused to notify a user of that registration of information of acorresponding product is completed without any problem.

FIG. 115B is a table illustrating an example of pieces of productinformation managed in the product information management unit N45 ofthe registration server N40, after pieces of information regarding theother products from the BD recorder N10B to the FF heater N10K areregistered in the registration server N40 in the same manner asdescribed for the TV N10A.

Pieces of product information for which registration processing isperformed in the house of FIG. 111 are managed in the same table. Inthis example, products registered using the same mobile device N20 aredetermined as products for which registration processing is performed inthe same house.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart of an example of processing performed by theRF-ID unit N10 to perform product registration.

First, the RF-ID unit N10 of a target product waits for power supplyfrom the mobile device N20 (N001).

If the RF-ID unit N10 receives power from the mobile device N20, thenthe processing proceeds to N002. Otherwise, the processing returns toN001.

At N002, the RF-ID unit N10 generates product information includinginformation stored in the memory N13. Then, at N003, the RF-ID unit N10transmits the product information from the antenna N11 to the mobiledevice N20. Thereby, the processing is completed.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart of an example of processing performed by themobile device N20 to perform product registration.

First, at N001, the RF-ID reader/writer N21 of the mobile device N20supplies power to the RF-ID unit N10 of the target product.

Next, the mobile device N20 waits for product information from the RF-IDunit N10 of the target product (N005).

If the mobile device N20 receives product information from the RF-IDunit N10, then the processing proceeds to N006. Otherwise, theprocessing returns to N004 to supply power to the RF-ID unit N10 again.

At N006, the mobile device N20 analyzes the received product informationand thereby executes an operation program included in the productinformation.

At N007, the mobile device N20 determines a position of the mobiledevice N20 itself.

At N008, the mobile device N20 generates server registration informationincluding information of the determined position. At N009, the mobiledevice N20 transmits the generated server registration information tothe registration server N40 via the communication I/F unit N27.

Next, the mobile device N20 waits for a server registration completionnotification from the registration server N40 (N010).

If the mobile device N20 receives the server registration completionnotification from the registration server N40, then the processingproceeds to N011.

At N011, the mobile device N20 analyzes the server registrationcompletion notification. Then, at N012, the mobile device N20 displays,on the display unit N26, image data included in the server registrationcompletion notification. Thereby, the processing is completed.

FIG. 118 is a flowchart of an example of processing performed by theregistration server N40 to perform product registration.

First, the registration server N40 waits for server registrationinformation from the mobile device N20 (N013).

If the registration server N40 receives the server registrationinformation from the mobile device N20, then the processing proceeds toN014. Otherwise, the processing returns to N013.

At N014, the registration server N40 analyzes the received serverregistration information to determine whether or not a login name and apassword included in the server registration information are correct. Ifthe login name and the password are correct, then, at N015, theregistration server N40 stores the product information into the productinformation management unit N45.

At N016, the registration server N40 generates a server registrationcompletion notification that includes an operation program and imagedata. At N017, the registration server N40 transmits the generatedserver registration completion notification from the communication I/Funit N41 to the mobile device N20. Thereby, the processing is completed.

Next, the following describes an example of a method of controlling aproduct having the RF-ID unit N10 by using the position information ofthe mobile device N20, with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120A to 120C.

FIG. 119 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of controllingpower for the air conditioner N10J and the TV N10A, when the mobiledevice N20 is moved from the first floor to the second floor.

The CPU N34 in the mobile device N20 monitors the position informationstored in the position information storage unit N33 to determine whetheror not predetermined conditions are satisfied. If the predeterminedconditions are satisfied, then the CPU N34 generates positionalinformation including position information that is information of acurrent position of the mobile device N20 (hereinafter, referred to as“current position information”.

FIG. 120A is a table illustrating an example of a structure of thepositional information.

The positional information includes (a) second server login ID and asecond server login password which are regarding the registration serverN40 and (b) current position information. The second server login ID andthe second server login password are previously obtained in purchasingthe product and stored in a memory (not shown). The current positioninformation is obtained from the position information storage unit N33.

The communication unit N30 illustrated in FIG. 109 designates, as adestination of the positional information, an address of theregistration server N40 in which information of the product isregistered.

The transmission unit N28 transmits the positional information to theregistration server N40 via the communication I/F unit N27 ((1) in FIG.119).

The receiving unit N43 in the registration server N40 receives thepositional information via the communication I/F unit N41.

The communication unit N44 in the registration server N40 confirms thesecond server login ID and the second server login password in thereceived positional information.

If the second server login ID and the second server login password arecorrect, then the communication unit N44 provides the positionalinformation to the product control unit N49 illustrated in FIG. 110.

The product control unit N49 provides the second server login ID to theposition information generation unit N48 illustrated in FIG. 110.

According to instructions from the product control unit N49, theposition information generation unit N48 obtains pieces of productinformation as illustrated in FIG. 115B from the product informationmanagement unit N45 based on the second server login ID. Then, theposition information generation unit N48 generates a product map frompieces of position information of the respective products. The productmap shows positions of the products in the house illustrated in FIG.111. The position information generation unit N48 provides the generatedproduct map to the product control unit N49.

FIG. 121 illustrates an example of the product map generated by theposition information generation unit N48.

The product map is a 3D map (or 3D product map) in which illustrationsof the products are arranged at positions based on the respective piecesof position information.

The product control unit N49 controls the products from the TV N10A tothe FF heater N10K, by using (a) the current position information of themobile device N20 included in the positional information and (b) theproduct map (or home appliance map) generated by the positioninformation generation unit N48.

In this example, the product control unit N49 turns ON a product locatedmost close to the current position information received from the mobiledevice N20. Here, the product control unit N49 generates product controlinformation including an instruction for turning ON the air conditionerN10J.

FIG. 120B is a table illustrating an example of a structure of firstproduct control information.

The first product control information includes: part number ID of theair conditioner N10J; UID of the air conditioner N10J; and a productcontrol command for turning ON the air conditioner N10J.

The communication unit N44 designates an address of the mobile deviceN20 to be a designation of the first product control information.

The transmission unit N42 transmits the first product controlinformation to the mobile device N20 via the communication I/F unit N41((2) in FIG. 119).

After receiving the first product control information, the mobile deviceN20 transfers the first product control information to the airconditioner N10J based on the part number ID and the UID in the firstproduct control information ((2)′ in FIG. 119).

When the air conditioner N10J receives the first product controlinformation from the communication I/F unit N18, the air conditionerN10J turns ON a power source of the air conditioner N10J if the powersource is OFF.

Next, the product control unit N49 turns OFF a product located thefarthest from the current position information received from the mobiledevice N20. Here, the product control unit N49 generates product controlinformation including an instruction for turning OFF the TV N10A.

FIG. 120C is a table illustrating an example of a structure of secondproduct control information.

The second product control information includes: part number ID of theTV N10A; UID of the TV N10A; and a product control command for turningOFF the TV N10A.

The communication unit N44 designates an address of the mobile deviceN20 to be a designation of the second product control information.

The transmission unit N42 transmits the second product controlinformation to the mobile device N20 via the communication I/F unit N41((2) in FIG. 119).

After receiving the second product control information, the mobiledevice N20 transfers the second product control information to the TVN10A based on the part number ID and the UID in the second productcontrol information ((3)′ in FIG. 119).

When the TV N10A receives the second product control information fromthe communication I/F unit N18, the TV N10A turns OFF a power source ofthe TV N10A if the power source is ON.

As described above, according to the twelfth embodiment of the presentinvention, proximity wireless communication of RF-ID technology andposition information are used to manage, in the registration server N40,positions of products each having the RF-ID unit N10.

Thereby, it is possible to automatically control the products accordingto a current position of the mobile device N20.

Regarding the position information, information detected by the 6-axissensor N32 (motion sensor) that measures relative position informationis used as position information. Therefore, it is possible to update theposition information by using the detected results of the 6-axis sensorN32 when the mobile device N20 is outside an area in which the GPS N31can perform positioning. As a result, correct position information canbe obtained even outside the area.

It should be noted that the mobile device N20 according to the twelfthembodiment has been described to have the GPS N31 and the 6-axis sensorN32, but the mobile device N20 is not limited to the above-describedstructure. For example, the mobile device N20 may have only the 6-axissensor N32. In this aspect, the product information management unit N45in the registration server N40 stores pieces of relative positioninformation of products which are relative to a reference point(position information) of the TV N10A which is first registered asillustrated in FIG. 122. Here, a product map generated by the positioninformation generation unit N48 has axes of an x-coordinate, ay-coordinate, and a z-coordinate as illustrated in FIG. 123.

It should also be noted that it has been described in the twelfthembodiment that (a) part number ID and UID of a target product which arestored in the RF-ID unit N10 of the target product and (b) positioninformation of the mobile device N20 are registered to the registrationserver N40, but the present invention is not limited to the above. Forexample, if the registration server N40 receives again serverregistration information regarding a product for which registration hasalready been completed, the registration server N40 may performprocessing as illustrated in FIG. 124.

FIG. 124 is a table illustrating examples of an accuracy identifier,part number ID, and processing.

The following describes FIG. 124. Referring to FIG. 124, the tableincludes: (a) accuracy identifiers for identifying an accuracy ofposition information; (b) part number ID in association with eachaccuracy identifier; and (c) processing to be performed when positioninformation in re-received server registration information is differentfrom position information registered in the product informationmanagement unit N45.

If the registration server N40 determines, based on the part number IDand the UID included in the re-received server registration information,that the position information has already been registered in the productinformation management unit N45, then the registration server N40 checksthe part number ID. If the part number ID indicates a TV, a BD recorder,or an FF heater, the registration server N40 updates the positioninformation in the product information management unit N45 to theposition information in the re-received server registration information.

If the part number ID indicates an air conditioner, a solar panel, or afire alarm, then the registration server N40 notifies the mobile deviceN20 of the position information stored in the product informationmanagement unit N45. The mobile device N20 thereby corrects currentposition information of the mobile device N20 based on the positioninformation received from the registration server N40.

It should also be noted that FIG. 124 shows the two kinds of accuracyidentifiers, but the accuracy identifiers are not limited to the twokinds. It is possible to set more than two kinds of accuracy identifiersfor respective different processing.

It should also be noted that the product control unit N49 in the twelfthembodiment is included in the registration server N40, but the presentinvention is not limited to the structure. For example, the productcontrol unit N49 may be included in the mobile device N20 so that theproduct control unit N49 obtains a product map from the registrationserver N40 to control products. Besides in the mobile device N20, theproduct control unit N49 may also be included in a home server (notillustrated) that is connected to the hone network N100. In this aspect,the mobile device N20 transmits position information to the home serverand obtains a product map from the home server.

It should be noted that the mobile device N20 according to the twelfthembodiment is connected to the registration server N40 via the homenetwork N100 and the external network N101 by using the communicationI/F unit (general-purpose I/F unit) N27, but the present invention isnot limited to the above. For example, the mobile device N20 may have afunction of serving as a mobile phone so that the mobile device N20 canbe connected to the registration server N40 via at least a mobile phonenetwork (for example, Long Term Evolution (LTE)) by using an interfaceconnectable to the mobile phone network, in stead of the communicationI/F unit N27 (see FIG. 125). Furthermore, the mobile device N20 may havean interface connectable to a circuit network such as WiMAX so as to beconnected to the registration server N40 via at least the WiMAX network.Any other networks can be used to connect the mobile device N20 to theregistration server N40.

It should also be noted that, in the twelfth embodiment, the product mapgenerated by the position information generation unit N48 is used todetermine how to control products, but the present invention is notlimited to the structure. For example, image data of the product mapgenerated by the position information generation unit N48 is transmittedto the mobile device N20 that displays the image data on the displayunit N26.

It should also be noted that, in the twelfth embodiment, the positioninformation generation unit N48 generates the product map based on theinformation illustrated in FIG. 115B, but the present invention is notlimited to the above. For example, pieces product information ofproducts located near the position information of the mobile device N20in the same house are detected from the product information managementunit N45, and then used to generate a product map regarding nearbyproducts in the house. In this aspect, the product control unit N49performs product control by combining the product map of FIG. 121 andthe product map of nearby products. For instance, it is assumed in thetwelfth embodiment that the TV N10A, which is the farthest from themobile device N20, is turned OFF but there is a solar panel near themobile device N20 in the house. Under the assumption, the productcontrol unit N49 controls the TV N10A to be turned ON, for example.

It should also be noted that, in the twelfth embodiment, the productinformation management unit N45 in the registration server N40 storespart number ID, UID, and position information of each product, but thepresent invention is not limited to the above. For example, it is alsopossible that a power state (ON or OFF) is obtained in real time fromeach product via the communication I/F unit N18 of the product, and thenmanaged in the product information management unit N45. The productcontrol unit N49 thereby controls power of the TV N10A located thefarthest from the mobile device N20 to be kept ON when the predeterminednumber of products are powered OFF, although it has been described inthe above description that the product control unit N49 turns OFF the TVN10A.

It should also be noted that, in the twelfth embodiment, the productcontrol unit N49 turns OFF a product located the farthest from themobile device N20 and turns ON a product closest to the mobile deviceN20. However, the present invention is not limited to the above.

The product control unit N49 may control power to be turned ON or OFFfor a plurality of products based on the position information of themobile device N20.

It should also be noted that, in the twelfth embodiment, the productcontrol unit N49 turns OFF a product located the farthest from themobile device N20 and turns ON a product closest to the mobile deviceN20. However, the present invention is not limited to the above. Forexample, it is also possible that the CPU N34 in the mobile device N20stores position information as a movement history into a memory (notillustrated), and regularly provides the movement history to theregistration server N40. In this aspect, the registration server N40estimates, from the movement histories of the mobile device N20, whichproduct is located in which room or which floor, and manages results ofthe estimation. It is further possible that the product control unit N49controls power to be turned ON or OFF for each product in the same housebased on the estimation results. For example, if it is estimated fromthe movement histories that the TV N10A and the air conditioner N10C arelocated in the same room, the product control unit N49 turns OFF the airconditioner N10C when the TV N10A is turned OFF.

In addition to the moving histories, it is also possible to obtain atime of switching ON or OFF each product, thereby estimating whichproduct is in the same room or the same floor.

It should also be noted that, in the twelfth embodiment, the productinformation management unit N45 manages the product informationillustrated in FIG. 115A, 115B, or 112, and the position informationgeneration unit N48 generates the product map illustrated in FIG. 121 or123. However, the present invention is not limited to the above. Forexample, it is also possible that image data of a room arrangementcreated by the user is transmitted from the mobile device N20 to theregistration server N40, and therefore managed by the productinformation management unit N45. In this aspect, the positioninformation generation unit N48 generates a product map as illustratedin FIG. 111, by combining (a) product information illustrated in FIG.115A, 115B, or 112 and (b) the image data of the room arrangement.

Here, private information such as the image data of room arrangement maybe applied with encryption different from encryption employed for theproduct information, and then transmitted from the mobile device N20 tothe registration server N40.

It is also possible that private information such as the image data ofroom arrangement is transmitted to a server different from the serverreceiving the product information, and a product map is generated withreference to the different server when the registration server N40generates the product map.

It should also be noted that the twelfth embodiment may be combined withany other embodiments. For example, it is possible that the function ofthe terminal device Y01 according to the eleventh embodiment is providedto the RF-ID unit N10 according to the twelfth embodiment and thefunction of the communication device Y02 according to the eleventhembodiment is provided to the mobile device N20 according to the twelfthembodiment. Thereby, the series of processes including the polling, themutual authentication, and the key sharing illustrated in FIG. 105 canbe performed prior to the product registration processing of FIG. 113.Any combination of the embodiments is within a scope of the presentinvention.

It should also be noted that the units in the above-describedembodiments may be typically implemented into a Large Scale Integration(LSI) which is an integrated circuit. These may be integratedseparately, or a part or all of them may be integrated into a singlechip. Here, the integrated circuit is referred to as a LSI, but theintegrated circuit can be called an IC, a system LSI, a super LSI or anultra LSI depending on their degrees of integration. The technique ofintegrated circuit is not limited to the LSI, and it may be implementedas a dedicated circuit or a general-purpose processor. It is alsopossible to use a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) that can beprogrammed after manufacturing the LSI, or a reconfigurable processor inwhich connection and setting of circuit cells inside the LSI can bereconfigured.

Furthermore, if due to the progress of semiconductor technologies ortheir derivations, new technologies for integrated circuits appear to bereplaced with the LSIs, it is, of course, possible to use suchtechnologies to implement the functional blocks as an integratedcircuit. For example, biotechnology and the like can be applied to theabove implementation.

Thirteenth Embodiment

FIG. 126 is a diagram illustrating an example of an entire systemaccording to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention.

Referring to FIG. 126, the system according to the thirteenth embodimentincludes a RF-ID device O50, a mobile device O60, a first server O101,and a second server O103.

The RF-ID device O50 is a device having a NFC function. The RF-ID deviceO50 is included in electronic products such as refrigerators,microwaves, washing machines, TVs, and recording devices. The RF-IDdevice O50 stores, as product information of a corresponding product,(a) a product serial number that is ID for identifying the product, (b)use history information of the product, (d) error information, and thelike into a memory of the product.

The mobile device O060 has a NFC function communicable with the NFCfunction of the RF-ID unit O50 by proximity wireless communication. Themobile device O60 also has a reader/writer function of reading productinformation from the RF-ID O50. In addition, the mobile device O60 is aportable device such as a mobile phone terminal and a remote controllerterminal for TV.

The first server O101 is a server connected to the mobile device O60 viaa general-purpose network such as the Internet in order to communicatewith the mobile device O60. The first server O101 has an internaldatabase (DB) in which pieces of RF-ID information read from the RF-IDdevices O50 to the mobile device O60 are accumulated.

The second server O103 is a server connected to the first server O101via a general-purpose network such as the Internet in order tocommunicate with the first server O101. The second server O103 has aninternal database (DB) in which pieces of building information regardingthe RF-ID devices O50 are accumulated. Each of the building informationis coordinates of a building in which the corresponding RF-ID device O50is located.

The RF-ID device O50 includes product ID O50, a first server URL O52,service ID O53, and an accuracy identifier O54.

The product ID O51 is ID for identifying a product having the RF-IDdevice O50. For example, the product ID O51 is a part number (includingcolor information) or a product serial number of the product.

The first server URL O52 is address information of the first serverO101.

The service ID O53 is ID for identifying a product classification suchas a TV, an air conditioner, or a refrigerator.

The accuracy identifier O54 is information indicating reliability ofposition information provided from a product with the RF-ID device 10which has the product ID

As described above, if the RF-ID device O50 according to the thirteenthembodiment is moved into proximity of the mobile device O60 to be ableto perform proximity wireless communication, the RF-ID device O50 cantransmit, to the mobile device O60, the product serial number, the firstserver URL, the service ID, and the accuracy identifier which are storedin the memory.

Next, the mobile device O60 according to the thirteenth embodiment isdescribed.

The mobile device O60 includes an antenna O61, a RF-ID reader/writerO62, a coordinate accuracy identification information O63, a CPU O64, aprogram execution unit O65, a data processing unit O66, a memory unitO67, a display unit O68 d, a communication antenna O68, a transmissionunit O70, a receiving unit O71, a communication unit O72, a positioninformation storage unit O73, a RF-ID storage unit O74, a RF-IDdetection unit O75, a URL unit O76, a reproducing unit O77, a relativeposition calculation unit O78, a coordinate information sending unitO79, a recording unit O80, a building coordinate information output unitO81, a registered-coordinate unit O82, a determination unit O83, areference coordinate unit O84, a position information output unit O85, aposition information unit O86, a direction information unit O87, amagnetic compass O88, a magnetic sensor O88 a for detectinggeomagnetism, a magnetic sensor O88 b for detecting geomagnetism, amagnetic sensor O88 c for detecting geomagnetism, a geomagnetismcorrection unit O89, a satellite antenna O90, a position informationcalculation unit O91, position information O92, position informationcorrection unit O93, a direction information correction unit O94, anangular velocity sensor O95, an angular velocity sensor O96, an angularvelocity sensor O97, an acceleration sensor O98, an acceleration sensorO99, an acceleration sensor O100, an integrator O105, an integratorO106, and an absolute coordinate calculation unit O107.

The antenna O61 supplies power and provides operation clock towards anyRF-ID devices so as to search for a RF-ID device with which the mobiledevice O60 can perform proximity wireless communication. In receiving aresponse, the antenna O61 establishes proximity wireless communicationwith the responding RF-ID device O50 to receive modulated informationfrom the RF-ID device O50.

The RF-ID reader/writer O62 demodulates the received modulatedinformation.

The coordinate accuracy identification information O63 extracts anaccuracy identifier from the received information.

The CPU O64 controls a system of the mobile device O60. The CPU O64controls operations of each unit included in the mobile device O60.

The program execution unit O65 executes a program based on the serviceID included in the received information.

The data processing unit O66 performs data processing for informationtransmitted from the first server O101.

The memory unit O67 temporarily stores the information processed by thedata processing unit O66.

The display unit O68 d displays the information stored in the memoryunit O67.

The communication antenna O68 is connected to a general-purpose networksuch as the Internet.

The transmission unit O70 modulates information to be transmitted to thegeneral-purpose network such as the Internet.

The receiving unit O71 demodulates information received via thegeneral-purpose network such as the Internet.

The communication unit O72 generates and analyzes information to beexchanged (transmitted and received) in communication with other devicesvia the general-purpose network such as the Internet.

The position information storage unit O73 stores position informationgenerated by the mobile device O60.

The RF-ID storage unit O74 holds product ID and service ID which areobtained from the RF-ID device O50.

The RF-ID detection unit O75 detects a response from the RF-ID deviceO10.

The URL O76 extracts the first server URL from the information receivedfrom the RF-ID device O50.

The reproducing unit O77 reproduces the position information stored inthe position information storage unit O73.

The relative position calculation unit O78 calculates relative positioninformation from (a) the position information which is obtained from theposition information storage unit O73 and then reproduced and (b)position information of a current position (current positioninformation) of the mobile device O60.

The coordinate information sending unit O79 provides other units withthe position information of the mobile device O60 which is generated ata timing of receiving a trigger from the RF-ID detection unit O75.

The recording unit O80 writes the position information provided from thecoordinate information sending unit O79, into the position informationstorage unit O73.

The building coordinate information output unit O81 extracts buildingcoordinate information from the information received by thecommunication antenna O68.

The registered-coordinate unit O82 extracts registered coordinateinformation from the information received by the communication antennaO68.

The determination unit O83 examines (determines) an accuracy of theregistered coordinate information extracted by the registered-coordinateunit O82.

If the determination unit O83 determines that the registered coordinateinformation is reliable, then the reference coordinate unit O84 sets theregistered coordinate information to be reference coordinate informationand provides the reference coordinate information to the positioninformation correction unit O93.

The position information output unit O85 generates position informationusing direction information provided from the direction information unitO87 and position information provided from the position information unitO86, and provides the generated position information to another unit.

The position information provided from the position information unit O86and the direction information provided from the direction informationunit O87 are position information of the mobile device O60 which isprovided form the absolute coordinate calculation unit O107 thatincludes the position information correction unit O93 and the directioninformation correction unit O94.

The magnetic compass O88 determines a direction. In particular, themagnetic compass O88 corrects and calculates pieces of magnetisminformation such as geomagnetism information which are detected by themagnetism sensors O88 a, O88 b, and O88 c detecting x-axis, y-axis, andz-axis directions, respectively. Thereby, the magnetic compass O88calculates an absolute direction relative to a current position of themobile device O60 on the earth.

The direction information unit O89 generates direction information frominformation detected by the magnetic compass O88.

The satellite antenna O90 communicates with satellites.

The position information calculation unit O91 calculates positioninformation of the mobile device O50 from a result of the communicationwith the satellites. For example, the position information calculationunit O91 calculates longitude, latitude, and altitude of the position ofthe mobile device O50.

The position information unit O92 generates position information fromthe position information generated by the position informationcalculation unit O91.

The position information correction unit O93 corrects a result ofposition information obtained from the integrators O105 and O106, byusing pieces of information provided from the position information O92,the reference coordinate unit O84, and the building coordinateinformation output unit O81.

The direction information correction unit O94 corrects a result ofdirection information obtained from the integrators O105 and O106, byusing the information provided from the direction information unit O89.

The angular velocity sensor O95 measures an angular velocity in thex-axis direction of the mobile device O60.

The angular velocity sensor O96 measures an angular velocity in they-axis direction of the mobile device O60.

The angular velocity sensor O97 measures an angular velocity in thez-axis direction of the mobile device O60. Since the magnetic sensorscan detect a direction without the angular velocity sensors, the angularvelocity sensor mat be replaced by the magnetic sensors.

The acceleration sensor O98 measures an acceleration in the x-axisdirection of the mobile device O60.

The acceleration sensor O99 measures an acceleration in the y-axisdirection of the mobile device O60.

The acceleration sensor O100 measures an acceleration in the z-axisdirection of the mobile device O60.

The integrator O105 integrates results of the measurement of the angularvelocity sensors O95, O96, and O97.

The integrator O106 integrates results of the measurement of theacceleration sensors O98, O99, and O100.

The absolute coordinate calculation unit O107 includes the positioninformation correction unit O93 and the direction information correctionunit O94, in order to calculate absolute coordinates of the mobiledevice O60.

As described above, the mobile device O60 according to the thirteenthembodiment can determine a position of the mobile device O60 when themobile device O60 receives the product information from the RF-ID deviceO50, thereby generating position information of the mobile device O60.Thereby, the mobile device O60 transmits, to the first server O10, theposition information and the product information of the product havingthe RF-ID device O50 in association with each other. In addition, (a)the reference coordinates and the building coordinate information whichare generated from the registered coordinates received from the RF-IDdevice O50, (b) the position information generated by the positioninformation unit O92, and (c) the information generated by the directioninformation unit O89 allow the current position information of themobile device O60 to be corrected. In addition, combination of theregistered coordinate information in the first server O101 and thebuilding coordinate information in the second server O103 makes itpossible to generate a 3D product map of a building in which a producthaving the RF-ID device 10 registered by using the mobile device O60 islocated. It is also possible to display the generated 3D product map onthe display unit O68 d.

Next, the first server O101 according to the thirteenth embodiment isdescribed.

The first server O101 is a server connected to the mobile device O60 viaa general-purpose network such as the Internet. The first server O101includes a registered-coordinate information unit O102 in which piecesof information regarding products having the RF-ID devices O50 aremanaged.

The registered-coordinate information unit O102 receives the informationof the RF-ID device O10 and the information of the mobile device O60which are in association with each other. The registered-coordinateinformation unit O102 manages the information of the mobile device O60as parent device information and the RF-ID device O50 as child deviceinformation in association with each other. The child device informationis added with the position information generated by the mobile deviceO60 so as to manage also information indicating whether the terminaldevice (product having the RF-ID device O50) exists. In addition,combination of the building coordinate information received from thesecond server O103 and the information in the registered-coordinateinformation unit O102 makes it possible to generate a 3D product map ofproducts including the mobile device O60 arranged in the correspondingbuilding.

Next, the second server O103 according to the thirteenth embodiment isdescribed.

The second server O101 is a server connected to the first server O103via the general-purpose network such as the Internet.

The second server O103 includes a building coordinate database O104 inwhich a room arrangement and coordinates of each existing building (forexample, longitude, latitude, and altitude) are managed in associationwith each other.

The room arrangement and coordinates of each existing building stored inthe building coordinate database O104 can be combined with theregistered coordinate information registered in the first server O103 inorder to generate a 3D product map of products including the mobiledevice O60 arranged in the corresponding building. The buildingcoordinate database O104 may be managed as private information in aserver having security higher than that of the first server O101 (forexample, a server having setting of preventing the server from directlycommunicating with the mobile device O60). In this aspect, it ispossible reduce leakage of the private information.

As described above, in the system according to the thirteenthembodiment, the product information of the product having the RF-IDdevice O50 is read by the mobile device O60 using proximity wirelesscommunication. Then, the mobile device O60 transmits, to the firstserver O103, (a) the product information received from the RF-ID deviceO50 and (b) the position information generated by touching the RF-IDdevice O50 by the mobile device O60 to perform proximity wirelesscommunication, which are in association with each other. The firstserver O103 can manage the information of the mobile device O60 asparent device information and the information of the product having theRF-ID device O50 as child device information, in association with eachother. In addition, if relative positions of such products having theRF-ID devices O50 are calculated using pieces of the positioninformation of the products, the relative positions can be used togenerate a 3D map of the products.

In addition, the system includes the second server O103 having adatabase in which a room arrangement and coordinates of each buildingare managed. The room arrangement and coordinates are combined withpieces of position information of products which are managed in thefirst server O101. Thereby, it is possible to generate a 3D map (3Dproduct map) of the products having the RF-ID devices O50 arranged ineach building.

Moreover, the mobile device O60 can correct the current positioninformation of the mobile device O60 by using (a) the referencecoordinates and the building coordinate information which are generatedfrom the registered coordinates received from the RF-ID device O50, (b)the position information generated by the position information unit O92,and (c) the information generated by the direction information unit O89.

The following describes processing of registering the productinformation of the product having the RF-ID device O50 into the firstserver O101.

If the mobile device O60 touches the RF-ID device O50 to be able toperform proximity wireless communication with the RF-ID device O50, themobile device O60 supplies power and clock to the RF-ID device O50 thatthereby starts operating.

With the power supply, the RF-ID device O50 modulates the product IDO51, the first server URL O52, the service ID O53, and the accuracyidentifier O54 which are stored in a nonvolatile memory. The accuracyidentifier O54 represents an accuracy of an absolute position of aproduct having the RF-ID device O50. The RF-ID device O50 then transmitsthe modulated pieces of information to the mobile device O60.

In receiving the product ID O51, the first server URL O52, the serviceID O53, and the accuracy identifier O54 by the antenna O61, the mobiledevice O60 demodulates the received pieces of information in the RF-IDdevice O62.

The URL unit O76 extracts the first server URL O52 and provides theextracted first server URL O52 to the communication unit O72.

The RF-ID storage unit O74 stores the product ID O51 and the service IDO53.

The coordinate accuracy identification information O63 extracts theaccuracy identifier O54 and provides the extracted accuracy identifierO54 to the determination unit O83.

The RF-ID detection unit O75 provides the coordinate information sendingunit O79 and the reference coordinate unit O84 with a trigger fornotifying of the receipt of the pieces of information from the RF-IDdevice O50.

In receiving the trigger, the coordinate information sending unit O79provides the communication unit O72 with the position information of themobile device N60 which is received from the position information outputunit O85.

Here, the description is given for the position information of themobile device O60 outputted by the position information output unit O85.

First, the absolute coordinate calculation unit O107 receives (a) aresult of integrating, by the integrator O105, results detected by theangular velocity sensors O95 to O97 and (b) a result of integrating, bythe integrator O106, results detected by the acceleration sensors O98 toO100. Here, the absolute coordinate calculation unit O107 may receivealso direction information from the magnetic sensors O88 a, O88 b, andO88 c. This aspect can eliminate the angular velocity sensors, therebyreducing a cost.

In the absolute coordinate calculation unit O107, the positioninformation correction unit O93 and the direction information correctionunit O94 correct the results of the integrators O105 and O106 by usingthe information stored in the position information unit 92 and theinformation stored in the direction information O89. The informationstored in the position information unit 92 is a calculation result ofthe position information calculation unit O91 using the satelliteantenna O90. The information stored in the direction information O89 isa direction indicated by the magnetic compass O88. The angular velocitysensors O88 a, O88 b, and O88 c are used to estimate a distance of atravel of the mobile device O60. When a user of the mobile device O60walks, a step count detection calculation unit O100 a calculates awalking travel distance from walking steps of the user, therebydetermining a position (coordinates) of the mobile device O60. When theuser having the mobile device O60 enters a house, it is difficult forthe mobile device O60 to receive radio waves from GPS satellites. Anaccuracy of the positioning is significantly lowered or the radio wavescannot be received. In the situation, the step count detectioncalculation unit O100 a is used instead to estimate a direction of thewalking travel, by detecting direction by the three-axis magneticsensors and acceleration by the three-axis acceleration sensors.Additional use of the three-axis angular velocity sensors detecting anangular velocity can determine absolute coordinates of the position ofthe mobile device O60. The mobile device O60 first obtains correctabsolute coordinates from the GPS satellites. And then, when radio wavesof the GPS satellites become weak, the mobile device O60 switches theGPS to the positioning means using acceleration, geomagnetism, andangular velocity. Thereby, the absolute coordinates can be kept correctat least in a certain time period. Furthermore, it is also possible thatcorrect absolute coordinates are recorded on a RF-ID reader or a RF-IDtag provided to a door opening/closing at an entrance of a house, ahospital room, and or the like. In this aspect, a portable device (themobile device O60) can read the correct absolute coordinates when theportable device is used to unlock the door for authentication. As aresult, the absolute coordinates can be regularly calibrated. Asdescribed above, it is possible, even in a house, to obtain correctabsolute coordinates without receiving radio waves from GPS satellites.Therefore, in the house, when the portable device is brought intoproximity of a RF-ID device of a product such as an air conditioner, aTV, or a DVD recorder in order to read data from the RF-ID device, theportable device operating at a frequency of 13.5 MHz is not far from theproduct more than 5 cm. If the portable device holds correct absolutecoordinates, the portable device can transmit, to a server, a productname and a product serial number of the product and a MAC address, whichare obtained from the RF-ID device when the portable device is inproximity of the product (namely touches the product), and the correctabsolute coordinates in association with each other. Thereby, it ispossible to offer significant advantages of recording, onto a server,absolute coordinates on the earth regarding each product with anaccuracy having an error within 5 cm.

Next, the absolute coordinate calculation unit O107 provides thecorrected direction information in the direction information unit O87and the corrected position information in the position information unitO86 to the position information output unit O85.

The position information output unit O85 generates position informationfrom the corrected direction information in the direction informationunit O87 and the corrected position information in the positioninformation unit O86.

By the above-described processing, the mobile device O60 eventuallygenerates position information (current position information) of themobile device O60.

Then, the program execution unit O65 provides the product ID and theservice ID, which are stored in the RF-ID storage unit O74, to thecommunication unit O72.

The communication unit O72 generates data (information) including (a)the position information provided from the coordinate informationsending unit O79 and (b) the product ID and the service ID provided fromthe program execution unit O65. The communication unit O72 designatesthe first server URL notified from the URL unit O76 to be a destinationaddress of the data, and provides the data and the address to thetransmission unit O70. The transmission unit O70 modulates the data andtransmits the modulated data to the first server O101 via thecommunication antenna O68.

In receiving the data from the mobile device O60, the first server O101demodulates the modulated data.

The registered-coordinate information unit O102 stores the informationof the mobile device O60 as parent device information and theinformation of the RF-ID device O50 as child device information inassociation with each other. In more detail, the product ID O51 and theservice ID O53 which are information of the product having the RF-IDdevice O50 (child device) are managed in association with the positioninformation of a position at which the mobile device O60 (parent device)receives the product ID O51 and the service ID O53 from the RF-ID deviceO50.

The following describes processing performed by the mobile device O60 togenerate a 3D map of products (a 3D product map). Each of the productshas the RF-ID device 10 and has been registered by the mobile device O60onto the first server O101.

FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating an example of an arrangement of theproducts having the RF-ID units O50 according to the thirteenthembodiment of the present invention.

In a living room on the first floor, a TV O50A, a BD recorder O50B, andan air conditioner O50C are arranged. In a Japanese room on the firstfloor, an air conditioner O50D is arranged. On the second floor, a TVO50E and an air conditioner O50F are arranged. Each of the aboveproducts is embedded with the RF-ID device O50. It is assumed thatcoordinates of a position of each product have already been registeredto the registered-coordinate information unit O102 connected to thefirst server O101, by using the mobile device O60 employing theabove-described processing for registering product information stored inthe RF-ID device O50.

First, the communication unit O72 in the mobile device O60 generatesproduct information request data to be used to request the first serverO101 to provide the product information registered by using the mobiledevice O60.

The transmission unit O70 modulates the product information request dataand transmits the modulated data to the first server O101 via thecommunication antenna O68.

In receiving the product information request data, the first server O101generates product information response data and transmits the generateddata to the mobile device O60. The product information response dataincludes the child product information that managed in association withthe mobile device O60 as its parent device.

In this example, the product information response data includes theproduct ID O51, the service ID, and the position information regardingeach of the TV O50A, the BD recorder O50B, the air conditioner O50C, theair conditioner O50D, the TV O50E, and the air conditioner O50F.

Next, the first server O101 transmits the same product informationresponse data to the second server O103.

Based on the position information of each product included in theproduct information response data, the second server O103 extracts, fromthe building coordinate database O104, image data including position(coordinate) information of a building (hereinafter, “buildingcoordinate information”) located at the same position as that of eachproduct.

FIG. 128 illustrates the building coordinate information extracted fromthe building coordinate database O104. The building coordinateinformation includes an image of a room arrangement and positioninformation of a building.

The second server O103 transmits the extracted building coordinateinformation to the mobile device O60.

The receiving unit O71 in the mobile device O60 receives the productinformation response data via the communication antenna O68, thenmodulates the received information, and provides the modulatedinformation to the communication unit O72.

The communication unit O72 provides the modulated information to theprogram execution unit O65.

The program execution unit O65 generates image data of a 3D map ofproducts as illustrated in FIG. 129, using the position information ofeach of the products which is information included in the productinformation response data. In the 3D map, the products are mapped asdifferent icons on respective coordinates based on the correspondingposition information, so that the user can learn the arrangement of theproducts at a glance.

The program execution unit O65 provides the generated image data to thedata processing unit O66.

The data processing unit O66 provides the image data to the memory unitO67 in which the image data is temporarily stored.

The display unit O68 d displays image data of the 3D map of productsillustrated in FIG. 128 which is stored in the memory unit O67.

Next, in receiving the building coordinate information from the secondserver O103 via the communication antenna O68, the receiving unit O71 inthe mobile device O60 demodulates the received building coordinateinformation, and provides the demodulated information to the buildingcoordinate information output unit O81.

The building coordinate information output unit O81 analyzes thebuilding coordinate information and provides the building coordinateinformation to the display unit O68 d.

The display unit O68 d displays image data of a 3D product map asillustrated in FIG. 130. The displayed image data is a combination ofthe image data of FIG. 128 and the already-displayed image data of FIG.129.

As described above, it is possible to generate a 3D product map whichthe user having the mobile device O60 can see an arrangement of productsat a glance.

Next, the description is given for the processing performed by themobile device O60 to correct the position information of the mobiledevice O60 by using the building coordinate information.

It is assumed in this example that product information of the airconditioner O50D in FIG. 127 is to be registered to the first serverO101.

Here, the processing until when the first server O101 receives dataincluding product ID and service ID from the mobile device O60 is thesame as the processing described previously, and therefore is notexplained again below.

In receiving the product information of the air conditioner O50D, thefirst server O101 transmits the position information of the airconditioner D50D to the second server O103.

The second server O103 extracts, from the building coordinate databaseO104, the building coordinate information of FIG. 128 corresponding tothe position information of the air conditioner O50D. Then, the secondserver O103 transmits the extracted building coordinate information tothe first server O101.

If the product to be registered is a product usually fixed to a wall orsomewhere, such as an air conditioner, the first server O101 compares(a) the position information of the air conditioner that is indicated inthe building coordinate information to (b) the position information ofthe air conditioner that is generated by the mobile device O60. If theposition information of the air conditioner that is generated by themobile device O60 is not close to a wall, the first server O101transmits, to the mobile device O60, the position information(hereinafter, referred to also as “building coordinate information) ofthe air conditioner that is indicated in the building coordinateinformation.

In receiving the building coordinate information, the receiving unit O71in the mobile device O60 demodulates the building coordinate informationand provides the demodulated information to the building coordinateinformation output unit O81. The building coordinate information outputunit O81 determines, based on the building coordinate information andthe position information of the air conditioner, that the currentposition information of the mobile device O60 is to be corrected. Then,the building coordinate information output unit O81 provides thebuilding coordinate information to the position information correctionunit O93.

The position information correction unit O93 corrects the currentposition information of the mobile device O60 based on the buildingcoordinate information provided from the building coordinate informationoutput unit O81.

Next, the mobile device O60 registers information of the air conditionerO50D into the first server O101 in association with the correctedcurrent position information of the mobile device O60.

As described above, (a) the position information of the air conditionerthat is indicated in the building coordinate information is compared to(b) the position information of the air conditioner that is generated bythe mobile device O60. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether ornot (b) the position information of the air conditioner that isgenerated by the mobile device O60 is deviated from a correct position.As a result, the position information of the mobile device O60 can becorrected.

It should be noted that it has been described that the first server O101receives the building coordinate information from the second server O103for the determination. However, the present invention is not limited tothe above. For example, it is also possible that the mobile device O60obtains the building coordinate information from the second server O103before transmitting information to be registered to the first serverO101 and that the mobile device O60 compares the building coordinateinformation to the position information of the air conditioner O50D todetermine whether or not the position information of the mobile deviceO60 is to be corrected.

Next, the description is given for the processing performed by themobile device O60 to correct the position information of the mobiledevice O60 by using the accuracy identifier.

It is assumed that the product information of the air conditioner O50Chas already been registered to the first server O101 and the mobiledevice O60 touches the air conditioner O50C.

When the mobile device O60 receives, via the antenna O61, the product IDO51, the first server URL O52, the service ID O53, and the accuracyidentifier O54 from the RF-ID device O50 of the air conditioner O50C,the RF-ID unit O62 in the mobile device O60 demodulates these pieces ofinformation.

At this stage, the mobile device O60 does not know whether the productinformation of the air conditioner O50C has already been registered inthe first server O101. Therefore, the mobile device O60 transmits, tothe first server O101, data including the position information of themobile device O60, the product ID, and the service ID by the productregistration processing as described previously.

In receiving the data from the mobile device O60, the first server O101demodulates the received data.

If the registered-coordinate information unit O102 determines that theproduct information of the air conditioner O50C has already beenregistered, then the first server O101 generates data including theposition information of the air conditioner O50C that is registered inthe registered-coordinate information unit O102, and then transmits thegenerated data to the mobile device O60.

When the receiving unit O71 in the mobile device O60 receives theposition information of the air conditioner O50C via the communicationantenna O68, the receiving unit O71 demodulates the received positioninformation and provides the demodulated information to theregistered-coordinate unit O82.

The registered-coordinate unit O82 extracts the position informationfrom the data including the position information of the air conditionerO50C, and provides the extracted position information to thedetermination unit O83.

The determination unit O83 determines whether or not the positioninformation received from the registered-coordinate unit O82 is to bereference coordinates, based on the accuracy identifier O54 of the RF-IDdevice O50 received from the coordinate accuracy identificationinformation O63.

FIG. 131 illustrates processing performed by the determination unit O83based on each accuracy identifier.

Regarding the accuracy identifier O54, the RF-ID device O50 ispreviously assigned with an accuracy identifier for identifying eachdifferent product as illustrated in FIG. 131.

Here, the air conditioner O50C is assigned with the accuracy identifierO54 representing a “high” accuracy.

If the determination unit O83 determines that the position informationof the mobile device O60 is to be corrected, then the determination unitO83 provides the position information received from theregistered-coordinate unit O82 to the reference coordinate unit O84.

Here, if the accuracy identifier O54 represents a “low” accuracy, thenthe mobile device O60 determines that it is not necessary to correct theposition information of the mobile device O60. Then, the mobile deviceO60 notifies the determination result to the first server O101. Thefirst server stores the new position information of the air conditionerO50C into the registered-coordinate information unit. Thereby, theprocessing is completed.

If there is a trigger from the RF-ID detection unit O75, the referencecoordinate unit O84 provides the position information received from theregistered-coordinate unit O82 to the position information correctionunit O93.

The position information correction unit O93 corrects the currentposition information of the mobile device O60 based on the positioninformation received from the reference coordinate unit O84.

Next, the mobile device O60 notifies the first server O101 of that theposition information is completed. Thereby, the processing is completed.

As described above, (a) the position information indicated in thebuilding coordinate information is compared to (b) the positioninformation generated by the mobile device O60. Thereby, it is possibleto determine whether or not (b) the position information generated bythe mobile device O60 is deviated from a correct position. As a result,the position information of the mobile device O60 can be corrected,thereby preventing unnecessary updating of the position information.

Furthermore, products which are usually not moved from an initialequipped location are designated in a group of products having a highaccuracy of the position coordinates. Thereby, reliability of theaccuracy can be improved.

If even position information of a product in the group having a highaccuracy is deviated from a correct position more than predeterminedtimes, it is possible not to correct the position information newlygenerated by the mobile device O60, but to correct the positioninformation registered in the registered-coordinate information unitO102.

It should be noted that it has been described that the mobile device O60determines, based on the accuracy identifier, whether or not theposition information is to be corrected. However, the accuracyidentifier may be transmitted to the first server O101 so that the firstserver O101 determines the necessity of the correction.

Next, the description is given for processing performed by the mobiledevice O60 to manage relative positions of the products.

Here, product registration is first performed for the TV O50A. Then,with reference to the position information of the TV O50A as a referencepoint, relative position information is generated for the BD recorderO50B that is registered next.

When the mobile device O60 receives, via the antenna O61, the product IDO51, the first server URL O52, the service ID O53, and the accuracyidentifier O54 from the RF-ID device O50 of the TV O50A, the RF-ID unitO62 in the mobile device O60 demodulates these pieces of information.The coordinate information sending unit O79 in the mobile device O60provides the recording unit O80 with the position information determinedin detecting the RF-ID device O50.

In receiving the position information, the recording unit O80 recordsthe received position information onto the position information storageunit O73.

After that, in the same product registration processing as describedearlier, the mobile device O60 registers the product information of theTV O50A into the first server O101.

Next, the mobile device O60 registers product information of the BDrecorder O50B.

When the mobile device O60 receives, via the antenna O61, the product IDO51, the first server URL O52, the service ID O53, and the accuracyidentifier O54 from the RF-ID device O50 of the BD recorder O50B, theRF-ID unit O62 in the mobile device O60 demodulates these pieces ofinformation.

The coordinate information sending unit O79 in the mobile device O60provides the recording unit O80 with the position information determinedin detecting the RF-ID device O50 of the BD recorder O50B.

The recording unit O80 does not record the position information of theBD recorder O50B onto the position information storage unit O73, becausethe position information of the TV O50A has already been recorded.

In receiving the position information from the coordinate informationsending unit O79, the relative position calculation unit O78 obtains theposition information of the TV O50A from the position informationstorage unit O73 via the reproducing unit O77.

Next, the relative position calculation unit O78 calculates relativeposition information of the BD recorder O50B which is relative to areference position (or a reference point) that is the positioninformation of the TV O50A obtained via the reproducing unit O77. Then,the relative position calculation unit O78 stores the calculation resultinto the position information recording unit.

By the above-described processing, it is possible to generate relativeposition information of a product with reference to a position of adifferent certain product.

It should be noted that it has been described that relative positioninformation is stored in the mobile device (position information storageunit O73). However, the present invention is not limited to the above.It is also possible that the mobile device O60 transmits relativeposition information to the first server O101 that manages the receivedrelative position information in the registered-coordinate informationunit O102.

It should also be noted that it has been described that the positioninformation of the TV O50A for which product registration is performedat the first time is set to be the reference position. However, thepresent invention is not limited to the above.

For example, a position predetermined by the user may be set to be thereference point (reference position). For instance, the reference pointmay be a position of an entrance of a building. If the mobile device O60is a remote controller terminal of a TV, a position of the TV may be thereference point.

FIGS. 131 and 132 illustrate examples of processing of a 3D mapaccording to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the position information storage unit O73in the mobile device O60 holds relative position information. However,the present invention in not limited to the above. For example, thefollowing aspect is also possible. The coordinate information sendingunit O79 in the mobile device O60 provides position informationgenerated by the mobile device O60 to the recording unit O80 every timethe position information is generated. The recording unit O80 therebyrecords the position information onto the position information storageunit O73. The position information storage unit O73 accumulates theposition information generated by the mobile device O60. In this aspect,the program execution unit O65 generates trajectory information of themobile device O60 from pieces of the position information accumulated inthe position information storage unit O73. Thereby, a travel of themobile device O60 can be estimated form the trajectory information.

It should be noted that it has been described in the thirteenthembodiment that the processing of the determination unit O83 isperformed based on the two kinds of accuracy identifiers in FIG. 131.However, the present invention is not limited to the above. For example,the following is also possible. Two or more kinds of productclassification are set. A threshold value is defined for each kind ofthe classification to represent a different size of deviation from theposition information. Based on the threshold value, the determinationunit O83 determines whether or not to correct the position informationof the mobile device O60.

It should also be noted that the thirteenth embodiment may be combinedwith any other embodiments of the present invention. For example, it isalso possible that the function of the communication device M1101Saccording to the tenth embodiment is provided to a product having theRF-ID device O50, and the 3D map (3D product map) as well as home ID areshared among products within the same house. In this aspect, eachproduct obtains the 3D map beforehand from the mobile device O60 usingthe NFC function.

It should also be noted that it has been described in the thirteenthembodiment that the RF-ID device O50 is provided to TVs, BD recorders,air conditioners, and the like. FIG. 134 illustrates a system includingproducts O50G to O50N each having the RF-ID device O50. Each of theproducts O50G to O50N also includes a specific small power wirelesscommunication device (for example, Zigbee), which enables the productsto directly communicate with each other within a range in which radiowaves can be received. It is assumed that each of the products O50G toO50N has already obtained a 3D map from the mobile device O60 via theRF-ID device O50. The 3D map shows an arrangement of the products O50Gto O50N. It is also possible that the 3D map is held in a server. Or,for another method, each of the products O50G to O50N may have thecommunication antenna O68 in order to obtain, via the internet, the 3Dmap showing the product arrangement. Conventionally, there is thefollowing problem. Without position information of each product,products other than minimum requisite products in a path need to beoperated. Therefore, unnecessary power consumption occurs. In thethirteenth embodiment, however, the position information makes itpossible to select and operate only terminals on the shortest pathbetween two products. Thereby, power can be saved.

The following describes the situation where a product O50H transmitsdata to a product O50K by using the specific small power wirelesscommunication device. The specific small power wireless communicationdevice usually operates at a sleep mode in terms of power saving. At thesleep mode, a power source of the specific small power wirelesscommunication device is switched ON or OFF at regular intervals. Here,timings of switching ON or OFF for the products are in synchronizationwith each other.

When the product O50H needs to transmit data, the specific small powerwireless communication device in the product O50H is switched to anawake mode. At the awake mode, the power source of the specific smallpower wireless communication device is always ON.

The product O50H examines the 3D map showing the arrangement of theproducts O50G to O50N, which has previously been obtained. From the 3Dmap of the product arrangement, the product O50H determines productslocated between the product O50H and the product O50K. In this example,a product O50J is determined from the 3D map to be a relay product torelay data.

The product O50H instructs the product O50J to switch to the awake mode.

The product O50H transmits, to the product O50J, data addressed to theproduct O50H.

When the product O50J receives the data addressed to the product O50H,the product O50J transfers the data to the O50H. Then, the product O50Jis switched to the sleep mode.

As described above, using the 3D map, the product O50H determines arelay product in order to transmit data, and causes only the determinedrelay product (product O50J) to be switched to the awake mode. Thereby,other products, which do not need to be at the awake mode, do not needto be switched to the awake mode. Without the 3D map, in order toestablish a path to the product O50K, the product O50H needs to causeall products to be switched to search for the path. Here, it is alsopossible that each of products, which do not need to be at the awakemode, is previously assigned, by using the 3D map, with an awakeprohibition identifier for identifying a product for which the awakemode is prohibited.

It should also be noted that the units included in each of theabove-described embodiments may be implemented into a Large ScaleIntegration (LSI) that is typically an integrated circuit. These unitsmay be integrated separately, or a part or all of them may be integratedinto a single chip. Here, the integrated circuit is referred to as aLSI, but the integrated circuit can be called an IC, a system LSI, asuper LSI or an ultra LSI depending on their degrees of integration. Thetechnique of integrated circuit is not limited to the LSI, and it may beimplemented as a dedicated circuit or a general-purpose processor. It isalso possible to use a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) that can beprogrammed after manufacturing the LSI, or a reconfigurable processor inwhich connection and setting of circuit cells inside the LSI can bereconfigured.

Furthermore, if due to the progress of semiconductor technologies ortheir derivations, new technologies for integrated circuits appear to bereplaced with the LSIs, it is, of course, possible to use suchtechnologies to implement the functional blocks as an integratedcircuit. For example, biotechnology and the like can be applied to theabove implementation.

It should also be noted that the embodiment of the present inventionemploys the 3D map that is a wireframe image of a house (see FIG. 111).However, such house data is private information, and 3D data is notgenerated for old buildings. Therefore, until such 3D data becomesavailable for each general house, it is necessary to obtain a roomarrangement of a house without using 3D data of the house.

When there is no 3D data of a house, an illustration is provided. In theillustration, several air conditioners are arranged in a space thatcorresponds to the house. Without 3D data, a room arrangement of a roomhaving each of the air conditioners is not known.

Here, as illustrated in FIG. 127, each of the air conditioners, whichhas a RF-ID unit compliant to APE or a NFC IC and an antenna set O50C,is provided with a detection unit (such as an ultrasonic sensor or aninfrared sensor) for detecting a distance or a position. Thereby, it ispossible to determine a relative position of the air conditioner whichis relative to walls and pieces of furniture in the room. Here, a mobiledevice 60 such as a mobile phone which has the 3D mapping function asdescribed in the embodiment of the present invention is brought intoproximity of 5 cm or less from of the RF-ID unit in the air conditioner.At this moment, if the air conditioner has a wireless communicationfunction, the mobile device 60 transmits, to the air conditioner, anaccess number such as AAID for wireless LAN or the like, and a passwordand an authentication key for access. Thereby, the air conditioner isconnected to a network in the house. In addition, in proximity of theRF-ID unit, the mobile device 60 reads a product name, a product serialnumber, a MAC address, and an authentication key from the RF-ID unit.Then, in transmitting these pieces of information to a server, themobile device 60 also transmits, to the air conditioner or the server,3D absolute coordinate information indicating the position of the mobiledevice 60. The absolute coordinate information is calibrated using: (a)the previously-described coordinate information of the relative positionrelative to walls and the like in the room; and (b1) relative positioninformation in the house where the mobile device 60 exists or (b2)absolute coordinate information on the earth. Thereby, it is possible togenerate a 3D or 2D arrangement illustration of relative coordinatesbetween the air conditioner and the room or absolute coordinates on theearth. Combination of pieces of 3D coordinate information of the severalair conditioners can result in coordinate information showing a 3D or 2Darrangement of the rooms having the air conditioners in the house, inother words, a part of the wireframe image of the house as illustratedin FIG. 127. If the above-described technique is employed for the threeair conditioners in FIG. 127, pieces of 3D mapping data of three roomscan be generated.

Since pieces of authentication data, such as the MAC address and theauthentication key, which are used to be connected with other devices,are also obtained, it is possible to automatically perform connectionauthentication with the other devices, such as TVs, a DVD recorder, anda refrigerator, in the house via a network. This terminal is notnecessary to be the air conditioner, but also to be any electric andelectronic devices in the house. Air purification device may be providedwith a distance measuring sensor to server as the terminal. However, theterminal is desirably a device, such as an air conditioner, which isequipped at a fixed location in a house, because position coordinateinformation of such a device is not changed. In this example, 3Dcoordinate information of only the rooms having the air conditioners canbe generated. However, since a user of the mobile device moves around inthe house, 3D trajectory information can be generated. The 3D trajectoryinformation regarding position coordinates is analyzed and calculated bya server to estimate positions of entrances of the respective rooms,positions of corridors, and other positions. Thereby, the 3D datashowing the arrangement of the house is further developed. The abovemethod can generate the 3D wireframe image of the house as illustratedin FIG. 127 by estimation calculation of the server, without 3Dcoordinate information of the house. Furthermore, in the method by whichthe RF-ID unit of the mobile device touches the RF-ID reader at anopening/closing entrance such as a front door of the house so as tounlock the key of the entrance, if the position of the RF-ID readerwhich is recorded onto the server or the RF-ID reader has a highaccuracy, this means that an accuracy identifier of the positioncoordinates is high. The mobile device reads the position informationfrom the RF-ID unit at the entrance and examines an accuracy of thereadout information. Therefore, touching the RF-ID unit, the mobiledevice can calibrate absolute coordinates of the position of the mobiledevice. Thereby, single touching can result in (a) locking/unlocking ofthe key and (b) calibration of absolute or relative coordinates of theposition of the mobile device.

For example, the above technique is employed in each door of corridorsin a hospital or RF-ID readers for security release when entering andleaving the rooms. Thereby, positions of doctors and nurses having themobile devices can be managed with high accuracy in a server in thehospital, when opening and closing the doors.

At present, when mobile phones, personal computers, and, in the further,microwaves and air conditioners intend to communicate with a server, itis desired to perform authentication for the devices or data entry inorder to prevent malicious behaviors.

In the embodiment of the present invention, each product in a house or aserver associated with each product stores 3D coordinate information.The mobile device is brought into proximity of a product such as amicrowave to read information from the product. Then, when the mobiledevice communicates with the server, the server causes the mobile deviceto transmit, to the server, position information of an actual currentposition of the mobile device, while authenticating the mobile device.The server compares the position information received from the mobiledevice with position information registered in the microwave or anotherserver linked to the server. Thereby, the server determines whether ornot a difference between the received position information and theregistered position information is within a predetermined range. If thedifference is within the predetermined range, then the server determinesthat the received position information is correct and thereforedownloads the position information. On the other hand, if the differenceis beyond the predetermined range, then the server determines that thereceived position information does not match the registered positioninformation and therefore stops data transmission or firmwaredownloading. Thereby, it is possible to prevent unauthorized behaviorssuch that a malicious third person downloads a fire firmware to themicrowave without authorization.

As described in the embodiment of the present invention, positionauthorization that is authorization having a new concept can be added toconventional personal authentication using a password, a finger print,and the like. For example, it can be implemented that authentication isnot successful unless the mobile device performs transmission from aspecific room such as an accounting department in a company. Since anunauthorized person performing transmission from other locations cannotbe authenticated, unauthorized behaviors can be prevented with highdegree.

Moreover, in the embodiment of the present invention, authenticationamong the product such as a microwave, the mobile device, and the serverhas possible four modes.

The first mode is when a power plug of the microwave is not set in apower outlet. In this situation, the mobile device is brought toproximity of or touch the NFC unit without a power source, such as aRF-ID unit of the microwave. Thereby, the mobile device supplies powerto the NFC unit and reads a product serial number, a server address, andthe like from a memory in the NFC unit. Then, the mobile devicetransmits the readout information to the server.

The second mode is when firmware is downloaded. In the situation, thereis a possibility that fire firmware is downloaded by a malicious thirdperson without authorization. When the power plug is set in the outlet,poser is supplied from the outlet to a CPU of the microwave to operatethe microwave. Thereby, the CPU with high performance encrypts anddecrypts authentication information, such as a random number, which isprovided from the server. Then, the microwave transmits theauthenticated information to the server via the NFC unit and the mobiledevice so that the server can perform authentication for the microwave.After establishment of the authentication, the microwave downloadsauthorized firmware from the server. As a result, it is possible toprevent unauthorized downloading of the firmware and impersonation. Ifthe above authentication is added with the previously-describedauthentication using coordinate information, security is more improved.

In this case, the CPU is operated only when authentication or the likeneeds to be performed. Therefore, cryptography calculation can beperformed with high security while reducing power consumption. As aresult, security of the authentication is improved.

The third mode is when a power plug of a home appliance (product) suchas a microwave is set to a power outlet. In this situation, when themobile device is brought into proximity of the microwave, the microwavesupplies power and clock to the NFC unit. Once the mobile device is inproximity of the microwave, a power source of the microwave is activatedto supply power to the NFC unit. If the NFC unit has a CPU with a smallload to perform cryptography calculation, calculation of cryptography orthe like takes a long time. If the mobile device moves away from themicrowave, the power supply is stopped and the calculation of the CPU isnot completed. Therefore, if power is supplied from the microwave, thestable power supply prevents stop of the calculation. If the mobiledevice is in proximity of the microwave once, the calculation iscompleted. It is not necessary to hold the mobile device in proximity ofthe microwave for a long time or a plurality of times. As a result,responsiveness is dramatically increased.

The fourth mode is when the mobile device is never in proximity of theproduct (microwave). In this situation, when information such asaccumulated “use time periods”, “failure mode information”, and the likeof the microwave is to be recorded from the CPU of the microwave onto amemory in the NFC unit or a memory shared between the NFC unit and themicrowave, if the CPU is operating, the microwave supplies power to atleast the NFC unit and the shared memory for the recording. It is notnecessary to supply power to the entire NFC unit. In order to preventsimultaneous writing from the NFC unit, the clock supply to the sharedmemory is blocked during a period of the recording. The use time periodsmay be recorded so that the NFC unit can read a part of the informationrecorded in the shared memory in the microwave. Thereby, even if, forexample, the power plug of the microwave is not set to the power outletin recycling, the mobile device can read, from the CPU of the microwave,the “use time periods”, “failure mode information”, and the like. Ofcourse, the RF-ID unit in the embodiments may be a ROM chip of NFCtechnology, a NFC circuit, or the like.

There is another application of mobility service, in which a DigitalLiving Network Alliance (DLNA) technology is used to transfer video datafrom a TV on the first floor to a TV in a bed room on the second floor,for example. In this case, the fact that an operator of a terminal(mobile device) goes to the bed room on the second floor is managed byusing position information in a server. The server can expect that theoperator entering the bed room on the second floor will bring a terminalinto proximity of the TV in the bed room. Therefore, connectionprocedure using the DLNA technology or the like has previously beencompleted so that video data is switched to be displayed on the TV inthe bed room as soon as the terminal is moved to proximity of the TV, inorder to improve a speed of the switching process. It is also possiblethat an eye direction sensor is equipped in the bed room on the secondfloor. In this aspect, when the operator enters the bed room and looksat the TV, video data is switched to be displayed on the TV using theDLNA connection or the like. Therefore, as soon as the operator entersthe bed room and looks at the TV, the TV is powered ON and the videodata displayed in the room on the first floor or the mobile device (theterminal) is switched to be displayed on the TV in the bed room on thesecond floor. Only eye direction can switch where to display the videodata. As described above, if registration of the position information ofthe TV is performed as described in the embodiments of the presentinvention, applications of home appliances can be significantlyenlarged.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY

The present invention allows a receiving device (apparatus) such as a TVto receive data such as images from a server by simple procedures. Thepresent invention is useful in any systems for simplifying operations ofa display device (apparatus) such as a TV or personal computer forobtaining data via the Internet. The communication device according toan aspect of the present invention may be implemented as various deviceshaving a RF-ID unit in which identification information and a virtualmachine program are stored. For example, the communication device may beelectronic devices such as a camera, home appliances such as a ricecooker and a refrigerator, and daily commodities such as a toothbrush.

NUMERICAL REFERENCES

-   1 image capturing device-   3 power switch-   6 lens-   6 a display unit-   20 first antenna-   21 second antenna-   22 antenna cover-   30 image capturing unit-   31 video processing unit-   32 recording/reproducing unit-   33 third memory-   34 IC card-   35 first processing unit-   36 encryption unit-   37 communication unit-   38 transmission unit-   40 Internet-   42 server-   45 TV-   46 RF-ID reader/writer-   47 RF-ID unit-   51 recording/reproducing unit-   52 second memory-   90 URL generation unit-   91 second power supply unit-   95 second processing unit-   100 battery-   101 first power supply unit-   102 third power supply unit-   105 data receiving unit-   106 recording unit-   107 reproducing unit-   108 data transfer unit-   110 display unit (TV)-   111 medium identification information-   115 service detail identification information-   116 operation program-   117 directory information on a server in which operation program is    recorded-   118 operation program selection information-   119 operation program existence identifier-   120 directory information on a server in which image display method    instruction information is recorded-   121 identifier indicating whether or not image display method    instruction information is in a server-   122 display order identifier-   123 all-image display identifier-   124 information of partial image of specific directory-   125 list display identifier-   126 slide show identifier-   127 image quality prioritization-   128 speed prioritization-   129 directory of display audio-   130 directory of display audio-   131 partial-image display identifier-   132 image of specific user-   133 password of specific user-   134 directory having images-   135 camera model information-   136 forced print instruction-   137 directory of to-be-printed image data-   138 antenna of RF-ID reader/writer of TV-   139 post card-   140 camera icon-   141 post card icon-   142 blank image-   143 actual image-   170 activation unit-   171 communication unit-   172 power detection unit-   173 modulation unit-   174 first memory-   175 modulation switch unit-   500 electronic catalog server information input device-   502 electronic catalog notification card-   504 RF-ID reader-   506 electronic catalog server-   507 electronic catalog database-   508 customer attribute database-   520 key input receiving unit-   521 RF-ID transmission input receiving unit-   573 URL generation unit-   584 image selection unit-   588 user information input unit-   589 operation mode determination unit-   601 customer attribute data obtainment unit-   602 electronic catalog data obtainment unit-   650 electronic catalog display screen-   651 product/service data-   652 highlighted electronic catalog operation option-   800 printer-   801 RF-ID-attached post card-   810 post card destination information input unit-   820 display screen on which post card registration image is selected-   821 display screen on which post card print image is selected-   822 display screen on which post card insertion message is inputted-   823 display screen on which post card destination information is    inputted-   824 display screen on which post card destination decision is    confirmed-   825 thumbnail image-   826 selecting thumbnail image-   827 remote controller-   2000 recorder-   2001 tuner-   2002 input signal processing unit-   2003 output signal processing unit-   2004 system control unit-   2005 memory-   2006 operation input unit-   2007 communication unit-   2008 HDD-   2009 optical disk drive-   2010 bus-   2011 setting information processing unit-   2012 recorder ID-   2013 setting information-   2100 RF-ID card-   2101 memory-   2102 processing unit-   2103 apparatus operation information-   2104 operation apparatus identification information-   2105 target apparatus information-   2106 operation instruction information-   2107 communication information-   2109, 2110, 2111 operation instruction information data-   2112 URL-   2113 login ID-   2114 password-   2250 setting information-   2260 instruction detail information-   2261 instruction target information-   2262 communication execution information-   2560 image server-   2561 Internet-   2562 image capturing device-   2563 TV-   2564 mailing object-   2565 RF-ID unit-   3001 mailing object-   3002 RF-ID unit-   3003 memory unit-   3045 TV-   3046 RF-ID reader/writer-   3047 display unit-   5501 wireless antenna-   5502 communicable device search unit-   5503 receiving unit-   5504 decryption unit-   5505 URL generation unit-   5506 communication unit-   5507 transmission unit-   5508 communication interface-   5509 receiving unit-   5510 data processing unit-   5511 memory unit-   5512 display unit-   5513 CPU-   5940 data format used when a captured image is uploaded from the    image capturing device 1 to a server 42-   5950 data format of RF-ID communication between the image capturing    device 1 and the TV 45-   6005 TV program execution circumstance-   6006 server connection instruction-   6007 download-completion-time processing set instruction-   6008 download instruction-   6009 download-completion-time instruction-   6010 slide show display instruction-   6512 wireless communication device-   6520 remote controller with display function-   6521 wireless communication transmission unit-   6522 RF-ID reader-   6523 display unit-   6524 input unit-   6525 program execution virtual machine-   6530 remote controller without display function-   6531 wireless communication transmission unit-   6532 RF-ID reader-   6533 input device-   6534 LED-   6535 memory-   7000 forced display instruction storage unit-   7001 format identification information storage unit-   7002 program storage unit-   7003 second memory reading unit-   7004 URL generation unit-   7005 program generation unit-   7006 program part storage unit-   7007 program writing unit-   7008 product serial number-   7009 language code storage unit-   7010 program execution virtual machine-   7020 use status detection unit-   7021 trouble detection unit-   7022 power consumption detection unit-   8001 external device-   8002 communication device-   8003 server-   8803 first encryption unit-   8804 modulation/demodulation unit-   8805 power induction unit-   8806, 8808 antenna-   8807 CPU-   8809 modulation/demodulation unit-   8810 output switch unit-   8811 modulation/demodulation switch unit-   8812 registration information generation unit-   8813 device information storage unit-   8814 communication device identification information-   8815 user information-   8816 telephone number-   8817 e-mail address-   8818 user identification information-   8819 post code-   8820 input unit-   8821 key-   8822 external device information memory-   8823 second encryption unit-   8824 access control information generation unit-   8825 server information storage unit-   8826 server name-   8827 sever address-   8828 login account-   8829 login password-   8830 server communication unit-   8831 IP communication information storage unit-   8832 address-   8834 Internet-   8835 communication unit-   8836 second decryption unit-   8837 first decryption unit-   8838 database registration unit-   8839 database-   8840 display detail selection unit-   8841 WEB server-   8842 display unit-   8850 external device ID storage unit-   M1001, M1002, M1003 house-   M1004 Internet-   M1005, N40 registration server-   M1006 router-   M1007 wireless AP-   M1008, M1009 TV-   M1010 DVD recorder-   M1011 digital camera-   M1012 microwave-   M1013 refrigerator-   M1014 mobile phone-   M1101, Y02 communication device-   M1102, M1102S, M1102R proximity wireless communication device-   M1103 home network communication device-   M1104 user IF device-   M1105, Y011, Y022, N34, O64 CPU-   M1201 registration device-   M1202 device UID obtainment unit-   M1204 registration information generation unit-   M1205 home ID management unit-   M1206 position information obtainment unit-   M1207 registration information transmitting/receiving unit-   M1208 registration database-   M1101S transmitting communication device-   M1101R receiving communication device-   M1601 home network-   M1209S home ID storage unit-   M1602R home ID sharing unit-   M1603S home network connection detection unit-   M1854 communication terminal-   Y01 terminal device-   Y04 server-   Y012 failure sensor unit-   Y013 use history logging unit-   Y014, Y024, N13 memory-   Y015, Y025 ROM-   Y016, Y026 RAM-   Y017 modulation unit-   Y018, Y021, N11, O61 antenna-   Y023 demodulation unit-   Y027 position information determination unit-   Y028 latitude/longitude positioning unit (GPS)-   Y029 altitude positioning unit-   Y030 position correction unit-   Y031 GPS antenna-   Y032 communication memory-   Y035 information adding unit-   Y036, Y30, N44, O72 communication unit-   Y041 device management DB-   N10, O10, O50 RF-ID unit-   N12 power supply unit-   N13A UID-   N13B part number-   N13C server specific information-   N13D operation program-   N14 reproducing unit-   N15 data transfer unit-   N21, O62 RF-ID reader/writer-   N22, O74 RF-ID storage unit-   N23, O65 program execution unit-   N24, O66 data processing unit-   N25, O67 memory unit-   N26, O68 d display unit-   N27, N41 communication I/F unit-   N28, N42, O70 transmission unit-   N29, N43, O71 receiving unit-   N31 GPS-   N32 6-axis sensor-   N33, O73 position information storage unit-   N45 product information management unit-   N46 image data storage unit-   N47 program storage unit-   N48 position information generation unit-   N49 product control unit-   N10A, N10I, O50A, O50E TV-   N10B, O50B BD recorder-   N10C, N10D, N10F, N10J, O50C, O50D, O50F air conditioner-   N10K FF heater-   N10E, N10G fire alarm-   N10I TV-   N10H solar panel-   O51 product ID-   O52 first server URL-   O53 service ID-   O54 accuracy identifier-   O60 mobile device-   O63 coordinate accuracy identification information-   O67 memory unit-   O68 d display unit-   O68 communication antenna-   O75 RF-ID detection unit-   O76 URL unit-   O77 reproducing unit-   O78 relative position calculation unit-   O79 coordinate information sending unit-   O80 recording unit-   O81 building coordinate information output unit-   O82 registered-coordinate unit-   O83 determination unit-   O84 reference coordinate unit-   O85 position information output unit-   O86, O92 position information unit-   O87 direction information unit-   O88 magnetic compass-   O89 geomagnetism correction unit-   O90 satellite antenna-   O91 position information calculation unit-   O93 position information correction unit-   O94 direction information correction unit-   O95, O96, O97 angular velocity sensor-   O98, O99, O100 acceleration sensor-   O101 first server-   O102 registered-coordinate information unit-   O103 second server-   O104 building coordinate database-   O105, O106 integrator-   O107 absolute coordinate calculation unit

1-11. (canceled)
 12. A non-transitory computer-readable recording mediumhaving stored thereon a computer program for use by a communicationdevice that transmits external device information to a server via anetwork, the external device information being received from an externaldevice by using Near Field Communication (NFC), the computer programcausing the communication device to perform a method comprising:receiving external device information from the external device bycommunicating with the external device after receiving a reply from theexternal device by NFC, the external device information includingidentification information of the external device and being encrypted byfirst encryption that the server can decrypt, the identificationinformation of the external device being stored in the external device,the reply from the external device being set in response to polling thatis performed in the NFC with the external device via an antenna unitincluded in the communication device; generating registrationinformation that includes (a) the external device information which isencrypted by the first encryption and received and (b) communicationdevice information including communication device identificationinformation for identifying the communication device, the registrationinformation being to be registered in a database included in the server;and registering the registration information in the database included inthe server, by (i) accessing the server via the network based on accessinformation including address information of the server and (ii)transmitting, to the server, the registration information which isencrypted by second encryption that is different from the firstencryption.